Daikin VRV RWEYQ Water Cooled - Service Manual

SiAU301015EC
Service
Manual
RWEYQ-P Series
Water Cooled
Heat Pump 50 Hz
Heat Recovery 50 Hz
SiAU301015EC
RWEYQ-P Series
Water Cooled
Heat Pump, Heat Recovery
R-410A 50 Hz
ED Reference
For items below, please refer to Engineering Data.
No. Item ED No. Page
1 Specifications - Indoor Unit EDAU341325C 44-45, 62-63, 80-81, 100,
112-113, 134, 150-151, 172-173,
194-195, 210, 214-216, 256-258,
296, 326-327, 342-345
2 Specifications - Outside Unit EDAU301010 12-14
3 Piping Diagrams EDAU301010 17
4 Option List EDAU341325C 60, 78, 98, 109, 131, 147, 169,
212, 253, 293, 308, 323, 340, 365,
1066
EDAU301010 68
1. Safety Cautions...................................................................................... vi
1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers............................ vi
1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users.............................. viii
2. Icons Used ............................................................................................. xi
Part 1 General Information ........................................................... 1

1. Model Names of Indoor/Outside Units ....................................................2
1.1 Indoor Units ..............................................................................................2
1.2 Outside Units............................................................................................4
1.3 Air Treatment Equipment .........................................................................4
2. External Appearance...............................................................................5
2.1 Indoor Units ..............................................................................................5
2.2 Outside Units............................................................................................7
3. Combination of Outside Units .................................................................8
4. Capacity Range.......................................................................................9
Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit ........................................................... 10

1. Refrigerant Circuit .................................................................................11
1.1 Outside Unit............................................................................................11
1.2 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................13
1.3 BS Unit ...................................................................................................14
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................21
i Table of Contents
SiAU301015EC
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................23

3.1 In Case of Heat Pump Connection.........................................................23
3.2 In Case of Heat Recovery Connection
(Single Outside Unit Installation) ............................................................26
Part 3 Remote Controller ............................................................ 36

1. Applicable Models .................................................................................37
2. Names and Functions ...........................................................................38
2.1 BRC1C62 ...............................................................................................38
2.2 BRC1D61 ...............................................................................................39
2.3 BRC1E61, BRC1E62 .............................................................................41
2.4 Wireless Remote Controller ...................................................................43
3. MAIN/SUB Setting.................................................................................45
3.1 BRC1C62, BRC1D61 .............................................................................45
3.2 BRC1E61 ...............................................................................................45
3.3 BRC1E62 ...............................................................................................46
4. Centralized Control Group No. Setting..................................................48
4.1 BRC1C62, BRC1D61 .............................................................................48
4.2 BRC1E61 ...............................................................................................49
4.3 BRC1E62 ...............................................................................................50
5. Service Mode ........................................................................................51
5.1 BRC1C62, BRC1D61, Wireless Remote Controller ...............................51
5.2 BRC1E61 ...............................................................................................53
5.3 BRC1E62 ...............................................................................................55
6. Inspection Mode....................................................................................58
6.1 BRC1C62, BRC1D61 .............................................................................58
Part 4 Functions and Control...................................................... 59

1. General Functions.................................................................................60
1.1 Operation Mode......................................................................................60
2. Basic Control.........................................................................................61
2.1 Normal Operation ...................................................................................61
2.2 Indoor Unit Operation Mode Details .......................................................62
2.3 Compressor Control ...............................................................................63
2.4 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .......................................................65
2.5 Heat Exchange Mode in Heating or
Simultaneous Cooling/Heating Operation ..............................................66
3. Special Control......................................................................................68
3.1 Startup Control .......................................................................................68
3.2 Oil Return Operation ..............................................................................70
3.3 Oil Return Operation of Water Heat Exchanger .....................................72
3.4 Cooling/Heating mode switching (BSQ-AV1, BS-Q14AV1) ...................73
3.5 Pump down Residual Operation Control ................................................76
3.6 Refrigerant Drift Prevention....................................................................78
3.7 Standby ..................................................................................................79
3.8 Stopping Operation ................................................................................80
4. Protection Control .................................................................................82
4.1 High Pressure Protection Control...........................................................82
4.2 Low Pressure Protection Control............................................................83
Table of Contents ii
SiAU301015EC
4.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................................................85

4.4 Inverter Protection Control .....................................................................86
4.5 Cooling Fan Control ...............................................................................87
5. Other Control.........................................................................................88
5.1 Outside Unit Rotation .............................................................................88
6. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) .............................................................89
6.1 Drain Pump Control................................................................................89
6.2 Thermostat Control.................................................................................91
6.4 Hot Start Control (In Heating Only) ........................................................94
6.5 Freeze-up Prevention.............................................................................95
6.6 List of Swing Flap Operations ................................................................96
6.7 Louver Control for Preventing Ceiling Dirt..............................................97
Part 5 Field Settings ................................................................... 98

1. Test Operation ......................................................................................99
1.1 Checks before Test Operation ...............................................................99
1.2 Test Operation......................................................................................100
1.3 Check of Normal Operation..................................................................102
2. Field Setting from Remote Controller..................................................103
2.1 Wired Remote Controller......................................................................103
2.2 BRC1E62 .............................................................................................106
2.3 Wireless Remote Controller .................................................................108
2.4 Simplified Remote Controller................................................................109
2.5 Setting Contents and Code No. for Indoor Units ..................................110
3. Field Setting from Outside Unit PCB...................................................120
3.1 Location of DIP Switch and BS Button .................................................120
3.2 Setting by DIP Switches .......................................................................121
3.3 Setting by BS Buttons ..........................................................................123
3.4 Setting Mode 1 .....................................................................................124
3.5 Setting Mode 2 .....................................................................................125
3.6 Monitor Mode .......................................................................................128
3.7 Detailed Explanation of Setting Modes ................................................130
4. Emergency Operation .........................................................................147
4.1 Restrictions for Emergency Operation .................................................147
4.2 In the Case of Multi Outside Unit System.............................................147
Part 6 Service Diagnosis........................................................... 149

1. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................151
2. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller ...............................................154
2.2 Error Codes and Description ................................................................159
2.3 Error Code Indication by Outside Unit PCB .........................................161
2.4 Error of External Protection Device ......................................................163
2.5 PCB Abnormality ..................................................................................164
2.6 Drain Level Control System (S1L) Abnormality....................................165
2.7 Fan Motor Lock, Overload....................................................................167
2.8 Abnormal Indoor Fan Motor .................................................................168
2.9 Swing Flap Motor Abnormality .............................................................173
2.10 Abnormal Power Supply Voltage..........................................................175
iii Table of Contents

SiAU301015EC
2.11 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality/Dust Clogging ...............176

2.12 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality.......................................178
2.13 Drain Level above Limit........................................................................180
2.14 Capacity Determination Device Abnormality ........................................181
2.15 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB) ............182
2.16 Thermistor Abnormality ........................................................................184
2.17 Combination Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB)..............185
2.19 Humidity Sensor System Abnormality ..................................................187
2.20 Abnormal Room Temperature Thermistor in Remote Controller..........188
2.21 PCB Abnormality ..................................................................................189
2.22 Earth Leakage by Leak Detection Circuit .............................................190
2.23 High Pressure Abnormality...................................................................192
2.24 Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor .......................................................194
2.25 Inverter Compressor Motor Lock..........................................................196
2.27 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality ...........................................200
2.28 Refrigerant Overcharged......................................................................202
2.29 BS Unit Electronic Expansion Valve Abnormality
(BSQ100/160/250AV1, BS4/6/8/10/12/16Q14AV1 only)......................204
2.30 Water System Abnormality...................................................................205
2.31 Thermistor System Abnormality ...........................................................207
2.32 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality ......................................................208
2.33 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality .......................................................210
2.34 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality .........................212
2.35 Momentary Overcurrent of Inverter Compressor..................................213
2.36 Overcurrent Abnormality of Inverter Compressor.................................215
2.37 Inverter Compressor Startup Abnormality ............................................217
2.38 Transmission Error (between Inverter PCB and
Outside Unit Main PCB) .......................................................................219
2.39 Inverter Over-Ripple Protection............................................................221
2.40 Inverter Radiation Fin Thermistor Abnormality.....................................223
2.41 Defective Field Setting after Replacing Outside Unit Main PCB or
Defective Combination of PCB.............................................................224
2.42 Refrigerant Shortage ............................................................................225
2.43 Reverse Phase, Open Phase...............................................................227
2.44 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Failure .............................228
2.45 Check Operation Not Executed............................................................230
2.46 Transmission Error (between Indoor and Outside Units) .....................231
2.47 Transmission Error (between Remote Controller and Indoor Unit) ......233
2.48 Transmission Error (between Outside Units) .......................................234
2.49 Transmission Error (between Main and Sub Remote Controllers).......240
2.50 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit and Outside Unit
in the Same System) ............................................................................241
2.51 Improper Combination of Indoor, BS and Outside Units ......................242
2.52 Address Duplication of Centralized Control Equipment .......................247
2.53 Transmission Error (between Centralized Control Equipment and
Indoor Unit)...........................................................................................248
2.54 System Not Set ....................................................................................251
2.55 System Error, Refrigerant System Address Undefined ........................252
2.56 Check ...................................................................................................254
Table of Contents iv
SiAU301015EC
Part 7 Procedure for Mounting/Dismounting Switch Box ........ 265

1. Procedure for Mounting/Dismounting Switch Box...............................266
1.1 Procedure for Dismounting...................................................................266
1.2 Procedure for Mounting........................................................................266
Part 8 Appendix......................................................................... 268

1. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................269
1.1 Outside Unit..........................................................................................269
1.2 Outside Unit Field Wiring......................................................................271
1.3 Indoor Unit............................................................................................273
1.4 Air Treatment Equipment .....................................................................302
v Table of Contents
SiAU301015EC Safety Cautions
1. Safety Cautions
Be sure to read the following safety cautions before conducting repair work.
After the repair work is complete, be sure to conduct a test operation to ensure that the
equipment operates normally, and explain the cautions for operating the product to the
customer.
Caution Items The caution items are classified into Warning and Caution. The Warning items are
especially important since death or serious injury can result if they are not followed closely. The
Caution items can also lead to serious accidents under some conditions if they are not
followed. Therefore, be sure to observe all the safety caution items described below.
Pictograms This symbol indicates an item for which caution must be exercised.
The pictogram shows the item to which attention must be paid.
This symbol indicates a prohibited action.
The prohibited item or action is shown in the illustration or near the symbol.
This symbol indicates an action that must be taken, or an instruction.
The instruction is shown in the illustration or near the symbol.
1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers

Warning
Do not store equipment in a room with fire sources (e.g., naked flames,
gas appliances, electric heaters).
Be sure to disconnect the power cable from the socket before

disassembling equipment for repair.
Working on equipment that is connected to the power supply may cause an
electrical shock.
If it is necessary to supply power to the equipment to conduct the repair or
inspect the circuits, do not touch any electrically charged sections of the
equipment.
If refrigerant gas is discharged during repair work, do not touch the
discharged refrigerant gas.
Refrigerant gas may cause frostbite.
When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the compressor at

the welded section, evacuate the refrigerant gas completely at a well-
ventilated place first.
If there is gas remaining inside the compressor, the refrigerant gas or
refrigerating machine oil discharges when the pipe is disconnected, and it may
cause injury.
If refrigerant gas leaks during repair work, ventilate the area.

Refrigerant gas may generate toxic gases when it contacts flames.
Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting repair

work.
The step-up capacitor supplies high-voltage electricity to the electrical
components of the outdoor unit.
A charged capacitor may cause an electrical shock.
vi
Safety Cautions SiAU301015EC
Warning
Do not turn the air conditioner on or off by plugging in or unplugging the
power cable.
Plugging in or unplugging the power cable to operate the equipment may cause
an electrical shock or fire.
Be sure to wear a safety helmet, gloves, and a safety belt when working
in a high place (more than 2 m).
Insufficient safety measures may cause a fall.
In case of R-32 / R-410A refrigerant models, be sure to use pipes, flare

nuts and tools intended for the exclusive use with the R-32 / R-410A
refrigerant.
The use of materials for R-22 refrigerant models may cause a serious accident,
such as a damage of refrigerant cycle or equipment failure.
Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-32 / R-410A /
R-22) in the refrigerant system.
If air enters the refrigerant system, an excessively high pressure results,
causing equipment damage and injury.
Caution
Do not repair electrical components with wet hands.
Working on the equipment with wet hands may cause an electrical shock.
Do not clean the air conditioner with water.

Washing the unit with water may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to provide an earth / grounding when repairing the equipment in

a humid or wet place, to avoid electrical shocks.
Be sure to turn off the power switch and unplug the power cable when
cleaning the equipment.
The internal fan rotates at a high speed, and may cause injury.
Be sure to conduct repair work with appropriate tools.

The use of inappropriate tools may cause injury.
Be sure to check that the refrigerating cycle section has cooled down
enough before conducting repair work.
Working on the unit when the refrigerating cycle section is hot may cause
burns.
vii
Caution
Conduct welding work in a well-ventilated place.
Using a welder in an enclosed room may cause oxygen deficiency.
1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users

Warning
Do not store the equipment in a room with fire sources (e.g., naked
flames, gas appliances, electric heaters).
Be sure to use parts listed in the service parts list of the applicable model
and appropriate tools to conduct repair work. Never attempt to modify the
equipment.
The use of inappropriate parts or tools may cause an electrical shock,
excessive heat generation or fire.
If the power cable and lead wires are scratched or have deteriorated, be
sure to replace them.
Damaged cable and wires may cause an electrical shock, excessive heat
generation or fire.
Do not use a joined power cable or extension cable, or share the same
power outlet with other electrical appliances, since it may cause an
electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.
Be sure to use an exclusive power circuit for the equipment, and follow
the local technical standards related to the electrical equipment, the
internal wiring regulations, and the instruction manual for installation
when conducting electrical work.
Insufficient power circuit capacity and improper electrical work may cause an
electrical shock or fire.
Be sure to use the specified cable for wiring between the indoor and
outdoor units.
Make the connections securely and route the cable properly so that there is no
force pulling the cable at the connection terminals.
Improper connections may cause excessive heat generation or fire.
When wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, make sure that the
terminal cover does not lift off or dismount because of the cable.
If the cover is not mounted properly, the terminal connection section may cause
an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.
Do not damage or modify the power cable.

Damaged or modified power cables may cause an electrical shock or fire.
Placing heavy items on the power cable, or heating or pulling the power cable
may damage it.
viii
Safety Cautions SiAU301015EC
Warning
Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-32 / R-410A /
R-22) in the refrigerant system.
If air enters the refrigerant system, an excessively high pressure results,
causing equipment damage and injury.
If the refrigerant gas leaks, be sure to locate the leaking point and repair
it before charging the refrigerant. After charging the refrigerant, make
sure that there is no leak.
If the leaking point cannot be located and the repair work must be stopped, be
sure to pump-down, and close the service valve, to prevent refrigerant gas from
leaking into the room. Refrigerant gas itself is harmless, but it may generate
toxic gases when it contacts flames, such as those from fan type and other
heaters, stoves and ranges.
When relocating the equipment, make sure that the new installation site
has sufficient strength to withstand the weight of the equipment.
If the installation site does not have sufficient strength or the installation work
is not conducted securely, the equipment may fall and cause injury.
Check to make sure that the power cable plug is not dirty or loose, then
insert the plug into a power outlet securely.
If the plug is dusty or has a loose connection, it may cause an electrical shock
or fire.
When replacing the coin battery in the remote controller, be sure to

dispose of the old battery to prevent children from swallowing it.
If a child swallows the coin battery, see a doctor immediately.
Caution
Installation of a leakage breaker is necessary in some cases depending
on the conditions of the installation site, to prevent electrical shocks.
Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of

combustible gas leaks.
If combustible gas leaks and remains around the unit, it may cause a fire.
Check to see if parts and wires are mounted and connected properly, and
if connections at the soldered or crimped terminals are secure.
Improper installation and connections may cause excessive heat generation,
fire or an electrical shock.
If the installation platform or frame has corroded, replace it.

A corroded installation platform or frame may cause the unit to fall, resulting in
injury.
ix
Caution
Check the earth / grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not properly
earthed / grounded.
Improper earth / grounding may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to measure insulation resistance after the repair, and make sure
that the resistance is 1 MΩ or higher.
Faulty insulation may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to check the drainage of the indoor unit after the repair.
Faulty drainage may cause water to enter the room and wet the furniture and
floor.
Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

The water inside the unit may spill and wet the furniture and floor.
x
Icons Used SiAU301015EC
2. Icons Used
The following icons are used to attract the attention of the reader to specific information.
Icon Type of Description

Information
Warning A Warning is used when there is danger of personal injury.
Warning
Caution A Caution is used when there is danger that the reader, through
incorrect manipulation, may damage equipment, lose data, get
Caution an unexpected result or have to restart (part of) a procedure.
Note A Note provides information that is not indispensable, but may

nevertheless be valuable to the reader, such as tips and tricks.
Note:
Reference A Reference guides the reader to other places in this binder or

in this manual, where he/she will find additional information on a
specific topic.
xi
SiAU301015EC
Part 1
General Information
1. Model Names of Indoor/Outside Units ....................................................2
1.1 Indoor Units ..............................................................................................2
1.2 Outside Units............................................................................................4
2. External Appearance...............................................................................5
2.1 Indoor Units ..............................................................................................5
2.2 Outside Units............................................................................................7
3. Combination of Outside Units .................................................................8
4. Capacity Range.......................................................................................9
General Information 1
Model Names of Indoor/Outside Units SiAU301015EC
1. Model Names of Indoor/Outside Units

1.1 Indoor Units
VRV Indoor Units
Capacity range kW 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.6 7.1 8.0 9.0 Power
11.2 14.0 16.0 16.2 20.0 22.4 28.0
supply,
Capacity index 20 25 31.25 40 50 62.5 71 80 100 125 140 145 180 200 250 standard
Ceiling mounted
cassette (round flow FXFQ — 25S 32S 40S 50S 63S — 80S 100S 125S — — — — — VM
with sensing) type
Ceiling mounted VE
cassette (round FXFQ — 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P — 80P 100P 125P — — — — — VE9
flow) type VE8
Ceiling mounted VE
cassette (compact FXZQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M — — — — — — — — — —
multi flow) type VE9
4-way flow ceiling

suspended type FXUQ — — — — — — 71A — 100A — — — — — — VEB
Ceiling mounted VE
cassette (double FXCQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M — 80M — 125M — — — — —
flow) type VE9
Ceiling mounted
cassette corner type FXKQ — 25MA 32MA 40MA — 63MA — — — — — — — — — VE
Slim ceiling
mounted duct type FXDQ 20PB 25PB 32PB 40NB 50NB 63NB — — — — — — — — — VE
(standard series)
Slim ceiling
mounted duct type FXDQ 20SP 25SP 32SP 40SP 50SP 63SP — — — — — — — — — V1
(compact series)
Ceiling concealed
(duct) type FXDYQ — — — — — — — 80MA 100MA 125MA — 145MA 180M 200M 250M V1
(Australia only)
Middle static
pressure ceiling FXSQ 20P 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P — 80P 100P 125P 140P — — — — VE
mounted duct type
Ceiling mounted FXSYQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M — 80M 100M 125M — — — — — VE
built-in type
20P 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P — 80P 100P 125P 140P — — — — VE
Ceiling mounted FXMQ — — — — — — — — — — — — — 200MA 250MA VE
duct type
— — — — — — — — — — — — — 200M 250M VE9
Ceiling suspended FXHQ — — 32MA — — 63MA — — 100MA — — — — — — VE
type
20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — — — — — — — — VE
Wall mounted type FXAQ
20P 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P — — — — — — — — — VE
Floor standing type FXLQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — — — — — — — — VE
Concealed floor FXNQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — — — — — — — — VE
standing type
Power supply symbols

V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
VM: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
2 General Information
SiAU301015EC Model Names of Indoor/Outside Units
Connection Unit Series Indoor Units

Capacity Range kW 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.6 8.0 11.2 14.0 Power
Capacity Index 20 25 31.25 40 50 71 100 125 Supply
Ceiling Suspended
Cassette Type FXUQ — — — — — 71MA 100MA 125MA V1
Connection Unit for
FXUQ BEVQ — — — — — 71MA 100MA 125MA VE
Note: BEVQ unit is required for FXUQ only.
MA: RoHS Directive models; specifications, dimensions and other functions are the same as for M type.
BS Units
Series Model Name Power Supply
BSVQ 100P 160P 250P V1

Heat Recovery V13
BSQ 100A 160A 250A V1
Note: Do not mix BSVQ models and BSQ models in the same system.
Centralized/Multi BS Units
BSV 4Q100P 6Q100P — — — —
Heat Recovery V1
BS 4Q14A 6Q14A 8Q14A 10Q14A 12Q14A 16Q14A
Note: Do not mix BSV models and BS models in the same system.

V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
Model Names of Indoor/Outside Units SiAU301015EC
1.2 Outside Units

Outside Units
Heat Pump 8P 10P 16P 18P 20P Y1

Heat Recovery RWEYQ Y19
24P 26P 28P 30P — Y13
Combination of Outside Units

Class 8 class 10 class 16 class 18 class
Model Name RWEYQ8P RWEYQ10P RWEYQ16P RWEYQ18P
Outside Unit 1 – – RWEYQ8P RWEYQ8P
Outside Unit 2 – – RWEYQ8P RWEYQ10P
Class 20 class 24 class 26 class 28 class 30 class

Model Name RWEYQ20P RWEYQ24P RWEYQ26P RWEYQ28P RWEYQ30P
Outside Unit 1 RWEYQ10P RWEYQ8P RWEYQ8P RWEYQ8P RWEYQ10P
Outside Unit 2 RWEYQ10P RWEYQ8P RWEYQ8P RWEYQ10P RWEYQ10P
Outside Unit 3 – RWEYQ8P RWEYQ10P RWEYQ10P RWEYQ10P

Y1: 3 phase, 380-415 V, 50 Hz
1.3 Air Treatment Equipment

Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VKM Series)
Heat Reclaim
Ventilator with DX 50GA 80GA 100GA
Coil V1
VKM V19
Heat Reclaim
Ventilator with DX 50GAM 80GAM 100GAM
Coil and Humidifier
Note: For details, refer to Engineering Data ED71-440A.
Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VAM Series)

Heat Reclaim VAM 150GJ 250GJ 350GJ 500GJ 650GJ 800GJ 1000GJ 1500GJ 2000GJ VE
Ventilator

V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
SiAU301015EC External Appearance
2. External Appearance
2.1 Indoor Units
VRV Indoor Units
Ceiling mounted cassette (Round flow with sensing) type Middle static pressure ceiling mounted duct type
FXFQ-S FXSQ-P
Ceiling mounted cassette (Round flow) type Ceiling mounted built-in type (Aus. exclusive use)
FXFQ-P FXSYQ-M
Ceiling mounted cassette (Compact multi flow) type Ceiling mounted duct type
(Middle and high static pressure)
FXZQ-M
FXMQ-P
4-way flow ceiling suspended type Ceiling mounted duct type

FXUQ-A FXMQ-M(A)
Ceiling mounted cassette (Double flow) type Ceiling suspended type
FXCQ-M FXHQ-MA
Ceiling mounted cassette corner type Wall mounted type
FXKQ-MA FXAQ-MA
Slim ceiling mounted duct type Wall mounted type

FXDQ-PB FXAQ-P
FXDQ-NB
Slim ceiling mounted duct type (Compact series) Floor standing type
FXDQ-SP FXLQ-MA
Ceiling concealed (Duct) type (Aus. exclusive use) Concealed floor standing type
FXDYQ-M(A) FXNQ-MA
External Appearance SiAU301015EC
Connection Unit Series Indoor Units

Ceiling suspended cassette type
FXUQ-MA + BEVQ-MA
Connection unit
BS Units
Single BS units Multi BS unit
BSVQ-P BS8Q14AV1
BSQ-A
Centralized BS units Multi BS unit
BSV4Q100PV1 BS10Q14AV1
BSV6Q100PV1
Multi BS unit Multi BS unit
BS4Q14AV1 BS12Q14AV1
Multi BS unit Multi BS unit
BS6Q14AV1 BS16Q14AV1
SiAU301015EC External Appearance
2.2 Outside Units

RWEYQ8/10P
8, 10 class
RWEYQ16/18/20P
16, 18, 20 class

RWEYQ24/26/28/30P
24, 26, 28, 30 class
2.3 Air Treatment Equipment

Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VKM series) Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VAM series)
VKM-GA VAM-GJ
VKM-GAM
With DX coil (GA)

With DX coil and humidifier (GAM)
Combination of Outside Units SiAU301015EC
3. Combination of Outside Units

System Number of Module
Outside Unit Multi Connection Piping Kit (Option)
Capacity Units 8 10
8 class 1
–
10 class 1
16 class 2
Heat Pump: BHFP22MA56
18 class 2 Heat Recovery: BHFP26MA56
20 class 2
24 class 3
26 class 3 Heat Pump: BHFP22MA84
28 class 3 Heat Recovery: BHFP26MA84
30 class 3
SiAU301015EC Capacity Range
4. Capacity Range
Outside Units
Single outside
Combination unit Double outside units Triple outside units
Capacity range 8 class 10 class 16 class 18 class 20 class 24 class 26 class 28 class 30 class
RWEYQ 8P 10P 16P 18P 20P 24P 26P 28P 30P
Capacity index 200 250 400 450 500 600 650 700 750
Total capacity index of indoor units to be 100 125 200 225 250 300 325 350 375
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
connected 260 325 520 585 650 780 845 910 975
Connectable capacity 50-130% of the rated capacity of the outside unit
Max. number of connectable indoor units 13 16 26 29 32 36 36 36 36
Single BS unit
Model BSQ100AV1 BSQ160AV1 BSQ250AV1
Maximum number of connectable indoor
units 5 8 8
Total capacity index of connectable 20 to 100 More than 100 but 160 or More than 160 but 250 or
indoor units less less
Multi BS unit
Model BS4Q14AV1 BS6Q14AV1 BS8Q14AV1 BS10Q14AV1 BS12Q14AV1 BS16Q14AV1
Maximum number of connectable indoor 20 30 40 50 60 64
units
Maximum number of connectable indoor
units per branch 5 5 5 5 5 5
Number of branches 4 6 8 10 12 16
Maximum capacity index of connectable 400 or less 600 or less 750 or less 750 or less 750 or less 750 or less
indoor units
Maximum capacity index of connectable
indoor units per branch (*1) 140 or less 140 or less 140 or less 140 or less 140 or less 140 or less
Note: *1 When the total capacity of indoor units to be connected downstream is larger than 140 (Max. 250), use a
junction pipe kit (KHRP26A250T, optional parts) to join two connections downstream from the BS unit.
Heat Recovery
High and low pressure
gas piping
Suction gas piping
Liquid piping
Outside unit BS unit BS unit
Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit*

(Heating) (Cooling) (Cooling only)
Heat Recovery operation!
For indoor units used for cooling only (do not connect to BS unit when using for heat recovery), total
capacity index must be 50% or less than the capacity index of the outdoor units.
SiAU301015EC
Part 2
Refrigerant Circuit
1. Refrigerant Circuit .................................................................................11
1.1 Outside Unit............................................................................................11
1.2 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................13
1.3 BS Unit ...................................................................................................14
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................21
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................23
3.1 In Case of Heat Pump Connection.........................................................23
(Single Outside Unit Installation) ............................................................26
10 Refrigerant Circuit
SiAU301015EC Refrigerant Circuit
1. Refrigerant Circuit
1.1 Outside Unit
RWEYQ8/10P
No. in
piping Electric Name Major Function
Symbol
diagram
Inverter compressor is operated on frequencies between 52 Hz and 230
(1) M1C Inverter compressor Hz by using the inverter.
In cooling: High pressure control
In heating or simultaneous cooling/heating operation:
(2) Y1E Electronic expansion valve (Main) • When the heat exchanger is used as the evaporator : SH control
• When the heat exchanger is used as the condenser : High pressure
control
(3) Y3E Electronic expansion valve (Subcooling) PI control is applied to keep the outlet superheated degree of
subcooling heat exchanger constant.
(4) Y1S Solenoid valve (Hot gas bypass) Used to prevent the low pressure from transient falling.
Solenoid valve (Oil return of water heat Used to collect the refrigerant oil from water heat exchanger.
(5) Y2S exchanger)
Used to maintain high pressure while in cooling at low water
(6) Y3S Solenoid valve (Receiver gas charging) temperature. And also used to prevent the accumulation of refrigerant in
non-operating outside units in the case of multiple outside unit system.
(7) Y4S Solenoid valve (Receiver gas purge) Used to collect refrigerant to receiver.
(8) Y5S Four way valve (Main) Changes the operation into cooling, heating or simultaneous cooling/
heating operation.
(9) Y6S Solenoid valve (Non-operating unit liquid Used to prevent the accumulation of refrigerant in non-operating outside
pipe closing) units in the case of multiple outside unit system.
(10) Y7S Four way valve (Heat exchanger) Changes the water heat exchanger into condenser or evaporator.
(11) S1NPH High pressure sensor Used to detect high pressure.
(12) S1NPL Low pressure sensor Used to detect low pressure.
In order to prevent the increase of high pressure when an error occurs,
(13) S1PH High pressure switch this switch is activated at high pressure of 4.0 MPa or more to stop the
compressor operation.
In order to prevent the increase of pressure when abnormal heating is
(14) – Fusible plug caused by fire or others, the fusible part of the plug is molten at a
temperature of 70 - 75°C to release the pressure into the atmosphere.
This valve opens at a pressure of 4.0 MPa or more for prevention of
(15) – Pressure regulating valve (Liquid pipe to pressure increase, thus resulting in no damage of functional parts due to
discharge pipe)
the increase of pressure in transportation or storage.
• Used for outside fan speed control.
(16) R1T Radiation fin thermistor • Used for inverter radiation fin temperature control.
• Used for pressure difference control.
(17) R2T Suction pipe thermistor Used to detect suction pipe temperature, keep the suction superheated
degree constant in heating, and others.
Used to detect discharge pipe temperature, make the temperature
(18) R3T Discharge pipe thermistor protection control of compressor, and others.
(19) R4T Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor Used to detect gas pipe temperature of water heat exchanger.
Subcooling heat exchanger outlet pipe Used to detect gas pipe temperature on the evaporating side of sub-
(20) R5T thermistor cooling heat exchanger, keep the superheated degree at the outlet of
subcooling heat exchanger constant, and others.
Used to detect receiver outlet liquid pipe temperature, prevent the drift
(21) R6T Receiver outlet liquid pipe thermistor between outside units while in heating in the case of multiple outside
unit system, and others.
Refrigerant Circuit 11
Refrigerant Circuit SiAU301015EC
Solenoid valve
(7)
SV Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Heat exchanger pipe expansion valve
Filter (14) Filter Filter
(2) Water
Heat exchanger (21) inlet
SV
Subcooling
(5)
Plate heat
(3) Solenoid valve exchanger
(9)
SV Check valve Electronic

expansion valve
Solenoid valve Capillary
tube
Check valve
(20)
(15) Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
regulating
valve Capillary Capillary
tube tube
Filter Four way valve
(8)
(19)
Solenoid valve Four way valve (16)

(10)
SV
Check (6)
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
1/4" flare connection
Oil
(11)
High pressure
Filter S1NPH
sensor
(13)
(18) High pressure
S1PH
switch
(4)
Capillary (1)
SV
tube (12)
S1NPL
Solenoid
valve Gauge port Compressor
Low pressure 1/4" flare connection
sensor INV.
Filter
(17)
Stop valve (With service port on on-site piping side φ7.9mm flare connection)
∗ This thermistor is near the el. compo. box.

C: 4D048290C
1.2 Indoor Unit

No. in piping Electric
diagram Name Symbol Applicable model Major Function
Electronic Used for gas superheated degree control while in

(1) expansion valve Y1E All indoor units cooling or subcooling degree control while in
heating.
Suction air
(2) thermistor R1T All indoor units Used for thermostat control.
Liquid pipe Used for gas superheated degree control while in

(3) thermistor R2T All indoor units cooling or subcooling degree control while in
heating.
Gas pipe Used for gas superheated degree control while in
(4) thermistor R3T All indoor units cooling.
(5) Discharge air R4T FXMQ20/25/32PVE Used for discharge air temperature control.
thermistor
FXFQ, FXZQ, FXUQ-A, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDYQ, FXSQ, FXSYQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ
(5) R4T Gas piping connection port

Flare connection : φ15.9 or less
(4) Attached piping : φ19.1 or more
R3T
Heat exchanger
Fan
R1T
(2)
(3)
R2T
Liquid piping connection port

(Flare connection)
(1)
Filter Electronic Filter
expansion valve
C: 4D024460E
FXDQ FXUQ-MA
Gas side
Liquid side
Electronic expansion valve Indoor heat exchanger
(3)
R2T Filter (1) Filter (2)
R1T
(2)
R1T
Fan
(4)
R3T Field piping φ9.5 C1220T-O
To
Filter Field piping φ15.9 C1220T-O Outside unit
(3)
R2T
Indoor heat exchanger
Indoor unit
C: 4D060927A
C: 4D037995J
1.3 BS Unit
BSVQ100/160/250PV1(3)
No. in piping Electric
diagram Symbol Name Major Function
(1) Y4E Electronic expansion valve Opens while in heating or all indoor units are in cooling. (Max : 760 pulse)
(2) Y5E Electronic expansion valve Opens while in cooling. (Max : 760 pulse)
(3) Y2E Electronic expansion valve Opens while in heating or all indoor units are in cooling. (Max : 480 pulse)
(4) Y3E Electronic expansion valve Opens while in cooling. (Max : 480 pulse)
In simultaneous cooling and heating, it is used to subcooling liquid
(5) Y1E Electronic expansion valve refrigerants when an indoor unit downstream of this BS unit is in
heating. (Max : 480 pulse)
Used to bypass high pressure gas to low pressure side to protect
(6) — Capillary tube “Refrigerant accumulation” in dual pressure gas pipes.
Note: Factory setting of all electronic expansion valve opening : 60 pulse
Liquid pipe Liquid pipe

connection port connection port
(5) Electronic
Double pipe heat Expansion Valve
exchanger (EVSC) Filter
(6) Capillary tube
Gas pipe (3) Electronic

connection port Expansion Valve
Filter (EVHS)
Dual pressure
(1) Electronic gas pipe
Expansion Valve connection port
(EVH)
Filter
(4) Electronic Suction gas pipe

(EVLS) Filter
(2) Electronic
Expansion Valve
(EVL)
C: 4D057985B
BSQ100/160/250AV1
No. in piping Electric Name Major Function
diagram Symbol
Electronic expansion valve In simultaneous cooling and heating operation, it is used to subcooling
(1) Y1E (EVSC) liquid refrigerants when an indoor unit downstream of this BS unit is in
heating operation. (Max : 480 pulse)
(2) Y2E Electronic expansion valve Opens while in heating operation or all indoor units are in cooling
(EVH) operation. (Max : 6,000 pulse)
Electronic expansion valve
(3) Y3E (EVL) Opens while in cooling operation. (Max : 6,000 pulse)
Note: Factory setting of all EV opening: 60 pulse
Liquid pipe Liquid pipe

connection port connection port
Electronic
Double pipe heat Expansion Valve (1)
exchanger (EVSC)
Filter
Gas pipe Electronic HP/LP gas pipe

connection port Expansion Valve connection port
(EVH)
Filter (2) Filter
Electronic Suction gas pipe

(EVL)
(3) Filter
C: 4D085545A
BS4Q14AV1
connection port
Suction gas pipe
C: 3D086032A
connection port
HP/LP gas pipe
connection port
Liquid pipe
Filter
Filter
(2)
(1)
Electronic Expansion Valve (HP/LP gas) Electronic
Filter Expansion Valve
Gas pipe Double pipe heat
Electronic Expansion Valve (Suction) (Subcooling) Filter
connection port exchanger
D unit
(3)
Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) (1)
C unit
(3)
Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) (1)
B unit
(3)
Liquid pipe
connection port
(1)
(2) Expansion Valve
Gas pipe Filter Double pipe heat
A unit
(3)
Liquid pipe
connection port
BS6Q14AV1
C: 3D086033A
connection port
Suction gas pipe
connection port
HP/LP gas pipe
connection port
Liquid pipe
Filter
Filter

(2) Expansion Valve
Filter
Gas pipe Electronic Expansion Valve (Suction) Double pipe heat (Subcooling)
exchanger Filter
F unit
connection port (3) (1)

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
Filter
exchanger Filter
E unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
Filter
exchanger Filter
D unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
Filter
exchanger Filter
C unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
Filter
exchanger Filter
B unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
Filter
exchanger Filter
A unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
BS8Q14AV1
C: 3D086034A
connection port
Suction gas pipe
connection port
HP/LP gas pipe
connection port
Liquid pipe
Filter
Filter
(2) Expansion Valve
Filter Double pipe heat
Gas pipe Electronic Expansion Valve (Suction) (Subcooling)
exchanger Filter
H unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
exchanger Filter
G unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
exchanger Filter
F unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
exchanger Filter
E unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
exchanger Filter
D unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
exchanger Filter
C unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
exchanger Filter
B unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
exchanger Filter
A unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
BS10Q14AV1
C: 3D086035A
connection port
Suction gas pipe
connection port
HP/LP gas pipe
connection port
Liquid pipe
Filter
Filter
(2) Expansion Valve
Filter Double pipe heat (Subcooling)
Gas pipe Electronic Expansion Valve (Suction)
connection port exchanger Filter
J unit
(3) (1)
Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
I unit
(3) (1)
Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
exchanger Filter
H unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
G unit
(3) (1)
Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
F unit
(3) (1)
Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
exchanger Filter
E unit
connection port (1)

(3)
Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
D unit
(3) (1)
Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
exchanger Filter
C unit
connection port (1)

(3)
Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
exchanger Filter
B unit
connection port (1)

(3)
Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
A unit
(3) (1)
Liquid pipe
connection port
BS12Q14AV1
C: 3D086036A
connection port
HP/LP gas pipe
connection port
Suction gas pipe
connection port
Liquid pipe
Filter
Filter
(2) Expansion Valve
Gas pipe Electronic Expansion Valve (Suction) exchanger (1) Filter
L unit
connection port (3)

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
Gas pipe Filter Double pipe heat (Subcooling)
Electronic Expansion Valve (Suction) exchanger (1) Filter
K unit
connection port (3)

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
J unit
connection port (3)

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
I unit
connection port (3)

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
H unit
connection port (3)

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
Electronic Expansion Valve (Suction)
G unit
connection port (3)

exchanger (1) Filter
Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
F unit
connection port (3)

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
E unit
connection port (3)

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
(1) Filter
D unit
exchanger
connection port (3)
Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
C unit
connection port (3)

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
B unit
connection port (3)

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2) Expansion Valve
A unit
connection port (3)

Liquid pipe
connection port
BS16Q14AV1
connection port
HP/LP gas pipe
connection port
Suction gas pipe
connection port
Liquid pipe
C: 3D086037
Filter
Filter
Gas pipe Filter
(2)
Electronic Expansion Valve (Suction) exchanger (Subcooling) Filter
P unit
Liquid pipe
connection port
Gas pipe Filter (2)
exchanger (Subcooling) Filter
O unit
connection port Electronic Expansion Valve (Suction)

(3) (1)
Liquid pipe
connection port
Gas pipe Filter (2)
N unit

(3) (1)
Liquid pipe
connection port
Gas pipe Filter
(2)
(Subcooling) Filter
M unit
connection port Electronic Expansion Valve (Suction) exchanger (1)

(3)
Liquid pipe
connection port
Gas pipe Filter (2)
L unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
Gas pipe Filter (2)
K unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
Gas pipe Filter (2)
J unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
Gas pipe Filter
(2)
connection port
I unit
(3) (1)
Liquid pipe
connection port
(2)
Gas pipe Filter
H unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2)
Gas pipe Filter
G unit

(3) (1)
Liquid pipe
connection port
Gas pipe Filter (2)
F unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2)
Gas pipe Filter
E unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2)
Gas pipe Filter
D unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2)
Gas pipe Filter
C unit

(3) (1)
Liquid pipe
connection port
Gas pipe Filter (2)
B unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
(2)
Gas pipe Filter
A unit

Liquid pipe
connection port
SiAU301015EC Functional Parts Layout
2. Functional Parts Layout

RWEYQ8/10P
Electronic expansion
valve (Y3E)
Solenoid valve (Y3S)

Four way valve (Y5S)
Solenoid
valve (Y6S)
Stop valve
(Liquid side) Four way valve (Y7S)
Stop valve
(Discharge gas side)
Stop valve
(Suction gas side)
High pressure sensor (S1NPH)
Gauge port
High pressure switch (S1PH)

Electronic expansion valve (Y1E)
(Plate heat exchanger assy)
Oil separator
Receiver Compressor
Low pressure sensor

(S1NPL)
Functional Parts Layout SiAU301015EC
Top View
Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor

(R4T)
Discharge pipe thermistor

(R3T)
Front View
Subcooling heat exchanger

outlet pipe thermistor (R5T)
Receiver outlet liquid pipe thermistor

(R6T)
Suction pipe thermistor (R2T)
SiAU301015EC Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode

3.1 In Case of Heat Pump Connection
3.1.1 Cooling Operation
Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit OFF (Cooling) Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. OFF
High temp. High pressure gas Heat exchanger Heat exchanger Heat exchanger
High temp. High pressure liquid
Low temp. Low pressure gas
Low temp. Low pressure liquid
Fan ON Fan OFF Fan ON
EXP EXP EXP

Filter Filter Filter Filter Filter Filter
(Superheated control) (0 pulse) (0 pulse)
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Filter Filter Filter
Water
inlet
Heat exchanger
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat
Solenoid valve exchanger

expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
regulating Capillary
valve Capillary tube
Four way valve tube
Filter
Solenoid valve Four way valve

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil
Filter S1NPH High pressure

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
valve Low pressure Gauge port
sensor 1/4” flare connection INV.
Filter
To other outside unit
C: 4D048290D
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode SiAU301015EC
3.1.2 Heating Operation

Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit OFF (Heating) Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. OFF
Fan ON Fan OFF Fan OFF
EXP EXP EXP

(Subcooling control) (200~300 pulse) (200~300 pulse)
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Water
inlet
Heat exchanger
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat

expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
C: 4D048290D
3.1.3 Oil Return Operation

Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit OFF (Cooling) Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. OFF
Fan ON Fan OFF Fan ON
EXP EXP EXP

(Superheated control) (224 pulse) (224 pulse)
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Water
inlet
Heat exchanger
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat

expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
C: 4D048290D

(Single Outside Unit Installation)
3.2.1 Cooling Operation (with BSVQ models)
Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. OFF Indoor Unit OFF (Cooling)
Fan ON Fan ON Fan OFF
EXP EXP EXP

(Normal operation) (0 pulse) (0 pulse)
BS Unit
Double pipe heat

Double pipe heat
Double pipe heat

exchanger
exchanger
exchanger
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
EVL EVLS EVH EVHS EVSC EVL EVLS EVH EVHS EVSC EVL EVLS EVH EVHS EVSC
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV
Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver

Water
Heat exchanger
inlet
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat

expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
C: 4D048290D
3.2.2 Cooling Operation (with BSQ models)

Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. OFF Indoor Unit OFF (Cooling)
EXP EXP EXP

BS Unit
Double pipe heat
Double pipe heat

Filter Filter
Double pipe heat

Filter
exchanger
exchanger
exchanger
EVL EVH EVSC EVL EVH EVSC EVL EVH EVSC
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV
Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Water
Heat exchanger
inlet
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat

expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
C: 4D048290D
3.2.3 Heating Operation (with BSVQ models)

Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. OFF Indoor Unit OFF (Heating)
EXP EXP EXP

BS Unit
Double pipe heat

Double pipe heat
Double pipe heat

exchanger
exchanger
exchanger
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV
Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Water
Heat exchanger
inlet
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat
Check valve
SV Electronic
expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
C: 4D048290D
3.2.4 Heating Operation (with BSQ models)

Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. OFF Indoor Unit OFF (Heating)
EXP EXP EXP

BS Unit
Double pipe heat

Filter
Double pipe heat
Double pipe heat

Filter Filter
exchanger
exchanger
exchanger
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV
Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Water
Heat exchanger
inlet
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat
Check valve
SV Electronic
expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
C: 4D048290D
3.2.5 Heating and simultaneous cooling/heating operation (When the

outside water cooled heat exchanger is used as condenser) (with
BSVQ models)
Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON
Fan ON Fan ON Fan ON
EXP EXP EXP

(Normal operation) (Normal operation) (Normal operation)
BS Unit
Double pipe heat

Double pipe heat
Double pipe heat

exchanger
exchanger
exchanger
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Filter Filter
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV
Filter Fusible
Receiver plug Electronic
Water
Heat exchanger
inlet
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat
Check valve
SV Electronic
expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
C: 4D048290D

outside water cooled heat exchanger is used as condenser) (with
BSQ models)
Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON
Fan ON Fan ON Fan ON
EXP EXP EXP

BS Unit
Double pipe heat

Filter
Double pipe heat
Double pipe heat

Filter Filter
exchanger
exchanger
exchanger
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV
Filter Fusible
Receiver plug Electronic
Water
Heat exchanger
inlet
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat
Check valve
SV Electronic
expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
C: 4D048290D

outside water cooled heat exchanger is used as evaporator) (with
BSVQ models)
(In case there are indoor units operating with cooling thermostat “ON”.)
Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON
FAN ON FAN ON FAN ON
EXP EXP EXP

BS Unit
Double pipe heat

Double pipe heat
Double pipe heat

exchanger
exchanger
exchanger
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Filter Filter
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV
Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver

Water
Heat exchanger
inlet
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat
Check valve
SV Electronic
expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
C: 4D048290D

outside water cooled heat exchanger is used as evaporator) (with
BSQ models)
(In case there are indoor units operating with cooling thermostat “ON”.)
Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON
FAN ON FAN ON FAN ON
EXP EXP EXP

BS Unit
Double pipe heat
Double pipe heat

Filter Filter
Double pipe heat

Filter
exchanger
exchanger
exchanger
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV
Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver

Water
Heat exchanger
inlet
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat
Check valve
SV Electronic
expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
C: 4D048290D
3.2.9 Oil Return Operation at Simultaneous Cooling/Heating Operation

(with BSVQ models)
Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. OFF
FAN ON FAN OFF FAN OFF
EXP EXP EXP

(Normal operation) (Oil return opening degree) (Oil return opening degree)
BS Unit
Double pipe heat

Double pipe heat
Double pipe heat

exchanger
exchanger
exchanger
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Filter Filter
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV
Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Water
Heat exchanger
inlet
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat
SV
Check valve Electronic
expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
C: 4D048290D
3.2.10 Oil Return Operation at Simultaneous Cooling/Heating Operation

(with BSQ models)
Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. OFF
FAN ON FAN OFF FAN OFF
EXP EXP EXP

(Normal operation) (Oil return opening degree) (Oil return opening degree)
BS Unit
Double pipe heat

Filter
Double pipe heat

Filter
Double pipe heat

Filter
exchanger
exchanger
exchanger
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV
Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Water
Heat exchanger
inlet
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat
SV
Check valve Electronic
expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
C: 4D048290D
SiAU301015EC
Part 3
Remote Controller
1. Applicable Models .................................................................................37
2. Names and Functions ...........................................................................38
2.1 BRC1C62 ...............................................................................................38
2.2 BRC1D61 ...............................................................................................39
2.3 BRC1E61, BRC1E62 .............................................................................41
3. MAIN/SUB Setting.................................................................................45
3.1 BRC1C62, BRC1D61 .............................................................................45
3.2 BRC1E61 ...............................................................................................45
3.3 BRC1E62 ...............................................................................................46
4. Centralized Control Group No. Setting..................................................48
4.1 BRC1C62, BRC1D61 .............................................................................48
4.2 BRC1E61 ...............................................................................................49
4.3 BRC1E62 ...............................................................................................50
5. Service Mode ........................................................................................51
5.1 BRC1C62, BRC1D61, Wireless Remote Controller ...............................51
5.2 BRC1E61 ...............................................................................................53
5.3 BRC1E62 ...............................................................................................55
6. Inspection Mode....................................................................................58
6.1 BRC1C62, BRC1D61 .............................................................................58
36 Remote Controller
SiAU301015EC Applicable Models
1. Applicable Models
Wired remote controller Wireless remote
Series
Navigation Schedule timer Standard controller
FXFQ BRC7F634F
FXZQ BRC7E530W
FXUQ BRC7CB58
FXCQ BRC7C62
FXKQ BRC4C61
FXDQ BRC4C65
FXDYQ BRC4C62
BRC1E61
VRV indoor units FXSQ BRC1E62 BRC1D61 BRC1C62 BRC4C65
FXSYQ BRC4C62
FXMQ-P BRC4C65
FXMQ-M(A) BRC4C62
FXHQ BRC7EA63W
FXAQ BRC7EA618
FXLQ BRC4C62
FXNQ BRC4C62
Remote Controller 37
Names and Functions SiAU301015EC
2. Names and Functions

2.1 BRC1C62
5 12 4 2 1
3
7 hr
9
C L H
hr NOT 11
6 TEST AVAILABLE
10
8 13
14 21
20
TEST
19
16 15 17 18 22
ON/OFF BUTTON 12 DISPLAY (DEFROST)

1 Press the button and the system will start. NON-FUNCTIONING DISPLAY
Press the button again and the system will stop. If that particular function is not available, pressing
OPERATION LAMP (RED) the button may display the words NOT
2 AVAILABLE for a few seconds.
The lamp lights up during operation.
When running multiple units simultaneously the
DISPLAY (UNDER CENTRALIZED
CONTROL) 13 NOT AVAILABLE message will only be appear
if none of the indoor units is equipped with the
3 When this display shows, the system is UNDER function. If even 1 unit is equipped with the
CENTRALIZED CONTROL. function, the display will not appear.
DISPLAY
14 TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON
(VENTILATION/AIR CLEANING)
15 TIMER ON/OFF BUTTON
4 This display shows that the total heat exchange
and the air cleaning unit are in operation INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON
(These are optional accessories). 16 This button is used only by qualified service
DISPLAY persons for maintenance purposes.
(OPERATION MODE) PROGRAMMING TIME BUTTON
5 This display shows the current OPERATION 17 Use this button for programming START and/or
MODE. For cooling only type, (Auto) and STOP time.
(Heating) are not installed. TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON
18
DISPLAY TEST (INSPECTION/TEST Use this button for SETTING TEMPERATURE.
OPERATION) 19 FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
6 When the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON
BUTTON is pressed, the display shows the
20 Press this button to select the fan speed, HIGH
system mode is in.
or LOW, of your choice.
hr
DISPLAY (PROGRAMMED TIME) OPERATION MODE SELECTOR
hr
7 21 BUTTON
This display shows the PROGRAMMED TIME of
Press this button to select OPERATION MODE.
the system start or stop.
AIRFLOW DIRECTION ADJUSTMENT
DISPLAY C (SET TEMPERATURE) 22
8 BUTTON
This display shows the set temperature.
NOTE
DISPLAY (FAN SPEED) • For the sake of explanation, all indications are shown
9
This display shows the set fan speed. on the display in the above figure contrary to actual
running situations.
10 DISPLAY (AIRFLOW FLAP)
11 DISPLAY (TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER)
SiAU301015EC Names and Functions
2.2 BRC1D61
1 ON/OFF BUTTON 8 EXTERNAL CONTROL ICON

Press the ON/OFF button to start or stop the system. This icon indicates that another controller with higher
priority is controlling or disabling your installation.
2 OPERATION LAMP
The operation lamp lights up during operation or blinks 9 CHANGE-OVER UNDER CENTRALISED
CONTROL ICON
if an error occurs.
This icon indicates that the change-over of the
installation is under centralised control assigned to
3 OPERATION MODE ICON
another indoor unit or optional cool/heat selector
These icons indicate the current operation mode (FAN, connected to the outside unit (master remote
DRY, AUTOMATIC, COOLING, HEATING). controller).
4 VENTILATION MODE ICON
10 DAY OF THE WEEK INDICATOR
These icons indicate the current ventilation mode
(Heat reclaim ventilator only) (AUTOMATIC, HEAT The day of the week indicator shows the current week
EXCHANGE, BYPASS). day (or the set day when reading or programming the
schedule timer).
5 VENTILATION ICON
11 CLOCK DISPLAY
The ventilation icon appears when the ventilation is
adjusted with the ventilation amount button (Heat The clock display indicates the current time (or the
reclaim ventilator only). Simultaneously, the ventilation action time when reading or programming the
amount is indicated by the fan speed icon (see 22). schedule timer).
6 AIR CLEANING ICON 12 MAXIMUM SET TEMPERATURE

This icon indicates that the air cleaning unit (option) is The maximum set temperature indicates the
operational. maximum set temperature when in limit operation.
7 LEAVE HOME ICON 13 MINIMUM SET TEMPERATURE

The leave home icon shows the status of the leave The minimum set temperature indicates the minimum
home function. set temperature when in limit operation.
ON Leave home is enabled 14 SCHEDULE TIMER ICON

This icon indicates that the schedule timer is enabled.
BLINKING Leave home is active
OFF Leave home is disabled
15 ACTION ICONS 30 SCHEDULE TIMER BUTTON

These icons indicate the actions for each day of the This button enables or disables the schedule timer.
schedule timer.
31 TIME ADJUST BUTTON
16 OFF ICON These buttons are used to adjust the clock or, when in
This icon indicates that the OFF action is selected programming mode, to adjust the programmed action
when programming the schedule timer. time. Both buttons have an auto-repeat function.
17 INSPECTION REQUIRED and 32 TEMPERATURE ADJUST BUTTONS

These icons indicate that inspection is required.
Consult your installer. These buttons are used to adjust the current setpoint
or, when in programming mode, to adjust the
programmed setpoint temperature (unit: 1˚C). Both
18 SET TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
buttons are also used to adjust the day of the week.
This indicates the current set temperature of the
installation (not shown in LIMIT operation or in FAN or
DRY mode). 33 OPERATION CHANGE/MIN-MAX BUTTON
19 SETTING This button is a multi-purpose button. Depending on the

previous manipulations of the user, it can have
Not used, for service purposes only.
following functions.
20 AIRFLOW DIRECTION ICON 1 select the operation mode of the installation

(FAN, DRY, AUTOMATIC, COOLING, HEATING)
This icon indicates the airflow direction (only for
installations with motorised airflow flaps). 2 toggle between minimum temperature and
maximum temperature when in limit operation
21 NOT AVAILABLE
is displayed whenever a non-installed option 34 SETPOINT/LIMIT BUTTON
is addressed or a function is not available. This button toggles between setpoint, limit operation or
OFF (programming mode only).
22 FAN SPEED ICON
35 FAN SPEED BUTTON
This icon indicates the set fan speed.
This button toggles between L (Low), H (High), HH
(very High), (Automatic).
23 DEFROST/HOTSTART MODE ICON
This icon indicates that the defrost/hotstart mode is 36 AIRFLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
active.
This button enables to adjust the airflow direction.
24 AIR FILTER CLEANING TIME ICON
This icon indicates the air filter must be cleaned. 37 AIR FILTER CLEANING TIME ICON RESET
Refer to the manual of the indoor unit. BUTTON
This button is used to reset the air filter cleaning time
25 ELEMENT CLEANING TIME ICON
icon.
This icon indicates the element must be cleaned
(Heat reclaim ventilator only).
26 VENTILATION MODE BUTTON

The ventilation mode button operates the Heat
reclaim ventilator ; refer to the Heat reclaim ventilator
manual for more details.
27 VENTILATION AMOUNT BUTTON
This button sets the ventilation amount; refer to the
Heat reclaim ventilator manual for more details.
28 INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON

Not used, for service purposes only.
29 PROGRAMMING BUTTON
This button is a multi-purpose button.
Depending on the previous manipulations of the user,
the programming button can have various functions.
2.3 BRC1E61, BRC1E62

(1) Mode Selector button
(11) LCD (with backlight)
(4) Up button
(5) Down button
(6) Right button
(7) Left button
(9) Operation lamp (Green)

(8) ON/OFF button
(3) Menu/Enter button
(10) Cancel button
(2) Airflow Setting button

∗ Illustration is for BRC1E62 as representative.
(1) Mode Selector button (4) Up button

Used to select the operation mode. Used to increase the setpoint.
Use to highlight the item above the
(2) Airflow Setting button current selection.
Used to indicate the Airflow Rate (Air (The highlighted items will be
Volume/Fan Speed)/Airflow Direction scrolled through when the button is
screen. pressed continuously.)
Used to change the item selected.
(3) Menu/Enter button
Used to indicate the Main menu. (5) Down button
(For details of Main menu, refer to the Used to decrease the setpoint.
operation manual.) Use to highlight the item below the
Used to enter the selected item. current selection.
(The highlighted items will be
Main menu scrolled through when the button is
pressed continuously.)
Airflow Direction
Used to change the item selected.
Quick Start
Ventilation
(6) Right button
Energy Saving Options
Used to highlight the next items on
Schedule
the right-hand side.
Filter Auto Clean
Display contents are changed to
Maintenance Information
next screen per page.
Configuration
Current Settings
Clock & Calendar
Language
∗ Depending on connected model
(7) Left button Service Settings menu

z Used to highlight the next items on the
left-hand side. Test Operation
z Display contents are changed to Maintenance Contact
previous screen per page. Field Settings
Min Setpoints Differential
(8) ON/OFF button Group Address
z Press this button to start the system. Indoor unit AirNet Address
z Press this button again to stop the Outdoor unit AirNet Address
system. Error History
Indoor Unit Status
(9) Operation lamp (Green) Outdoor Unit Status
This lamp lights up during operation. The Forced Fan ON
lamp blinks if an error occurs. Switch Main Sub Controller
Filter Indicator
(10) Cancel button Test Filter Auto Clean
z Used to return to the previous screen. Brush/Filter Ind.
z Press and hold this button for 4 Disable Filter Auto Clean
seconds or more to display Service ∗ Depending on connected model
Settings menu.
(11) LCD (with backlight)

The backlight will be lit for about 30
seconds by pressing any button.
2.4 Wireless Remote Controller

1-1
1
8
3
1-2
10
11
4
9
2 13
5 12
15
7
14
16
17
DISPLAY 14 AIRFLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON

(SIGNAL TRANSMISSION) OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
1
This lights up when a signal is being 15 Press this button to select OPERATION
transmitted. MODE.
DISPLAY FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
(OPERATION MODE) 16 Refer to the section of MAINTENANCE in
the operation manual attached to the
2 This display shows the current indoor unit.
OPERATION MODE. For cooling only type, INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON
(Auto) and (Heating) are not 17 This button is used only by qualified
installed. service persons for maintenance purposes.
H M L EMERGENCY OPERATION SWITCH
DISPLAY (SET TEMPERATURE)
3 C 18 This switch is readily used if the remote
This display shows the set temperature. controller does not work.
RECEIVER
DISPLAY hr. hr.
19 This receives the signals from the remote
4 (PROGRAMMED TIME) controller.
This display shows PROGRAMMED TIME
OPERATING INDICATOR LAMP (Red)
of the system start or stop.
5 DISPLAY 20 This lamp stays lit while the air
(AIRFLOW FLAP) conditioner runs. It flashes when the unit is
in trouble.
6 DISPLAY (FAN SPEED)
TIMER INDICATOR LAMP (Green)
The display shows the set fan speed. 21
This lamp stays lit while the timer is set.
DISPLAY TEST AIR FILTER CLEANING TIME
(INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION) INDICATOR LAMP (Red)
7 22
When the INSPECTION/TEST Lights up when it is time to clean the air
OPERATION BUTTON is pressed, the filter.
display shows the system mode is in.
DEFROST LAMP (Orange)
ON/OFF BUTTON
23 Lights up when the defrosting operation
8 Press the button and the system will start. has started. (For cooling only type this
Press the button again and the system will lamp does not turn ON.)
stop.
NOTES
FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON
• For the sake of explanation, all indications are
9 Press this button to select the fan speed,
shown on the display in Figure 1 contrary to
HIGH or LOW, of your choice. actual running situations.
TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON • Fig. 1-2 shows the remote controller with the
front cover opened.
10 Use this button for SETTING
TEMPERATURE (Operates with the front • If the air filter cleaning time indicator lamp
cover of the remote controller closed.) lights up, clean the air filter as explained in the
operation manual provided with the indoor
PROGRAMMING TIMER BUTTON
unit.
Use this button for programming START After cleaning and reinstalling the air filter,
11 and/or STOP time. (Operates with the
press the filter sign reset button on the remote
front cover of the remote controller controller. The air filter cleaning time indicator
opened.) lamp on the receiver will go out.
12 TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON • The defrost lamp will blink when the power is
13 TIMER RESERVE/CANCEL BUTTON turned ON. This is not an error.
SiAU301015EC MAIN/SUB Setting
3. MAIN/SUB Setting
3.1 BRC1C62, BRC1D61
Situation
The MAIN/SUB setting is necessary when 1 indoor unit is controlled by 2 remote controllers. When you use 2
remote controllers (control panel and separate remote controller), set one to MAIN and the other to SUB.
Setting
The remote controllers are factory setting to MAIN, so you only have to change 1 remote controller from MAIN
to SUB. To change a remote controller from MAIN to SUB, proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 Insert a flathead screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of the remote
controller, as shown in the illustration below. Gently pry off the upper part of the controller, working
from the 2 possible positions.
Upper part of the

remote controller
Lower part of the

remote controller
2 Turn the MAIN/SUB changeover switch on the PCB to S.

The switch is set to
M MAIN (factory setting)
S
M
Set the switch to SUB.
S
3.2 BRC1E61
The designation of the main and sub remote controllers can be swapped. Note that this change requires
turning the power OFF and then ON again.
Basic screen
Select "Main
is displayed. remote controller"
Press and or "Sub remote
Press
hold the controller" using
the
Cancel button the /
Cancel
for 4 seconds (Up/Down) buttons,
button
or more. and then press the
once.
Select "Main/sub changeover" and Menu/Enter button.
Press the Menu/Enter
Field setting press the Menu/Enter button. Item 2 is button.
Item 2 is
menu is displayed. displayed.
Press the Cancel button.
displayed.
MAIN/SUB Setting SiAU301015EC
3.3 BRC1E62
The designation of the main and sub remote controllers can be swapped. Note that this change requires
turning the power OFF and then ON again.
Basic screen
is displayed.
Select Main RC or
Press and hold Sub RC using the
Press the the Cancel / (Up/Down)
Cancel button for 4 buttons, and then
button seconds or press the
once. more. Select Switch Main Sub
Press the Menu/Enter button.
Controller and press the
Menu/Enter
Field setting Menu/Enter button. Item 2 is button. Item 2 is
menu is displayed. displayed.
Press the Cancel button.
displayed.
SiAU301015EC MAIN/SUB Setting

Introduction
To set the wireless remote controller, you have to set the address for:
The receiver of the wireless remote controller
The wireless remote controller.
Setting the Address for the Receiver

The address for the receiver of the wireless remote controller is factory setting to 1. To change this setting,
proceed as follows:
Set the wireless address switch (SS2) on the PCB according to the table below.
Unit No. No. 1
1 No. 2 No. 3
1
Wireless address
2
2
switch (SS2)
3
3
When using both a wired and a wireless remote controller for 1 indoor unit, the wired controller should be set
to MAIN. Therefore, set the MAIN/SUB switch (SS1) of the receiver to SUB.
MAIN/SUB MAIN SUB
MAIN/SUB switch S S
(SS1) M M
Setting the Address for the Wireless Remote Controller

The address for the wireless remote controller is factory setting to 1. To change this setting, proceed as
follows:
1. Hold down the button and the /TEST button

for at least 4 seconds to get the Field Setting mode.
(Indicated in the display area in the figure at right.) Mode 3
2. Press the FAN button and select a multiple setting
(A/b). Each time the button is pressed the display
switches between “A” and “b”.
3. Press the “ ” button or “ ” button to set the address.
UP DOWN
2
1 2 3 4 5 6
Address can be set from 1 to 6, but set it to 1 ~ 3 and to
same address as the receiver. (The receiver does not Address 4
work with address 4 ~ 6.)
4. Press the RESERVE button to enter the setting.
Multiple
5. Hold down the /TEST button for at least 1 second to setting
quit the Field Setting mode and return to the normal
display. 1
5
Centralized Control Group No. Setting SiAU301015EC
4. Centralized Control Group No. Setting

BRC1C Type/BRC1D Type
In order to conduct the centralized remote control using the centralized remote controller and the unified ON/
OFF controller, Group No. settings should be made by group using the operating remote controller.
Make Group No. settings for centralized remote control using the operating remote controller.
1. While in normal mode, press and hold the TEST
switch for a period of 4 seconds or more to set the system
to "Field setting mode".
2. Select the Mode No. “00” with the button.
3. Use the button to select the group No. for each group.
(Group numbers increase in the order of 1-00, 1-01, ... 1-15, 2-00, ... 4-15.)
4. Press or to set the selected group No.
5. Press TEST
to return to the Normal Mode.
BRC1C62
Mode No.
Group No.
Field
Setting
Mode
2
4 3
1,5
BRC1D61
Mode No.
Group No.
Field
Setting
Mode
2
4 3
1,5
Note:
For setting group No. of heat reclaim ventilator and wiring adaptor for other air conditioners, etc., refer to
the instruction manual.
Notice
Enter the group No. and installation place of the indoor unit into the installation table. Be sure to keep the
installation table with the operation manual for maintenance.
SiAU301015EC Centralized Control Group No. Setting
4.2 BRC1E61
In order to conduct the centralized remote control using the centralized remote controller and the unified ON/
OFF controller, Group No. settings should be made by group using the operating remote controller.
Make Group No. settings for centralized remote control using the operating remote controller.
(1) Basic screen
Press and hold Cancel button for 4 seconds or more.
Field setting menu is displayed.
(2) Field setting menu screen

Select Group No. setting in the field setting menu, and
press Menu/Enter button.
Group No. setting screen is displayed.
(3) Group No. setting

Select Group No. setting (Group), and press Menu/Enter
button.
Group No. setting (Group) screen is displayed.
(4) Group No. setting (Group)

Select the group No. by using ST (Up/Down) button.
Press Menu/Enter button.
Note:
For setting group No. of heat reclaim ventilator and wiring adaptor for other air conditioners, etc., refer to
the instruction manual.
Notice
Enter the group No. and installation place of the indoor unit into the installation table. Be sure to keep the
installation table with the operation manual for maintenance.
Centralized Control Group No. Setting SiAU301015EC
4.3 BRC1E62
Group No. Setting (Group)
Basic screen
is displayed.
Press the Press and hold the Cancel
Cancel button button for 4 seconds or more.
once.
Select Group No.
setting and then press
Field setting the Menu/Enter button.
Item 2 is
menu is Press the Cancel displayed.
displayed. button once.
Press the Cancel Select Group No.
button once. setting (Group)
and then press
the Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.
Select the desired
Press the Menu/Enter Group No. using
button. the / (Up/Down)
buttons, and then
press the
Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.
Group No. Setting (Unit)

Basic screen
is displayed.
Press the Cancel Press and hold the Cancel
button once. button for 4 seconds or more.
Select Group No.

setting and then press
Field setting the Menu/Enter button.
Item 2 is
menu is Press the Cancel displayed.
displayed. button once.
Press the Cancel Select Group No.
button once. setting (Unit) and
then press the
Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.
Select the desired
Press the Menu/Enter Group No. using
button. the / (Up/Down)
buttons, and then
press the
Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.
SiAU301015EC Service Mode
5. Service Mode
5.1 BRC1C62, BRC1D61, Wireless Remote Controller
5.1.1 Display Service Data
Unit No. Mode No.

Second Field
Code No. Setting
3 4 Mode
First
Code No.
1 2 7
5 3
6
1. Enter the field setting mode.

Press the inspection/test operation button for 4 seconds or more.
2. Enter the service mode.
After having entered the field setting mode, press the inspection/test operation button for 4 seconds or
more.
3. Select the mode No.
Set the desired mode No. with the up/down temperature setting button.
4. Select the unit No.
Select the indoor unit No. set with the time mode START/STOP button.
5. Select the desired error history No. or sensor data No. with or button.
6. Each item is displayed (Refer to the table below)
7. Return to the normal operation mode.
Press the inspection/test operation button once.
Mode No. Function Content and Operation Method Example of Remote Controller Display
40 Error History You can change the history with the
programming time up-down button. Past error
code
UNIT No.
CODE SETTING
Error history 1: Newest
3: Oldest
∗ "00" displayed for 4 and subsequent.
41 Sensor Data Display Select the display thermistor with

the programming time up-down Thermistor type
button
Display thermistor Temperature
00: Remote controller thermistor
UNIT No.
01: Suction air thermistor
02: Heat exchanger thermistor
SETTING
Service Mode SiAU301015EC
5.1.2 Service Setting
Mode No.
Unit No. Mode No. Field Setting Mode
Second 5
Field
Code No. 5
Setting
3 4 Mode
First
Code No.
1 2 6 Second Code No.

5 3
5
First Code No.
1, 2, 6
1. Enter the field setting mode.

Press the inspection/test operation button for 4 seconds or more.
2. Enter the maintenance mode.
After having entered the field setting mode, press the inspection/test operation button for a minimum of 4
seconds.
3. Select the mode No.
Set the desired mode No. with the up/down temperature setting button.
4. Select the unit No.
Select the indoor unit No. set with the time mode START/STOP button.
5. Carry out the necessary settings for each mode. (Mode 43 only possible for wireless remote controller)
• In case of Mode 43
Press timer ON/OFF button to decide the forced Fan ON.
Set “Fan speed” with fan speed control button and “Airflow direction” with airflow direction adjusting
button, then press timer ON/OFF button to decide.
Select the changed unit No. with or button, then press timer ON/OFF button to decide.
6. Return to the normal operation mode.
Press the inspection/test operation button once.
Mode No. Function Content and Operation Method Example of Remote Controller Display
43 Forced Fan ON Turns the fan ON for each unit UNIT No.
individually.
SETTING
44 Individual Setting Sets fan speed and airflow direction for
each unit individually when using group Fan 1: Low
speed 3: High
control. 0: Upper
Settings are made using the “airflow
direction adjust” and “fan speed adjust”
UNIT No. 4: Lowest
buttons.
CODE SETTING
45 Unit No. Change Changes unit No.

Field setting No.
Set the unit No. after changing with the
programming time up-down button. No. after change
UNIT No.
CODE SETTING
5.2 BRC1E61
Operating the remote controller allows service data to be acquired and various services to be set.
Basic
screen is
displayed.
Press the Press the
Cancel Press and hold the Cancel button Cancel button.
button for 4 seconds or more.
once.
Field setting
menu is
displayed.
Press the Press and hold

Cancel the Cancel button
button for 4 seconds or
once. more.
Select the desired item from the
Service menu, and then press Select the desired Unit No.
Service the Menu/Enter button. Item 2 is using the / (Up/Down)
menu is buttons. The corresponding
displayed. data will be displayed.
displayed. Press the Cancel button.
Service Menu Item 2 Remarks

Model Name Display 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
2. Indoor unit
3. Outside unit
Operating Hours Display 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
2. Indoor unit operating All of these are displayed in hours.
time
3. Indoor fan operation
4. Indoor unit energized
time
5. Outside unit operating
time
6. Outside fan 1 operation
7. Outside fan 2 operation
8. Outside compressor 1
operation
9. Outside compressor 2
operation
Indoor Status Display 1/2 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
2. FAN Tap, speed (rpm)
3. FLAP Swing, fixed
4. Speed Fan speed (rpm)
5. EV Degree that electronic expansion valve is open (pulse)
6. MP Drain pump ON/OFF
7. 52H Electric heater ON/OFF
8. Hu Humidifier ON/OFF
9. Anti-freezing Anti-freezing control ON/OFF
Service Menu Item 2 Remarks

Indoor Status Display 2/2 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
2. Th1 Suction air thermistor
3. Th2 Heat exchanger thermistor
4. Th3 —
5. Th4 Discharge air thermistor
6. Th5 —
7. Th6 —
Outside Status Display 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
2. FAN Tap 1 Fan tap
3. COMP Compressor power supply frequency (Hz)
4. EV1 Degree that electronic expansion valve is open (pulse)
5. SV1 Solenoid valve ON/OFF
6. Th1 Outdoor air thermistor
7. Th2 Heat exchanger thermistor
8. Th3 Discharge pipe thermistor
Error Display Selection 1. Warning display ON Displays a warning on the screen if an error occurs.
2. Warning display OFF No warning is displayed.
3. Error display ON Displays the error on the screen.
4. Error display OFF Displays neither errors nor warnings.
Unit No. Transfer 1. Current Unit No. A unit No. can be transferred to another.
2. Transfer Unit No.
Sensor Address Display Unit No.: 0 - 15 Select the Unit No. you want to check.
Code
00: Remote controller thermistor (°C)
01: Suction air thermistor (°C)
02: Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (°C)
03: Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (°C)
04: Indoor unit address No.
05: Outside unit address No.
06: BS unit address No.
07: Zone control address No.
08: Cooling/Heating batch address No.
09: Demand address No.
Data The corresponding data will be displayed, based on the
Unit No. and Code selected.
5.3 BRC1E62
Operating the remote controller allows service data to be acquired and various services to be set.
Basic
screen is
displayed.
Press the Press the
Cancel button Press and hold the Cancel Cancel button.
once. button for 4 seconds or more.
Service
settings menu
is displayed.
Press the Cancel Press and hold

button once. the Cancel button
for 4 seconds or
more.
Select the desired item from
the Service menu, and then Select the desired Unit No.
Maintenance press the Menu/Enter button. Item 2 is using the / (Up/Down)
menu is buttons. The corresponding
displayed. data will be displayed.
displayed. Press the Cancel button.
Maintenance Menu Item 2 Remarks

Model Name 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
2. Indoor unit
3. Outdoor unit
Operation Hours 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
2. Indoor unit operation All of these are displayed in hours.
hours
3. Indoor fan operation
hours
4. Indoor unit energized
time
5. Outdoor operation hours
6. Outdoor fan 1 operation
hours
7. Outdoor fan 2 operation
hours
8. Outdoor compressor 1
operation hours
9. Outdoor compressor 2
operation hours
Indoor Unit Status 1/3 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
2. FAN Tap, speed (rpm)
3. FLAP Swing, fixed
4. Speed Fan speed (rpm)
5. EV Degree that electronic expansion valve is open (pulse)
6. MP Drain pump ON/OFF
7. 52H Electric heater ON/OFF
8. Hu Humidifier ON/OFF
9. TBF Anti-freezing control ON/OFF
2. FLOAT FLOAT SWITCH ON/OFF
3. T1/T2 T1/T2 input from outside ON/OFF
Maintenance Menu Item 2 Remarks

2. Th1 Suction air thermistor ∗1
3. Th2 Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor
4. Th3 Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor
5. Th4 Discharge air thermistor ∗2
6. Th5 Infrared floor sensor ∗3
7. Th6 Control temperature ∗4
Outdoor Unit Status 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
2. FAN step Fan tap
3. COMP Compressor power supply frequency (Hz)
4. EV1 Degree that electronic expansion valve is open (pulse)
5. SV1 Solenoid valve ON/OFF
6. Th1 —
7. Th2 —
8. Th3 —
9. Th4 —
10.Th5 —
11.Th6 —
Error Display 1. Warning display ON Displays a warning on the screen if an error occurs.
2. Warning display OFF No warning is displayed.
3. Error display ON Displays the error on the screen.
4. Error display OFF Displays neither errors nor warnings.
Swap Unit No. 1. Current Unit No. A unit No. can be transferred to another.
2. Transfer Unit No.
Addressed Sensor Value Unit No.: 0 - 15 Select the Unit No. you want to check.
Code
00: Remote controller thermistor (°C)
01: Suction air thermistor (°C) ∗5
02: Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (°C)
03: Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (°C)
04: Indoor unit address No.
05: Outdoor unit address No.
06: BS unit address No.
07: Zone control address No.
08: Cooling/Heating batch address No.
09: Demand/low-noise address No.
22: Displays human presence detection rate (%) (see ∗7) in
Area 1 (see ∗6). Display value × 10%. Displays "15" for
units with no sensing type mounted.
26: Infrared sensor (°C) (See ∗8). Displays "–" for units with
no sensing type mounted.
Data The corresponding data will be displayed, based on the
Unit No. and Code selected.
∗1: Displays suction air temperature after correction for all models.
∗2: Displays temperature only for applicable models.
∗3: Displays floor temperature used for control (including correction) when the round flow with sensing is
connected.
∗4: Displays control temperature (temperature near the person when the round flow with sensing is
connected).
∗5: Displays temperature near the person only when the round flow with sensing is connected (SkyAir).
Displays suction air temperature after correction when the round flow with sensing is connected (VRV ).
∗6: Areas mean four areas shown on the below.
∗7: For human presence detection rate (%), human motion is recognized by digital output ranging from 0 to 5 V.
(5 V is output when no human presence is detected, and 0 V is output when human presence is detected.)
4
1 3
2
Detection areas of presence sensor
(Corresponding to the punched mark
80 cm above the floor on the inner frame of the panel:
~)
[Reference]
(1) 0% detection rate: Human presence is not detected at all.
(2) 25% detection rate: Human presence is detected, but the sensor does not recognize human presence.
(3) 50% detection rate: The sensor recognizes human presence (small human motion).
(4) 75% detection rate: The sensor recognized human presence (large human motion).
(5) 100% detection rate: The sensor constantly outputs 0 V. Continuing this condition will display an error.
∗8: Directly displays a measured value sent from the adaptor PCB.
Inspection Mode SiAU301015EC
6. Inspection Mode
Normal display (No display)

Press the Inspection/test button once.
Unit 0
Error code L0
Inspection
(1) Inspection mode (1) Inspection mode
Unit 0
Error code L0
Inspection
Error code blinks when an error occurs.
071
FJJ
(2) Indoor unit model code display (2) Indoor unit model code
0 7 1... Capacity code
F... Indoor unit system code
J... Indoor unit type code
J... Progression code
–––
AA1
(3) Outside unit model code display (3) Outside unit model code
Display Model
AFE RWEYQ-P
Test operation
Test operation mode
Note:
Inspection mode is not available for BRC1E61.
SiAU301015EC
Part 4
Functions and Control
1. General Functions.................................................................................60
1.1 Operation Mode......................................................................................60
2. Basic Control.........................................................................................61
2.1 Normal Operation ...................................................................................61
2.2 Indoor Unit Operation Mode Details .......................................................62
2.3 Compressor Control ...............................................................................63
2.5 Heat Exchange Mode in Heating or Simultaneous
Cooling/Heating Operation .....................................................................66
3. Special Control......................................................................................68
3.1 Startup Control .......................................................................................68
3.2 Oil Return Operation ..............................................................................70
3.3 Oil Return Operation of Water Heat Exchanger .....................................72
3.4 Cooling/Heating mode switching (BSQ-AV1, BS-Q14AV1) ...................73
3.5 Pump down Residual Operation Control ................................................76
3.6 Refrigerant Drift Prevention....................................................................78
3.7 Standby ..................................................................................................79
3.8 Stopping Operation ................................................................................80
4. Protection Control .................................................................................82
4.1 High Pressure Protection Control...........................................................82
4.2 Low Pressure Protection Control............................................................83
4.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................................................85
4.4 Inverter Protection Control .....................................................................86
4.5 Cooling Fan Control ...............................................................................87
5. Other Control.........................................................................................88
5.1 Outside Unit Rotation .............................................................................88
6. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) .............................................................89
6.1 Drain Pump Control................................................................................89
6.2 Thermostat Control.................................................................................91
6.4 Hot Start Control (In Heating Only) ........................................................94
6.5 Freeze-up Prevention.............................................................................95
6.6 List of Swing Flap Operations ................................................................96
6.7 Louver Control for Preventing Ceiling Dirt..............................................97
Functions and Control 59

General Functions SiAU301015EC
1. General Functions
1.1 Operation Mode
System stopping function
NO • Restart standby
Thermostat ON
• Crankcase heater control
YES
Startup control
• Cooling startup control
• Heating startup control • Pump down residual operation
• Pressure equalization
startup control
• Outside unit rotation
Normal operation
YES
Thermostat OFF
• Cooling operation
• Heating operation NO
• Cooling/Heating simultaneous
operation
Abnormal stop Determination
• BS unit & Indoor unit operation • Abnormal stop
condition
• Sub unit stopping function
• Compressor control NO
• Electronic expansion valve control
• Heat exchanger mode control
Cooling/Heating YES
• Pressure equalization control
mode change
Protection control
NO
• High pressure protection control
• Low pressure protection control
• Discharge pipe protection control IN Oil return operation
Oil return
• Cooling oil return operation
• Inverter protection control condition
• Heating oil return operation
• Refrigerant drift prevention
NO
Water heat IN • Water heat exchanger oil

exchanger oil return return operation
condition
NO
60 Functions and Control

SiAU301015EC Basic Control
2. Basic Control
2.1 Normal Operation
Actuator Function
Parts Name Electric
Symbol Normal heating or normal cooling/
Normal cooling heating simultaneous operation
PI control, High pressure protection, PI control, High pressure protection,
Compressor M1C Low pressure protection, Discharge Low pressure protection, Discharge
pipe temperature protection control, pipe temperature protection control,
Inverter protection control Inverter protection control
Inverter cooling fan M1F, M2F Inverter cooling fan control Inverter cooling fan control
Four way valve (Main) Y5S OFF ON
Heat exchanger mode control
Four way valve (Heat Y7S OFF (In case of heating and simultaneous
exchanger) cooling/heating operation)
Electronic expansion valve Heat exchanger mode control Heat exchanger mode control
(Main) Y1E (In case of cooling operation) (In case of heating and simultaneous
cooling/heating operation)
(Subcooling) Y3E Y3E control Y3E control
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S Protection control Protection control
Water heat exchanger oil return Water heat exchanger oil return
solenoid valve Y2S OFF control
Receiver gas charging solenoid Y3S Receiver pressure control Receiver pressure control and drift
valve protection control
Receiver gas purge solenoid
valve Y4S OFF Drift protection control
Non-operation unit liquid pipe Y6S ON ON

closing solenoid valve
Indoor fan —
Refer to following page for detail. Refer to following page for detail.
Indoor unit electronic expansion — (Indoor unit operation mode detail) (Indoor unit operation mode detail)
valve
BSQ100/160/250AV1, BS4/6/8/10/12/16Q14AV1
Normal cooling Normal Simultaneous Cooling/ Normal heating
BS unit actuator Heating
Cooling Cooling Heating Heating
Thermo. ON 0 pulse 0 pulse Subcooled 0 pulse
Electronic degree control
expansion valve Y1E Stopping 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse
(EVSC)
Thermostat OFF 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse
Electronic Thermostat ON 6000 pulse 0 pulse 6000 pulse 6000 pulse
(EVH) Thermostat OFF 6000 pulse 0 pulse 6000 pulse 6000 pulse
(EVL) Thermostat OFF 6000 pulse 6000 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse

Basic Control SiAU301015EC
2.2 Indoor Unit Operation Mode Details

Outside Unit Operation Mode
Cooling/Heating
Cooling mode mode Heating mode Stopping
Y3S OFF OFF

Y1S OFF OFF
Depend on Depend on
Thermostat ON Indoor Fan remote controller remote controller
Indoor
electronic Indoor unit Indoor unit
expansion control control
valve
Y3S OFF OFF OFF OFF
Y1S OFF OFF OFF OFF
Depend on Depend on Depend on Depend on
Cooling Indoor Fan remote controller remote controller remote controller remote controller
Thermostat OFF Indoor
electronic
expansion 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse
valve
Y3S OFF OFF OFF OFF
Y1S OFF OFF OFF OFF
Indoor Fan OFF OFF OFF OFF
Stopping Indoor
electronic
Indoor Unit
expansion 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse

valve
Y3S ON ON
Y1S ON OFF
Depend on Depend on
Indoor Fan remote controller remote controller
Thermostat ON Indoor
electronic Indoor unit Indoor unit
expansion control control
valve
Y3S ON ON ON ON
Y1S OFF OFF OFF OFF
Heating Indoor Fan LL LL LL LL
Thermostat OFF Indoor
electronic
expansion 0 pulse (200 pulse) (200 pulse) 0 pulse
valve
Y3S ON OFF (∗1) ON ON (∗1)
Y1S OFF OFF OFF OFF
Indoor Fan OFF OFF OFF OFF
Stopping Indoor
electronic
expansion 0 pulse (∗2) (200 pulse) 0 pulse
valve
Note: ∗1: The switch for the BS unit is operated when pressure equalization control turns on after
cooling/heating mode of other indoor unit is changed or on the timing of oil returns.
∗2: If Y3S: ON, depend on indoor control (200 pulse).
If Y3S: OFF, 0 pulse.

2.3 Compressor Control

2.3.1 Compressor PI Control
Te: Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature (°C)
TeS: Target Te value (Varies depending on Te setting, operating frequency, etc.)
Tc: High pressure equivalent saturation temperature (°C)
TcS: Target Tc value (Varies depending on Tc setting, operating frequency, etc.)
Carries out the compressor capacity PI control to maintain Te at constant during cooling
operation and Tc at constant during heating operation to ensure stable unit performance.
[Cooling operation]
Controls compressor capacity to adjust Te to achieve TeS.
Te setting
L M (Normal) H
(factory setting)
3 6 7 8 9 10 11
[Heating operation]
Controls compressor capacity to adjust Tc to achieve TcS.
Tc setting
L M (Normal) H
(factory setting)
43 46 49
[Cooling/Heating simultaneous operation]

Controls compressor capacity to adjust Te to achieve TeS and Tc to achieve TcS at the same time.
Te setting
L M (Normal) H
(factory setting)
3 6 7 8 9 10 11
Tc setting
L M (Normal) H
(factory setting)
43 46 49

2.3.2 Compressor Operation Frequency Steps

1. 1 Outside 2. 2 Outside units connection installation
unit installation
Step Main
A : 1 Compressor operation
No.
Step Main
1 52 Hz Startup No.
2 57 Hz 1 52 Hz
3 62 Hz 2 57 Hz
4 68 Hz 3 62 Hz
5 74 Hz 4 68 Hz
6 81 Hz 5 74 Hz
7 88 Hz 6 81 Hz B : 2 Compressor operation
8 96 Hz 7 88 Hz
Step Main Sub 1
9 104 Hz 8 96 Hz No.
10 110 Hz 9 104 Hz 9 52 Hz 52 Hz Startup
11 112 Hz 10 110 Hz 10 57 Hz 57 Hz
12 120 Hz 11 112 Hz 11 62 Hz 62 Hz
13 130 Hz 12 120 Hz 12 68 Hz 68 Hz
14 141 Hz 13 130 Hz 13 71 Hz 71 Hz
15 156 Hz 14 141 Hz 14 74 Hz 74 Hz
16 168 Hz 15 81 Hz 81 Hz
17 177 Hz 16 88 Hz 88 Hz
18 189 Hz 17 92 Hz 92 Hz
19 202 Hz 18 96 Hz 96 Hz
20 210 Hz 19 104 Hz 104 Hz
21 216 Hz 20 110 Hz 110 Hz
22 230 Hz 21 112 Hz 112 Hz
22 120 Hz 120 Hz
23 130 Hz 130 Hz
24 141 Hz 141 Hz
3. 3 Outside units connection installation 25 156 Hz 156 Hz
26 168 Hz 168 Hz
A : 1 Compressor operation
27 177 Hz 177 Hz
Step Main
No. 28 189 Hz 189 Hz
1 52 Hz 29 202 Hz 202 Hz
2 57 Hz 30 210 Hz 210 Hz
3 62 Hz 31 216 Hz 216 Hz
4 68 Hz 32 230 Hz 230 Hz
5 74 Hz
6 81 Hz B : 2 Compressor operation
7 88 Hz Step Main Sub 1
8 96 Hz No.
9 104 Hz 9 52 Hz 52 Hz
10 110 Hz 10 57 Hz 57 Hz
11 112 Hz 11 62 Hz 62 Hz C : 3 Compressor operation
12 120 Hz 12 68 Hz 68 Hz
Step Main Sub 1 Sub 2
13 130 Hz 13 71 Hz 71 Hz No.
14 141 Hz 14 74 Hz 74 Hz 14 52 Hz 52 Hz 52 Hz Startup
15 81 Hz 81 Hz 15 57 Hz 57 Hz 57 Hz
16 88 Hz 88 Hz 16 62 Hz 62 Hz 62 Hz
17 92 Hz 92 Hz 17 65 Hz 65 Hz 65 Hz
18 96 Hz 96 Hz 18 68 Hz 68 Hz 68 Hz
19 104 Hz 104 Hz 19 71 Hz 71 Hz 71 Hz
20 110 Hz 110 Hz 20 74 Hz 74 Hz 74 Hz
21 112 Hz 112 Hz 21 81 Hz 81 Hz 81 Hz
22 88 Hz 88 Hz 88 Hz
23 96 Hz 96 Hz 96 Hz
24 104 Hz 104 Hz 104 Hz
25 110 Hz 110 Hz 110 Hz
26 112 Hz 112 Hz 112 Hz
27 120 Hz 120 Hz 120 Hz
28 130 Hz 130 Hz 130 Hz
29 141 Hz 141 Hz 141 Hz
30 156 Hz 156 Hz 156 Hz
31 168 Hz 168 Hz 168 Hz
32 177 Hz 177 Hz 177 Hz
Note: ∗ Depending on operational conditions,
33 189 Hz 189 Hz 189 Hz
operation pattern may be different from 34 202 Hz 202 Hz 202 Hz
the description above. 35 210 Hz 210 Hz 210 Hz
36 216 Hz 216 Hz 216 Hz
37 230 Hz 230 Hz 230 Hz

2.4 Electronic Expansion Valve Control

SH: Evaporator outlet superheat (°C)
Ts: Suction pipe temperature detected suction pipe thermistor (°C)
Tsh: Temperature detected by gas pipe temperature of subcooling heat exchanger gas side
(outlet temperature) (°C)
Te: Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature (°C)
Main Electronic Expansion Valve Control

Carries out the electronic expansion valve (Y1E) PI control to maintain the evaporator outlet
superheated degree at constant during heating operation to make maximum use of the outside
heat exchanger (evaporator)
SH = Ts - Te
The optimum initial value of the evaporator outlet superheated degree is 5°C, but varies
depending on the discharge pipe superheated degree of inverter compressor.
Subcooling Electronic Expansion Valve Control

[Cooling operation]
Makes PI control of the electronic expansion valve (Y3E) to keep the superheated degree of the
outlet gas pipe on the evaporator side for the full use of the subcooling heat exchanger.
SH = Tsh -Te
[Heating operation]
To lower the discharge pipe temperature when the discharge pipe temperature is over 95°C,
makes PI control of the electronic expansion valve (Y3E) to keep the superheated degree of the
outlet gas pipe on the evaporator side for the full use of the subcooling heat exchanger. (When
the discharge pipe temperature is lower than 95°C, Y3E opening is 0 pulse.)
SH = Tsh -Te

2.5 Heat Exchange Mode in Heating or Simultaneous

Cooling/Heating Operation
In heating or simultaneous cooling/heating operation, a target condensing and evaporating
temperature can be secured by switching the water heat exchanger of the outside unit into
evaporator or condenser with load.
1 outside unit installation

Master unit
Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) OFF
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Condenser)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange
(Y1E) capacity balance
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0
Master unit
Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Evaporator)
2 outside units installation

Master unit Slave unit 1
Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) OFF OFF
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Condenser) (Condenser)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange
(Y1E) capacity balance capacity balance
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) OFF ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Condenser) (Evaporator)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange 0 pulse
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0
Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) OFF ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Condenser) (Evaporator)

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) ON ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Evaporator) (Evaporator)
(Y1E) capacity balance 0 pulse
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) ON ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Evaporator) (Evaporator)
Note: 1. Tc: High pressure equivalent saturation temperature

Te: Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
∆GR = Target of heat exchange capacity balance – Actual measurement of heat balance
(1) ∆GR > 0: Insufficient evaporation (Excessive condensation)
(2) ∆GR < 0: Insufficient condensation (Excessive evaporation)
2. Control of heat exchange capacity balance
Control the electronic expansion valve so that Te or Tc will obtain the target value.

3 outside units installation

Master unit Slave unit 1 Slave unit 2
Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) OFF OFF OFF
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Condenser) (Condenser) (Condenser)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange
(Y1E) capacity balance capacity balance capacity balance
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) OFF OFF OFF
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Condenser) (Condenser) (Condenser)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange 0 pulse
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) OFF ON ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Condenser) (Evaporator) (Evaporator)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange 0 pulse 0 pulse
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange 0 pulse ∆GR < 0
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

∆GR > 0

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) ON OFF OFF
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Evaporator) (Condenser) (Condenser)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange 0 pulse 0 pulse
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) ON ON ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Evaporator) (Evaporator) (Evaporator)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange 0 pulse
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) ON ON ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Evaporator) (Evaporator) (Evaporator)
Note: 1. Tc: High pressure equivalent saturation temperature

∆GR = Target of heat exchange capacity balance – Actual measurement of heat balance
(1) ∆GR > 0: Insufficient evaporation (Excessive condensation)
(2) ∆GR < 0: Insufficient condensation (Excessive evaporation)
2. Control of heat exchange capacity balance
Control the electronic expansion valve so that Te or Tc will obtain the target value.

Special Control SiAU301015EC
3. Special Control
3.1 Startup Control
This startup control provides the following control to reduce the compressor load resulting from
liquid return or else during compressor startup, and also determine the position of four way
valves.
3.1.1 Startup Control in Cooling
Both master and slave units operate same time for changing four way valve position → Normal
operation after completion.
Pc: Value detected by high pressure sensor
Pe: Value detected by low pressure sensor
Thermostat ON
Parts Name Electric Symbol Pressure Equalization Starting Control

Control before Startup
Compressor M1C 0 Hz 52 Hz +2 steps/20 seconds

(until Pc – Pe > 0.49 MPa)
Inverter cooling fan M1F, M2F OFF Inverter cooling fan control
Four way valve (Main) Y5S Holding OFF
Four way valve (Heat exchanger) Y7S Holding OFF
Electronic expansion valve (Main) Y1E 0 pulse 2000 pulse
Electronic expansion valve (Subcooling) Y3E 0 pulse 0 pulse
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S OFF ON
Water heat exchanger oil return solenoid OFF
valve Y2S OFF
Receiver gas charging solenoid valve Y3S OFF OFF

Receiver gas purge solenoid valve Y4S OFF OFF
Non-operation unit liquid pipe closing
solenoid valve Y6S ON ON
Indoor fan M1F, M2F Indoor unit control Indoor unit control
Indoor unit electronic expansion valve Y1E 0 pulse 0 pulse → Initial opening
Ending condition 1 minute Max. 5 minutes

SiAU301015EC Special Control
3.1.2 Startup Control in Heating

Both master and slave units operate same time for changing four way valve position → Normal
operation after completion.
Pc: Value detected by high pressure sensor
Thermostat ON
Pressure Equalization
Parts Name Electric Symbol Control before Start-up Starting Control
52 Hz +2 steps/20 seconds
Compressor M1C 0 Hz (till Pc – Pe > 0.49 MPa)
Inverter cooling fan M1F, M2F OFF Inverter cooling fan control
Four way valve (Main) Y5S Holding ON
Four way valve (Heat exchanger) Y7S Holding OFF
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S OFF ON
Water heat exchanger oil return solenoid
valve Y2S OFF OFF

Non-operation unit liquid pipe closing Y6S ON ON
solenoid valve
Indoor fan M1F, M2F Indoor unit control Indoor unit control
Indoor unit electronic expansion valve Y1E 0 pulse Indoor unit control
Ending condition 1 minute Max. 6 minutes 40 seconds

3.2 Oil Return Operation

In order to prevent the running-out of refrigerating machine oil in the compressor, the oil flowing
out from the compressor to the system side is collected through the oil return operation.
3.2.1 Oil Return Operation in Cooling

Tc: High pressure equivalent saturation temperature
[Starting conditions]
Start oil return operation in cooling referring to the following conditions.
∗ Cumulative oil return amount
∗ Timer
Cumulative compressor operating time after power supply turns ON exceeds 2 hours and the
time after the completion of previous oil return operation exceeds 8 hours.
Furthermore, the cumulative oil return is calculated according to Tc, Te, and compressor load.
Cooling Oil Return
Electric During Oil Return After Oil Return
Parts Name Symbol Preparation Operation Operation
Compressor M1C 104 Hz 52 Hz
Four way valve (Main) Y5S OFF OFF
Four way valve (Heat exchanger) Y7S OFF OFF
Electronic expansion valve Y3E 0 pulse 0 pulse
(Subcooling)
Water heat exchanger oil return
solenoid valve Y2S OFF OFF
Receiver gas charging solenoid Y3S OFF OFF

valve
Same as normal
Liquid pipe closing solenoid valve Y6S cooling operation ON ON
Thermostat ON/OFF:
Indoor unit control
Indoor fan (Cooling) M1F, M2F Thermostat OFF: Normal control
OFF
Stop/thermostat OFF:
Indoor unit electronic expansion Y1E 200 pulse Normal control
valve (Cooling) Thermostat ON:
Indoor unit control
Indoor fan (Heating) M1F, M2F — —
Indoor unit
electronic expansion Y1E — —
valve (Heating)
Ending condition 20 seconds Max. 8 minutes Max. 3 minutes
BSQ100/160/250AV1, BS4/6/8/10/12/16Q14AV1
Normal cooling Normal Simultaneous Cooling/Heating Normal heating
BS unit actuator
Thermo. ON 0 pulse 0 pulse Subcooled degree 0 pulse
Electronic control
expansion valve Y1E
(EVSC) Stopping 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse

3.2.2 Oil Return Operation in Heating or Cooling/Heating simultaneous

Operation
[Starting conditions]
Start oil return operation in heating referring to the following conditions.
Cumulative compressor operating time after power supply turns ON exceeds 2 hours and the
time after the completion of previous oil return operation exceeds 8 hours. And cumulative oil
return is calculated based on Tc, Te compressor load.
Electric During Oil Return After Oil Return

Parts Name Symbol Preparation Operation Operation
Compressor M1C 104 Hz 74 Hz
Four way valve (Main) Y5S OFF ON
Four way valve (Heat Y7S OFF Heat exchanger mode
exchanger)
Electronic expansion valve Y7S: OFF→2000 pulse
(Main) Y1E 2000 pulse Y7S: ON→180 pulse
(Subcooling)
Hot gas bypass
solenoid valve Y1S ON ON
Water heat exchanger oil Y2S OFF OFF

return solenoid valve
Receiver gas charging Same as normal
cooling operation
Receiver gas purge solenoid Y4S OFF OFF
valve
Liquid pipe closing solenoid
valve Y6S ON ON
Thermostat ON/OFF:
Indoor fan (Cooling) M1F, M2F Indoor unit control Normal control
Thermostat OFF:
OFF
Indoor unit electronic
expansion valve Y1E 320 pulse Normal control
(Cooling)
Indoor fan (Heating) M1F, M2F OFF Indoor unit control
expansion valve (Heating) Y1E 320 pulse Normal control
Ending condition 2 minutes Max. 8 minutes Max. 3 minutes
BSQ100/160/250AV1, BS4/6/8/10/12/16Q14AV1
Normal cooling Normal Simultaneous Cooling/Heating Normal heating
BS unit actuator
Subcooled degree
Electronic Thermo. ON 0 pulse 0 pulse control 0 pulse
expansion valve Y1E
(EVSC) Stopping 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse

3.3 Oil Return Operation of Water Heat Exchanger

[Oil return operation of water heat exchanger]
When the water heat exchanger is used as evaporator during heating or simultaneous cooling/
heating operation, the operation that the oil accumulated in the water heat exchanger is
returned to compressor is conducted.
[Starting condition]
Tg: Gas pipe temperature of water heat exchanger
After a certain continuous period of time has passed under the following conditions, oil return
operation starts.
• Y7S: ON (Water heat exchanger is an evaporator.)
& • Tg – Te > 10°C
• Elapse of a certain period of time
Parts Name Electric Water Heat Exchanger Oil Return Control

Symbol
Compressor M1C 52 Hz
Four way valve (Main) Y5S ON

Four way valve
(Heat exchanger) Y7S OFF
Electronic expansion Y1E 300 pulse
valve (Main)
Electronic expansion
valve (Subcooling) Y3E 180 pulse
Hot gas bypass Y1S ON
solenoid valve
Water heat exchanger oil
Y2S ON
return solenoid valve
Receiver gas
charging solenoid Y3S OFF
Receiver gas purge
solenoid valve Y4S OFF
Non-operation unit
liquid pipe closing Y6S ON
solenoid valve
Indoor fan (Cooling) M1F, M2F

expansion valve Y1E Normal control
(Cooling)
Indoor fan (Heating) M1F, M2F

Thermostat ON: Normal control
expansion valve Y1E
Thermostat OFF/OFF: 500 pulse
(Heating)
Ending condition Max. 90 seconds

3.4 Cooling/Heating mode switching

(BSQ-AV1, BS-Q14AV1)
[While in cooling/heating mixed mode, single-room cooling → heating]
First, the electronic expansion valve of the indoor unit in cooling operation will close, and the Y2E and Y3E electronic
expansion valves of the BS unit will all close once.
Next, the Y2E electronic expansion valve will open little by little to perform pressure equalization.
Then the electronic expansion valve will fully open, and the electronic expansion valve of the indoor unit will open to
activate the heating circuit.
The required switching time is approximately 6 minutes. (Field settings, however, can shorten the time from 6 minutes
to 4 minutes.)
(1) In cooling
Indoor unit BS unit
Liquid pipe
Y1E
Dual pressure gas pipe

Y2E
Y3E
Suction pipe
Cooling Unit
(2) In equalization
Indoor unit BS unit
Liquid pipe
(close) Y1E

Y2E (open)
Y3E (close)
Suction pipe
(3) To heating
Indoor unit BS unit
Liquid pipe
Y1E

Y2E
Y3E
Suction pipe
Heating Unit

[While in cooling/heating mixed mode, single-room heating → cooling]

First, the electronic expansion valve of the indoor unit in heating operation will close, and the Y2E and Y3E electronic
expansion valves of the BS unit will all close once.
Next, the Y3E electronic expansion valve will open little by little to perform pressure equalization.
Then the electronic expansion valve will fully open, and the electronic expansion valve of the indoor unit will open to
activate the heating circuit.
The required switching time is approximately 6 minutes. (Field settings, however, can shorten the time from 6 minutes
to 4 minutes.)
(1) In heating
Indoor unit BS unit
Liquid pipe
Y1E

Y2E
Y3E
Suction pipe
Heating Unit
(2) In equalization
Indoor unit BS unit
Liquid pipe
(close) Y1E

Y2E (open)
Y3E (close)
Suction pipe
In equalization
(3) To cooling
Indoor unit BS unit
Liquid pipe
Y1E

Y2E
Y3E
Suction pipe
Cooling Unit

[While in all-room cooling operation → All-room cooling/heating simultaneous operation]

Dual pressure gas pipe (1) All the indoor units in cooling operation
Outside unit Suction pipe · Using the dual pressure gas pipe as a suction
gas pipe.
Liquid
pipe

(2) Pump-down residual operation
Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling (3) Pre-startup control

· Switching between the electronic expansion
Dual pressure gas pipe valves of BS unit.
· Required switching time: 30 seconds (switching
Outside unit Suction pipe control time)
(While switching: The compressor stops
operating.)
Liquid
pipe (4) Startup control
· Switching the dual pressure gas pipe from low
pressure to high pressure.
Dual pressure gas pipe (5) Into heating operation or cooling and heating
Suction pipe simultaneous operation
Outside unit
Each indoor unit
Liquid · In warm air supply operation under cool air
prevention control (for 3 to 5 minutes).
pipe

Heating Heating Heating Heating Heating
[While in all-room heating operation or cooling/heating simultaneous operation → All-room cooling]

Dual pressure gas pipe (1) In heating operation or cooling and heating
Outside unit Suction pipe simultaneous operation
· Using the dual pressure gas pipe as a suction
gas pipe.
Liquid
pipe

(2) Pump-down residual operation
(3) Pre-startup control
Heating Heating Heating Heating Heating · Switching between the electronic expansion
valves of BS unit.
Dual pressure gas pipe · Required switching time: 2 to 4 minutes
(switching control time)
Outside unit Suction pipe (While switching: The compressor stops
operating.)
Liquid
pipe (4) Startup control
· Switching the dual pressure gas pipe from low
pressure to high pressure.
Vent Vent Vent Vent Vent

(5) Into all-unit cooling operation
Outside unit Suction pipe · In cool air supply operation
Liquid
pipe

Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling

3.5 Pump down Residual Operation Control

If any liquid refrigerant remains in the heat exchanger during compressor startup, the liquid
refrigerant will enter the compressor, resulting in the dilution of the refrigerating machine oil in
the compressor and the degradation of lubricating capacity.
Therefore, before the compressor stops, pump down operation is performed to collect the
refrigerant in the heat exchanger.
3.5.1 Cooling Operation Mode
Electric
Parts Name Symbol Master Unit Operation Slave Unit Operation
Compressor M1C Current step OFF

Four way valve (Main) Y5S OFF OFF
Four way valve (Heat exchanger) Y7S OFF OFF
(Subcooling) Y3E 0 pulse 0 pulse
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S ON OFF


Non-operation unit liquid pipe closing
solenoid valve Y6S OFF ON
Indoor fan (Cooling) M1F, M2F No instruction

Indoor unit electronic expansion
valve (Cooling) Y1E All: 0 pulse
Ending condition Max. 5 minutes

3.5.2 Heating & Simultaneous Cooling/Heating Mode
Parts Name Electric Master Unit Operation Slave Unit Operation

Symbol
Compressor M1C Current step OFF
Four way valve (Main) Y5S ON ON
Four way valve (Heat exchanger) Y7S Holding Holding
Electronic expansion valve (Main) Y1E Y7S: OFF→2000 pulse 0 pulse

Y7S: ON→ 0 pulse
(Subcooling)
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S ON OFF

Non-operation unit liquid pipe closing Y6S OFF ON
solenoid valve
Indoor fan (Cooling) M1F, M2F No instruction
Indoor unit electronic expansion Y1E All: 0 pulse
valve (Cooling)
Indoor fan (Heating) M1F, M2F No instruction
Indoor unit electronic expansion
valve (Heating) Y1E All: 500 pulse
Ending condition Max. 5 minutes

3.6 Refrigerant Drift Prevention

“Refrigerant drift prevention control” is carried out, in order to prevent refrigerant drift among
outside units during heating operation using outside multiple connection. Refrigerant
overcharged in outside units are collected and transferred to other outside units that are
refrigerant shortage by controlling the electronic expansion valve.
3.6.1 In case of cooling/heating changeover connection

When the evaporator outlet superheated degree is large, open the solenoid valve (Y4S) for
venting receiver refrigerant of the outside units that are refrigerant shortage.
When the evaporator outlet
superheated degree is large
Normal operation
Y4S: ON
(Y4S: OFF)
superheated degree is small
3.6.2 In case of cooling/heating simultaneous connection

When the evaporator outlet superheated degree is large, open the solenoid valve (Y4S) for
venting receiver gas of the outside units that are refrigerant shortage and the solenoid valve
(Y3S) for pressurizing the receiver of the overcharged outside units.
superheated degree is large
Normal operation
Y4S: ON
(Y4S: OFF)
Y3S: ON
(Y3S: OFF) When the evaporator outlet
superheated degree is small

3.7 Standby
3.7.1 Restart Standby
Forced standby is performed to prevent frequent repetition of ON/OFF of the compressor, and
to equalize pressure in the refrigerant system.
Electric
Parts Name Symbol Actuator Function
Compressor M1C 0 Hz
Inverter cooling fan M1F, M2F OFF
Four way valve (Main) Y5S Holding
Four way valve (Heat exchanger) Y7S Holding
Electronic expansion valve (Main) Y1E 0 pulse
Electronic expansion valve (Subcooling) Y3E 0 pulse
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S OFF
Water heat exchanger oil return solenoid valve Y2S OFF
Receiver gas charging solenoid valve Y3S OFF
Receiver gas purge solenoid valve Y4S OFF
Non-operation unit liquid pipe closing solenoid valve Y6S ON
Indoor fan (Cooling) M1F, M2F Remote controller setting
Indoor unit electronic expansion valve (Cooling) Y1E All indoor electronic expansion valve : 0 pulse
Indoor fan (Heating) M1F, M2F Indoor unit control
Indoor unit electronic expansion valve (Heating) Y1E All indoor electronic expansion valve : 0 pulse
BS unit Holding
Ending condition 4 minutes
3.7.2 Crankcase Heater Control

In order to prevent the refrigerant from dwelling in the compressor in the stop mode, this mode
controls the crankcase heater.
Discharge pipe
temperature < 70˚C
Crankcase heater Crankcase heater
OFF ON
Discharge pipe
temperature > 75˚C

3.8 Stopping Operation

This operation defines the operation of the actuator while the system stops.
3.8.1 When System is in Stop Mode (Normal Operation Stop)

Electric
Parts Name Symbol Actuator Function
Compressor M1C OFF
Inverter cooling fan M1F, M2F OFF
Four way valve (Main) Y5S Holding
Four way valve (Heat exchanger) Y7S Holding
Electronic expansion valve (Main) Y1E 0 pulse
Electronic expansion valve (Subcooling) Y3E 0 pulse
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S OFF
Water heat exchanger oil return solenoid valve Y2S OFF
Receiver gas charging solenoid valve Y3S OFF
Receiver gas purge solenoid valve Y4S OFF
Non-operation unit liquid pipe closing solenoid valve Y6S ON
Ending conditions — Indoor unit thermostat ON
3.8.2 Stopping Operation of Slave Units During Master Unit is in Operation

with Multi Outside Unit System
This operation makes adjustments of required refrigerant amount with non-operating slave units
while the master unit is in operation.
Cooling
The system operates in mode A or mode B listed in the table below.
Electric
Parts Name Symbol Mode A Operation (∗1) Mode B Operation (∗1)
Compressor M1C OFF OFF
Inverter cooling fan M1F, M2F OFF OFF
Four way valve (Main) Y5S Holding Holding
Electronic expansion valve (Main) Y1E 150 to 300 pulse 0 pulse
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S OFF OFF
Water heat exchanger oil return solenoid Y2S ON OFF
valve
solenoid valve
To Mode B when no refrigerant To Mode A when refrigerant
Mode transition conditions shortage signal is sent from shortage signal is sent from
indoor unit indoor unit
Ending conditions Slave units are required to operate.
Note:
Master Slave
∗1 Mode A or B operation unit unit
 Mode A: Master unit collects refrigerant.


 Mode B: Slave unit storage refrigerant.
The changeover operation for mode A and B is performed for the reason that the required
refrigerant amount varies depending on the indoor unit operation capacity.

Heating or simultaneously cooling/heating operation

The system operates in mode A or mode B listed in the table below.
Electric
Parts Name Symbol Mode A Operation (∗1) Mode B Operation (∗1)
Compressor M1C OFF OFF

Inverter cooling fan M1F, M2F OFF OFF
Four way valve (Main) Y5S Holding Holding
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S OFF OFF
Water heat exchanger oil return solenoid Y2S OFF OFF
valve
Receiver gas charging solenoid valve Y3S ON OFF
solenoid valve
To Mode B when no refrigerant To Mode A when refrigerant
Mode transition conditions shortage signal is sent from shortage signal is sent from
indoor unit indoor unit
Ending conditions Slave units are required to operate.
Note:
Master Slave
∗1 Mode A or B operation unit unit
 Mode A: Master unit collects refrigerant.


 Mode B: Slave unit storage refrigerant.
The changeover operation for mode A and B is performed for the reason that the required
refrigerant amount varies depending on the indoor unit operation capacity.
3.8.3 Abnormal Stop

In order to protect compressors, if any of the following items has an abnormal value, the system
will make "stop with thermostat OFF" and the error will be determined according to the number
of retry times.
Item Judgement Value Retry Number Error Code
Low pressure abnormality 0.07 MPa 3 times in 60 minutes E4
High pressure abnormality 4.0 MPa 2 times in 30 minutes E3
Discharge pipe temperature
abnormality 135°C 2 times in 10 minutes F3
Power supply abnormality Reverse phase No retry U1
17 A for 5 seconds
Inverter current abnormality (380 V power supply) 3 times in 60 minutes L8
Radiation fin temperature
abnormality
87°C 3 times in 60 minutes L4

Protection Control SiAU301015EC
4. Protection Control
4.1 High Pressure Protection Control
This high pressure protection control prevents the activation of protection devices due to
abnormal increase of high pressure and to protect compressors against the transient increase
of high pressure.
Pc: High pressure sensor detection value for each outside unit
[In cooling]
Normal operation
Pc > 2.95 MPa Pc < 2.74 MPa
Compressor upper limit 216 Hz

Pc > 3.5 MPa Inverter upper limit frequency = 216 Hz
Frequency control
Pc < 3.23 MPa
Compressor upper limit down 3 steps/10 seconds Inverter upper limit up 1 step/30 seconds
Pc > 3.5 MPa
Compressor 52 Hz
Pc ≥ 3.63 MPa
Less than 2 times When occurring 3 times within 30
within 30 minutes minutes, high pressure switch is activated
High pressure standby
without high pressure standby, and the
error code E3 is displayed.
[In heating or simultaneous cooling/heating]
Normal operation
Pc > 2.94 MPa Pc < 2.74 MPa
Upper limit 216 Hz
Pc > 3.36 MPa Pc < 2.99 MPa
Frequency control
Compressor down 7 steps/10 seconds
Pc > 3.5 MPa

Master unit: 52Hz
Slave unit: stop
Pc ≥ 3.63 MPa
When occurring 3 times within 30
minutes, high pressure switch is activated
High pressure standby without high pressure standby, and the
Less than 2 times within
error code E3 is displayed.
30 minutes

SiAU301015EC Protection Control
4.2 Low Pressure Protection Control

This low pressure protection control protects compressors against the transient decrease of low
pressure.
[In cooling]
Normal operation
Pe < 0.34 MPa Pe > 0.39 MPa
Compressor 52 Hz
Pe < 0.24 MPa

Pe > 0.34 MPa
Hot gas solenoid valve Hot gas solenoid valve
ON OFF
Pe < 0.24 MPa
Pe < 0.07 MPa
Low pressure standby When occurring 4 times within 60 minutes,

Less than 3 times the error code E4 is displayed.
within 60 minutes
Note: ∗1 This frequency control is carried out in whole system.
[In heating or simultaneous cooling/heating]

(When the outside heat exchanger is used as evaporator.)
Normal control
Pe < 0.63 MPa

Pe > 0.71 MPa
Pe > 0.68 MPa

Compressor upper limit down Compressor upper limit up
1 step/10 seconds 1 step/20 seconds
Pe < 0.63 MPa
Pe < 0.55 MPa
Compressor 52 Hz
Pe < 0.07 MPa
Low pressure standby When occurring 4 times within 60 minutes,

within 60 minutes
Note: ∗1 This frequency control is carried out in each outside unit.

Normal operation
Pe < 0.44 MPa Compressor upper limit

frequency = 216 Hz
Pe > 0.49 MPa

3 steps/10 seconds 1 step/20 seconds
Pe < 0.44 MPa
Pe < 0.34 MPa
Compressor 52 Hz
Pe < 0.07 MPa
When occurring 4 times within 60 minutes,

Low pressure standby
within 60 minutes
Note: ∗1 This frequency control is carried out in each outside unit.

4.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control

This discharge pipe protection control protects the compressor internal temperature against an
error or transient increase of discharge pipe temperature.
Discharge pipe protection control is carried out in each outside unit.
[Inverter compressor]
HTdi: Value of inverter compressor discharge pipe temperature compensated with outdoor air
temperature
Normal operation
HTdi > 115˚C HTdi < 100˚C
HTdi < 110˚C

HTdi > 115˚C
HTdi > 130˚C
OR HTdi > 120˚C
for 5 minutes
Compressor 62 Hz
OR HTdi > 135˚C

HTdi > 120˚C for 10 minutes or more
Discharge pipe When occurring 3 times within 100 minutes,

Less than 2 times within temperature control standby the error code F3 is displayed.
100 minutes

4.4 Inverter Protection Control

Inverter current protection control and radiation fin temperature control are performed to prevent
tripping due to an error, or transient inverter overcurrent, and radiation fin temperature increase.
This control is carried out in each outside unit.
[Inverter overcurrent protection control]
Not limited
Inverter Inverter current < 13.5 A

&
current > 13.5 A Inverter upper limit frequency = 230 Hz
Inverter current < 13.5 A

continues for 3 minutes
Inverter current > 13.5 A
Inverter current
> 17 A for 5 seconds (380 V unit)
When occurring 3 times within 60 minutes,

Inverter current standby
Less than 2 times the error code L8 is displayed.
within 60 minutes
[Radiation fin temperature control]

Tfin: Radiation fin temperature
Normal operation
Tfin > 50˚C Tfin < 30˚C
Cooling fan for electric

component box
Tfin < 81˚C
Tfin ≥ 84˚C & Compressor up limit frequency = 230 Hz
Tfin ≤ 81˚C
for continues 3 minutes
1 step/15 seconds 1 step/1 minute
Tfin ≥ 84˚C
Tfin > 98˚C
Fin temperature standby When occurring 3 times within 60 minutes,

Less than 2 times within 60 the error code L4 is displayed.
minutes.

4.5 Cooling Fan Control

This function is used for ON-OFF control of the cooling fan to cool the inverter. This cooling fan
operates only when the temperature of the inverter fan is high, in order to reduce the operating
time of the fan.
Tfin: Radiation fin temperature
[Details]
Control the cooling fan by each outside unit.
· 52C1: ON
& · Tfin > 50˚C
OR · Tfin is defective
Cooling fan OFF Cooling fan ON
· 52C1: OFF
OR · Tfin < 30˚C
& · Tfin is normal

Other Control SiAU301015EC
5. Other Control
5.1 Outside Unit Rotation
In the case of multi outside unit system, this outside unit rotation prevents the compressor from
burning out due to unbalanced oil level between outside units.
[Details of outside unit rotation]

In the case of multi outside unit system, each outside unit is given an operating priority for the
control.
Outside unit rotation makes it possible to change the operating priority of outside units.
Thus, the system becomes free of compressors that stop over an extended period of time at the
time of partial loading, preventing unbalanced oil level.
[Timing of outside unit rotation]

• After oil return operation
• At the beginning of the starting control
Example) The following diagram shows outside unit rotation in combination of 3 outside units.
Starting
control Oil return operation
Normal operation Normal operation
A
Master Slave 1 Slave 2 Master Slave 1 Slave 2
Outside unit Outside unit

rotation Priority Priority Priority rotation Priority Priority Priority
1 2 3 3 1 2
Oil return operation

Normal operation Normal operation
A
Master Slave 1 Slave 2
Outside unit
rotation Priority Priority Priority
2 3 1
Note: ∗ “Master unit”, “slave unit 1” and “slave unit 2” in this section are the names for installation.
They are determined in installation work, and not changed thereafter. (These names are
different from “master unit” and “slave unit” for control.)
The outside unit connected the control wires (F1 and F2) for the indoor unit should be
designated as master unit.
Consequently, The LED display on the main PCB for “master unit”, “slave unit 1” and “slave
unit 2” do not change.

SiAU301015EC Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
6. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)

6.1 Drain Pump Control
6.1.1 Normal Operation
ON
Float switch
OFF
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min.
The float switch is OFF in normal operation.

When cooling operation starts (thermostat ON), the drain pump turns ON simultaneously.
After the thermostat turns OFF, the drain pump continues to operate for another 5 minutes.
The aim of residual operation after thermostat OFF is to eliminate the dew that condenses
on the indoor heat exchanger during cooling operation.
6.1.2 If the Float Switch is ON with the Thermostat ON in Cooling

Operation
∗1 ∗2 ∗4
∗3
}
ON
Float switch
OFF
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
A3
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 sec. 5 min. 5 sec.

When the float switch turns ON, the thermostat turns OFF simultaneously.
After the thermostat turns OFF, the drain pump continues to operate for another 5 minutes.
∗1: If the float switch turns OFF again during the residual operation of the drain pump, cooling
operation also turns on again (thermostat ON).
∗2: If the float switch remains ON even after the residual operation of the drain pump has ended,
the error code A3 is displayed on the remote controller.
∗3: The drain pump turns OFF once residual operation has ended, then turns ON again after 5
seconds.
∗4: After A3 is displayed and the unit comes to an abnormal stop, the thermostat will remain
OFF even if the float switch turns OFF again.

Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) SiAU301015EC
6.1.3 If the Float Switch is ON with the Thermostat OFF in Cooling

Operation
ON
Float switch
OFF
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
A3
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 sec.
When the float switch turns ON, the drain pump turns ON simultaneously.
If the float switch remains ON even after the residual operation of the drain pump has ended,
the error code A3 is displayed on the remote controller.
The drain pump turns OFF once residual operation has ended, then turns ON again after 5
seconds.
6.1.4 If the Float Switch Turns ON and OFF Continuously, or the Float
Switch Turns ON While AF Displayed
∗1 ∗2 ∗3
} }
ON
Float switch
OFF
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
AF A3
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 sec.
When the float switch turns ON, the drain pump turns ON simultaneously.
∗1: If the float switch continues to turn ON and OFF 5 times consecutively, it is judged as a drain
system error and the error code AF is displayed on the remote controller.
∗2: The drain pump continues to turn ON/OFF in accordance with the float switch ON/OFF even
after AF is displayed on the remote controller.
∗3: While the error code AF is displayed, if the float switch remains ON even after the residual
operation of the drain pump has ended, the error code A3 will be displayed on the remote
controller.

6.2 Thermostat Control

6.2.1 Using Conditions for Room Temperature Thermistor
Temperature is controlled by both the room temperature thermistor in remote controller and
suction air thermistor in the indoor unit. (This is however limited to when the field setting for the
room temperature thermistor in remote controller is set to “Use.”)
Set temperature (˚C)
34
Cooling
32
30
28
Room temperature thermistor
Suction air thermistor Suction air thermistor

26
Suction air thermistor Suction air thermistor

24
22
20
Suction air
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 temperature (˚C)
Set temperature (˚C)

30
28
Heating
26
24
Suction air
Room temperature
Suction air thermistor thermistor
thermistor
22
Room temperature Suction air
Suction air thermistor thermistor thermistor
20
18
16
15 Suction air
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 temperature (˚C)

6.2.2 Thermostat Control in Normal Operation

VRV multi systems are set at factory to thermostat control mode using the room temperature
thermistor. While in normal thermostat differential control mode (i.e., factory setting mode), the
thermostat turns OFF when the system reaches a temperature of –1°C from the set temperature
while in cooling or of +1°C from that while in heating.
Tr: Temperature detected with the suction air thermistor
Tr < Set temperature –1ºC
Normal Thermostat OFF
Cooling: operation
Tr > Set temperature +1ºC

Normal Thermostat OFF
Heating: operation
While in a single remote controller group control, the suction air thermistor is only used for this
control.
Furthermore, while in heating, cassette-mounted indoor units conduct the thermostat control by
a value compensated by –2°C for the value detected with the suction air thermistor. (Through
field settings, the thermostat differential setting can be changed from 1°C to 0.5°C. For details
on the changing procedure, refer to page 113.)
6.2.3 Thermostat Control in Dry Operation

While in dry operation, the thermostat control is conducted according to a suction air
temperature at the time of starting the dry operation.
Tro: Suction air temperature at the time of starting the dry operation
Tr: Temperature detected with the suction air thermistor
Tr < Tro –1ºC
When Tro ≤ 24.5ºC: In dry operation Thermostat OFF
Tr < Tro –1.5ºC
When Tro > 24.5ºC: In dry operation Thermostat OFF
Furthermore, while in dry operation mode, fans operate at "L" tap, stops for a period of 6
minutes while the thermostat is OFF, and then return to operation at "L" tap. (This control
prevents a rise in indoor temperature while in thermostat OFF mode.)

6.2.4 Thermostat Control with Operation Mode Set to "AUTO"

When the operation mode is set to "AUTO" on the remote controller, the system will conduct the
temperature control shown below.
Furthermore, setting changes of the differential value (D°C) can be made according to
information in the "Field settings from remote controller (page 68 and later)" section.
Mode First Code Second Code No.
Contents of Setting
No. No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
12 4 Differential value while in "AUTO" 0°C 1°C 2°C 3°C 4°C 5°C 6°C 7°C
operation mode
: Factory setting
Set heating temperature Set cooling temperature

(A–D)°C A°C
D°C
Cooling thermostat ON
Cooling thermostat OFF
Display change
Cooling → Heating
Display change
Heating → Cooling
Heating thermostat OFF

Heating thermostat ON
3°C
(D
2 +2)°C
(Example) When automatic cooling temperature is set to 27°C:

Differential value :0°C Differential value set to 4°C
Set cooling/ Set heating temp. Set cooling temp.
heating temp.
23°C 27°C
27°C
25°C 30°C Cooling mode 26°C Cooling mode
Control temp. Control temp.
Heating mode Heating mode
Differential value set to 1°C Differential value set to 5°C

Set heating temp. Set cooling temp. Set heating temp. Set cooling temp.
26°C 27°C 22°C 27°C
24.5°C 29°C Cooling mode 22.5°C 25°C Cooling mode

25°C 27°C 21°C 27°C
24°C 28°C Cooling mode 22°C 24°C Cooling mode

24°C 27°C 20°C 27°C
23.5°C Cooling mode 21.5°C 23°C Cooling mode

6.3 Electronic Expansion Valve Control

In cooling, to maximize the capacity of indoor heat exchanger (evaporator), operate the
electronic expansion valve under PI control so that the evaporator outlet superheated degree
(SH) will become constant.
In heating, to maximize the capacity of indoor heat exchanger (condenser), operate the
electronic expansion valve under PI control so that the evaporator outlet superheated degree
(Condenser outlet subcooled degree) will become constant.
Cooling SH = TH1 - TH2 SH: Evaporator outlet superheated degree

(Heating SC = TC - TH1) TH1: Temperature detected by the liquid pipe thermistor
TH2: Temperature detected by the gas pipe thermistor
SC: Condenser outlet subcooled degree
TC: High pressure equivalent saturated temperature
Furthermore, the default value of the optimal evaporator outlet superheated degree (condenser
outlet subcooled degree) is 5 deg. However, this default value varies with the operating
performance.
6.4 Hot Start Control (In Heating Only)

At startup with thermostat ON, the indoor fan is controlled to prevent cold air from blasting out
and ensure startup capacity.
[Detail of operation]
TH2: Temperature detected with the gas pipe thermistor
Tc: High pressure equivalent saturated temperature
Hot start ending conditions

Oil return ending or thermostat ON
· lapse of 3 minutes
OR · TH2 > 34˚C
· Tc > 52˚C
Hot start control Hot start in progress
H/L remote Normal control

controller setting
Fan
LL
The fan is not OFF before initiating the hot start: LL
The fan is OFF before initiating the hot start: OFF
OFF
Remote controller Normal control

Louver
setting
Po (Horizontal)

6.5 Freeze-up Prevention

Freeze-up Prevention by OFF Cycle
When the temperature detected by liquid pipe thermistor of the indoor heat exchanger drops too
low, the unit enters freeze-up prevention control in accordance with the following conditions,
and is also set in accordance with the conditions given below.
Conditions for starting:

Liquid pipe temperature ≤ – 1°C (for total of 40 minutes)
or
Liquid pipe temperature ≤ – 5°C (for total of 10 minutes)
Condition for cancelling:

Liquid pipe temperature ≥ +7°C (for 10 minutes continuously)
Liquid pipe 10 minutes

temperature
+ 7˚C
+ 0˚C
– 5˚C
Normal operation
10 minutes Freeze prevention control
Start Cancel

6.6 List of Swing Flap Operations

Swing flaps operate as shown in the table below.
Flap
Fan FXCQ
FXFQ FXHQ FXAQ
FXKQ
Swing LL Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
Thermostat OFF
Wind direction set LL Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
Hot start from thermostat Swing LL Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal

Heating OFF mode (for prevention
of cold air) Wind direction set LL Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
Swing OFF Horizontal Horizontal Totally closed

Stop
Wind direction set OFF Horizontal Horizontal Totally closed
Thermostat ON in dry Swing L (∗1) Swing Swing Swing

operation using micro-
computer Wind direction set L (∗1) Set Set Set
Thermostat OFF in dry Swing Swing Swing Swing

operation using micro- OFF or L
computer Wind direction set Set Set Set
Swing Set Swing Swing Swing

Cooling Thermostat OFF in
cooling
Wind direction set Set Set Set Set
Swing OFF Horizontal Horizontal Totally closed

Stop
Wind direction set OFF Set Horizontal Totally closed
Micro-computer control Swing L Swing Swing Swing

(including cooling
operation) Wind direction set L Set Set Set
∗1. L and LL for FXFQ models only.

6.7 Louver Control for Preventing Ceiling Dirt

We have added a control feature that allows you to select the range of in which air direction can
be adjusted in order to prevent the ceiling surrounding the air discharge outlet of ceiling
mounted cassette type units from being soiled. (This feature is available on FXFQ, FXZQ,
FXCQ, FXKQ models.)
Existing position
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
Standard Setting Ceiling soiling prevention

Draft prevention position position position
P0 P0 P0
P1 P1
P0' P2
P2
P3 P1' P4 P0''
P4 P1''
P4 P2'
P2''
P3' P3''
P4' P4''
Draft
prevention P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 Same as existing position
position
Range of direction adjustment
Standard Separated into 5 positions

position
Prohibited P0' P1' P2' P3' P4' (P1 - 4)
Range of direction adjustment

Dirt
Separated into 5 positions
prevention Prohibited P0'' P1'' P2'' P3'' P4'' (P2 - 4)
position
Factory setting
FXFQ models: draft prevention position
FXZQ, FXCQ, FXKQ models: standard position

SiAU301015EC
Part 5
Field Settings
1. Test Operation ......................................................................................99
1.1 Checks before Test Operation ...............................................................99
1.2 Test Operation......................................................................................100
1.3 Check of Normal Operation..................................................................102
2. Field Setting from Remote Controller..................................................103
2.2 BRC1E62 .............................................................................................106
2.3 Wireless Remote Controller .................................................................108
2.4 Simplified Remote Controller................................................................109
2.5 Setting Contents and Code No. for Indoor Units ..................................110
3. Field Setting from Outside Unit PCB...................................................120
3.1 Location of DIP Switch and BS Button .................................................120
3.2 Setting by DIP Switches .......................................................................121
3.3 Setting by BS Buttons ..........................................................................123
3.4 Setting Mode 1 .....................................................................................124
3.5 Setting Mode 2 .....................................................................................125
3.6 Monitor Mode .......................................................................................128
3.7 Detailed Explanation of Setting Modes ................................................130
4. Emergency Operation .........................................................................147
4.1 Restrictions for Emergency Operation .................................................147
4.2 In the Case of Multi Outside Unit System.............................................147
98 Field Settings
SiAU301015EC Test Operation
1. Test Operation
1.1 Checks before Test Operation
z Before starting a test operation, please make sure that the piping work has been carried out
in a proper manner. Especially, make sure that the strainer, air discharge valve, automatic
water supply valve, expansion tank and cistern are positioned at their places correctly.
z After water has been completely filled in, first run the pump only, and then make sure that no
air has been caught in the water circulation system and the water flow rate is correct. If any
air has been caught or the flow rate is not enough, the plate type heat exchanger may
freeze. Measure any water pressure loss before and after the outside unit and make sure
that the flow rate is as designed. In case of any abnormal, stop the test operation
immediately and carry out troubleshooting to resolve the trouble.
z Following the installation manual, carry out a test operation of the outside unit.
z After the test operation has been completed, inspect the strainer at the inlet piping of the
outside unit. Clean it if it is dirty.
Field Settings 99
Test Operation SiAU301015EC
1.2 Test Operation

(For the operation to be done for the first time after installation, you need to perform a checking
operation according to this guideline without fail. Otherwise, Abnormal Code U3 appears and
normal operation cannot be carried out.)
(1) Check the connection of interlock circuit The outside unit cannot be operated if the
interlock circuit has not been connected.
(2) As necessary, configure the system settings Always perform configuration after turning ON the
onsite by using the dip switch (DS1) and BS power. To learn the setting method, refer to the
button switches (BS1 to 5) on the outside unit [Service Precautions] label attached at the el.
PCB (A1P). compo. box lid shown in the figure 1.
Remember, the actual settings you have made
After this, close the el. compo. box lid. must be recorded on the [Service Precautions]
label.
(3) Turn ON the power to the outside units and Make sure to turn ON the power 6 hours before
indoor units. starting the operation. This is necessary to warm
the crankcase by the electric heater.
(4) Start the heat source water pump and fill the The outside unit cannot be operated if the heat
heat source water in the outside unit. source water pump is not running.
(5) Make sure that the temperature of heat The outside unit cannot be operated at a
source water is kept within the operation temperature outside the operation range.
range (10 - 45°C).
(6) Check the LED on the PCB (A1P) in the outside unit to see if the data transmission is performed
normally.
Table 1
Micro-computer Mode Ready/ Cooler/heater changeover
LED display Error Low
operation Demand Multi
(Default status Individual Master Slave noise
monitor
before delivery)
HAP H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P
1 outside unit installed
When multiple Master unit
outside unit Slave unit 1
installed (∗) Slave unit 2
LED display: : OFF : ON : Blinking
(∗)The master unit is the outside unit to which the transmission wiring for the
indoor units is connected. The other outside units are slave units.
(7) • Using the BS button switches (BS1 - 5) on Always carry out the setting only after the power
the PCB (A1P) of outside unit, carry out a supply has been applied.
field setting, if necessary. For the method of setting, refer to the label of
• In case of an installation of multiple outside “Points to be noted when providing services”
units, carry out the setting on the master attached to the el. compo. box lid (shown in the
unit. figure 1) of the outside unit. (After setting, record
(Setting on the slave unit becomes invalid.) the details of that setting to the label of “Points to
be noted when providing services” without fail.)
(8) Check all stop valve is opened. CAUTION
If some stop valve is closed, open them. Do not leave any stop valve closed.
Otherwise the compressor will fail.
For Heat Recovery system of cooling and
heating:
Open all stop valves on the suction side,
discharge gas side and liquid side.
For cooling and heating switching operation
system:
Open the stop valves on discharge gas side and
liquid side. (Keep the stop valve on suction
side fully closed.)
(9) Perform the check operation following the If you press the test operation button (BS4) on
instructions printed on the [Service the PCB (A1P) of the outside unit.
Precautions] label. for 5 seconds, the test operation starts.
If you want to interrupt the test operation, press
the RETURN button (BS3) on PCB (A1P) of the
outside unit. The system continues residual
operation for about 1 minute (maximum 10
minutes) and then stops.
(During test operation, you cannot stop it by a
command from a remote controller.)
You need to perform the above settings on the
PCB by accessing the PCB through the
inspection cover on the switch box cover.
100 Field Settings

SiAU301015EC Test Operation
El. compo. box El. compo. box lid
Cover for servicing

Inspection cover
Points to be noted when providing services
figure 1
Cautions for check operation

z If operated within about 12 minutes after power supply has been applied to the indoor unit
and outside unit, H2P will turn ON but the compressor does not start running. Before start
operation, make sure that the LED display is correct referring to the table 1.
z The system may require up to 10 minutes until it can start the compressor after an operation
start. This is a normal operation to equalize the refrigerant distribution.
z The check operation does not provide any means of checking the indoor units individually.
For that purpose, perform normal operation using the remote controller after the check
operation.
z Check operation is not possible in other modes such as collection mode.
z If the setting of indoor remote controller is changed before the check operation, it may not be
performed correctly and error code UF may be displayed.
Remote controller displays error code
Error Code Installation Error Remedial Action
E3
E4
F3 The stop valve of an outside unit is left
F6 closed. Open the stop valve.
UF
U2
U1 The phases of the power to the outside Exchange 2 of the 3 phases (L1, L2, L3) to
units are reversed. make a positive phase connection.
U3 The check operation is not completed. Complete the check operation.
Check if the power wiring for the outside
U1 No power is supplied to an outside or units are connected correctly.
U2 indoor unit (including phase interruption). (If the power wire is not connected to L2
U4 phase, no error display will appear and the
compressor will not work.)
Check if the refrigerant piping line and the
UF Incorrect transmission between units unit transmission wiring are consistent with
each other.
E3 Recalculate the required amount of

F6 refrigerant from the piping length and
UF Refrigerant overcharge correct the refrigerant charge level by
U2 recovering any overcharged refrigerant
with a refrigerant recovery machine.
• Check if the additional refrigerant charge
has been finished correctly.
E4 Insufficient refrigerant • Recalculate the required amount of
F3 refrigerant from the piping length and
add an adequate amount of refrigerant.
U7 If an outside multi terminal is connected Remove the line from the outside multi
UF when there is 1 outside unit installed terminals (Q1 and Q2).
The operation mode on the remote
UF controller was changed before the check Set the operation mode on all indoor unit
E4 operation. remote controllers to “cooling.”
HJ The heat source water is not circulating. Make sure that the water pump is running.
E3 is activated, so ON/OFF button is
pressed on the remote controller, but this Measure the insulation resistance of the
E2, E3 does not turn E3 OFF. Or E2 is activated. compressor to check the condition of the
In case of above, there is an error of the compressor.
compressor in the outside unit.
If any error codes other than the above are displayed, check the service manual for how to
respond.
Field Settings 101

Test Operation SiAU301015EC
1.3 Check of Normal Operation

After the check operation is completed, operate the unit normally.
(Heating is not possible if the outdoor air temperature is 24°C or higher. Refer to the Operation
manual.)
Check the below items.
z Make sure the indoor and outside units are operating normally (If a knocking sound can be
heard in the liquid compression of the compressor, stop the unit immediately and then
energize the heater for a sufficient length of time before restarting the operation.)
z Run each indoor unit 1 at a time and make sure the corresponding outside unit is also
running.
z Check if cold (or hot) air is coming out of the indoor unit.
z Press the fan direction and fan strength buttons on the indoor unit to check if they operate
properly.
Caution Cautions for normal operation check

z Once stopping, the compressor will not restart in about 5 minutes even if the ON/OFF button
of an indoor unit in the same system is pressed.
z When the system operation is stopped by the remote controller, the outside units may
continue operating for further 5 minutes at maximum.
z If the system has not undergone any check operation by the test operation button since it
was first installed, an error code U3 is displayed. In this case, perform check operation
referring to “1.2 Test Operation”.
z After the test operation, when handing the unit over to the customer, make sure the el.
compo. box lid, the inspection door, and the unit casing are all attached.
102 Field Settings

SiAU301015EC Field Setting from Remote Controller
2. Field Setting from Remote Controller

Individual function of indoor unit can be changed from the remote controller. At the time of
installation or after service inspection/repair, make the field setting in accordance with the
following description.
Wrong setting may cause error.
(When optional accessory is mounted on the indoor unit, setting for the indoor unit may be
required to change. Refer to information in the option handbook.)
2.1 Wired Remote Controller

2.1.1 BRC1C62, BRC1D61
Unit No. Mode No.

Second Field
Code No. Setting
First Mode
Code No. 3 4
1 7
6 5 2
1. When in the normal mode, press the button for 4 seconds or more, and the Field Setting
TEST
Mode is entered.
2. Select the desired Mode No. with the button ().
3. During group control, when setting by each indoor unit (mode No. 20, 22 and 23 have been
selected), press the button () and select the Indoor Unit No. to be set. (This
operation is unnecessary when setting by group.)
4. Press the upper button () and select First Code No.
5. Press the lower button () and select the Second Code No.
6. Press the button () once and the present settings are set.
7. Press the TEST button () to return to the Normal Mode.
Field Settings 103

Field Setting from Remote Controller SiAU301015EC
2.1.2 BRC1E61
Basic screen
(1) 1 Press Cancel button for 4 seconds or

more.
2 Select Field setting list in the field

setting menu, and press Menu/Enter
button.
Field setting list screen is displayed.
3 Highlight the mode, and select desired

“Mode No.” by using (Up/Down)
button.
Field setting menu screen 4 In the case of setting per indoor unit
(2) during group control (When Mode No.
such as 20 , 21 , 22 , 23 , 25 are
selected), highlight the unit No. and
select “Indoor unit No.” to be set by
using (Up/Down) button. (In the
case of group total setting, this
operation is not needed.)
In the case of individual setting per
indoor unit, current settings are
displayed. And, Second Code No.
“ - ” means no function.
5 Highlight Second Code No. of the First
Code No. to be changed, and select
Field setting screen
desired “Second Code No.” by using
In the case of individual In the case of group total (Up/Down) button. Multiple identical
setting per indoor unit setting mode number settings are available.
(3) (3) In the case of group total setting, all
(4) (5) of Second Code No. which may be
set are displayed as “ ∗ ”.
(5) “ ∗ ” is changed to Second Code
No. to be set. And, Second Code
No. “ - ” means no function.
Second Code No.
First Code No.
104 Field Settings

6 Press Menu/Enter button. Setting

Setting confirmation screen confirmation screen is displayed.
(6)
(7) 7 Select Yes and press Menu/Enter
button. Setting details are determined
and field setting list screen returns.
8 In the case of multiple setting

changes, repeat “(3)” to “(7)”.
9 After all setting changes are

completed, press Cancel button twice.

10 Backlight goes out, and “Connection
under check Please wait for a
moment” is displayed for initialization.
After the initialization, the basic screen
Setting confirmation
returns.
CAUTION
z When an optional accessory is installed on the indoor unit, settings of the indoor
unit may be changed. See the manual of the optional accessory.
z For field setting details of the outside unit, see installation manual attached to the
outside unit.
Field Settings 105

2.2 BRC1E62
<Basic screen>
(1) 1 Press and hold the Cancel button for 4

seconds or more.
2 Select Field setting in the field setting

menu, and press the Menu/Enter
button.
Field setting list screen is displayed.
3 Highlight the mode, and select desired

“Mode No.” by using (Up/Down)
button.
<Field setting menu screen>
4 In the case of setting per indoor unit
(2) during group control (When Mode No.
such as 20 , 21 , 22 , 23 , 25 are
selected), highlight the unit No. and
select “Indoor unit No.” to be set by
using (Up/Down) button. (In the
case of group total setting, this
operation is not needed.)
In the case of individual setting per
indoor unit, current settings are
displayed. And, SECOND CODE
NO. “ - ” means no function.
5 Highlight SECOND CODE NO. of the
<Field setting screen>
FIRST CODE NO. to be changed, and
select desired “SECOND CODE NO.”
In the case of individual In the case of group total by using (Up/Down) button.
setting per indoor unit setting
Multiple identical mode number
(3) (3) settings are available.
(4) (5) In the case of group total setting, all
(5) of SECOND CODE NO. which may
be set are displayed as “ ∗ ”.
“ ∗ ” is changed to SECOND CODE
NO. to be set. And, SECOND
CODE NO. “ - ” means no function.
SECOND CODE NO.
FIRST CODE (SW) NO.
106 Field Settings

6 Press the Menu/Enter button. Setting

<Setting confirmation screen> confirmation screen is displayed.
(6)
(7) 7 Select Yes and press Menu/Enter
button. Setting details are determined
and field setting list screen returns.
8 In the case of multiple setting

changes, repeat “(3)” to “(7)”.
9 After all setting changes are

completed, press Cancel button twice.

10 Backlight goes out, and “Connection
under check Please wait for a
moment” is displayed for initialization.
After the initialization, the basic screen
Setting confirmation
returns.
CAUTION
z When an optional accessory is installed on the indoor unit, settings of the indoor
unit may be changed. See the manual of the optional accessory.
z For field setting details of the outdoor unit, see installation manual attached to the
outdoor unit.
Field Settings 107

UP button
Mode No.
Field setting mode DOWN button
RESERVE button
First code No.
MODE button
Second code No.
INSPECTION/TEST
button
To set the field settings, you have to change:

Mode No.
First code No.
Second code No.
Step Action
1 Press the INSPECTION/TEST button for 4 seconds during normal mode to enter the field
setting mode.
2 Press the MODE button to select the desired mode No.
3 Press the UP button to select the first code No.
4 Press the DOWN button to select the second code No.
5 Press the RESERVE button to confirm the setting.
6 Press the INSPECTION/TEST button to return to the normal mode.
108 Field Settings

2.4 Simplified Remote Controller

BRC2C51
Mode No.
First code
No.
Unit No.
Second
code No.
(3)
(3)
(2)(8) (7) (4) (5) (6)
1. Remove the upper part of remote controller.

2. When in the normal mode, press the BS6 button (2) (field setting) to enter the field setting
mode is entered.
3. Select the desired Mode No. with the BS2 button (3) (temperature setting ) and the BS3
button (3) (temperature setting ).
4. During group control, when setting by each indoor unit (mode No. 20, 22, and 23 have been
selected), press the BS8 (4) button (unit No.) and select the indoor unit No. to be set. (This
operation is unnecessary when setting by group.)
5. Press the BS9 button (5) (set A) and select first code No.
6. Press the BS10 button (6) (set B) and select second code No.
7. Press the BS7 button (7) (set/cancel) once and the present settings are confirmed.
8. Press the BS6 button (8) (field setting) to return to the normal mode.
9. (Example) If during group setting and the time to clean air filter is set to FILTER
CONTAMINATION - HEAVY, SET MODE NO. to “10”, FIRST CODE NO. to “0”, and
SECOND CODE NO. to “02”.
Field Settings 109

2.5 Setting Contents and Code No. for Indoor Units

: Factory setting
Mode First Second Code No.
No. Code Setting Contents
(∗ 2) No. 01 02 03 04
Approx. Approx.
Ultra long 10,000 5,000
life filter
hrs. hrs.
Approx. Approx.
0 Filter cleaning sign interval Long life Light 2,500 Heavy 1,250 — —
filter hrs. hrs.
Standard Approx. Approx.
10 filter 200 hrs. 100 hrs.
(20)
1 Filter type Long life filter Ultra long life filter — —
Room temperature Room
thermistor in remote
2 Selection of thermistor controller and indoor Indoor unit suction
air thermistor
temperature
thermistor in —
unit suction air remote controller
thermistor
3 Filter cleaning sign Display No display — —
11 Completion of Start of airflow
(21) 7 Airflow adjustment OFF airflow adjustment adjustment —
Optional accessories output selection (field Indoor unit turned
0 selection of output for adaptor for wiring) ON by thermostat — Operation output Error output
1 Forced ON/OFF function Forced OFF ON/OFF operation External protection —

device input
2 Thermostat differential changeover 1°C 0.5°C — —
(Set when remote sensor is to be used.)
12 3 OFF by thermostat fan speed LL Set fan speed — —
(22)
Automatic mode differential (automatic
4 temperature differential setting for VRV Refer to page 113.
system Heat Recovery series cool/heat)
5 Auto restart after power failure reset Not equipped Equipped — —
6 Airflow when cooling thermostat is OFF LL airflow Preset airflow — —
Setting of Normal Airflow
0 (Set when installed in place with ceiling N H S —
higher than 2.7 m.)
1 Airflow direction setting (Set when a blocking F (4 directions) T (3 directions) W (2 directions) —
pad kit has been installed.)
13 3 Airflow (Set at installation of decoration panel.) Equipped Not equipped — —
(23)
Ceiling soiling
4 Airflow direction adjustment range Draft prevention Standard prevention —
5 Setting of the static pressure selection Standard High static — —

pressure
6 External static pressure Refer to page 116.
1 Thermostat OFF excess humidity Not equipped Equipped — —
Direct duct connection
15 2 (when the indoor unit and heat reclaim ventilation Not equipped Equipped — —
(25) unit are connected by duct directly.) ∗5
3 Drain pump humidifier interlock selection Not equipped Equipped — —
5 Individual setting of ventilation Not equipped Equipped — —
Note: 1. Settings are made simultaneously for the entire group, however, if you select the mode No.
inside parentheses, you can also set by each individual unit. Setting changes however
cannot be checked except in the individual mode for those in parentheses.
∗2. The mode numbers inside parentheses cannot be used by wireless remote controllers, so
they cannot be set individually. Setting changes also cannot be checked.
3. Do not make settings other than those described above. Nothing is displayed for functions
the indoor unit is not equipped with.
4. 88 may be displayed to indicate the remote controller is resetting when returning to the
normal mode.
∗5. If the setting mode to “Equipped”, heat reclaim ventilator fan conducts the fan residual
operation by linking to indoor unit.
110 Field Settings

2.5.1 Detailed Explanation of Field Setting

Filter Cleaning Sign Interval
If switching the filter sign ON time, set as given in the table below.
Mode No. First Code Second Standard Long Life Ultra Long Setting
No. Code No. Filter Filter Life Filter
Contamination
01 200 hrs. 2,500 hrs. 10,000 hrs. Light
10 (20) 0
02 100 hrs. 1,250 hrs. 5,000 hrs. Contamination
Heavy
Filter Type
When a Ultra long life filter is installed, the filter sign timer setting must be changed.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Setting
01 Long Life Filter
10 (20) 1
02 Ultra Long Life Filter
Selection of Thermistor
Select the thermistor to control room temperature.
Remote controller thermistor and suction
01 air thermistor for indoor unit
10 (20) 2
02 Suction air thermistor in indoor unit
03 Remote controller thermistor
Filter Cleaning Sign

Whether or not to display "Filter Cleaning" after operation of certain duration can be selected.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. "Filter Cleaning" display
01 Display
10 (20) 3
02 No display
Field Settings 111

Airflow Adjustment
Make settings in either method (a) or method (b) as explained below. (FXMQ140PVE cannot be
selected method (a). Please select method (b).)
(a) Use the airflow auto adjustment function to make settings.
Airflow auto adjustment: The volume of blow-off air is automatically adjusted to the rated
quantity.
(1) Check that power supply wiring to the air conditioner is completed along with duct
installation. If a closing damper is installed in the air conditioning system, make sure that
the closing damper is opened. Furthermore, check that the air filter as a field supply is
attached to the air passage on the suction side.
(2) If there are a number of air outlets and inlets, adjust the throttles so that the airflow rate of
each air outlet and inlet will coincide with the designed airflow rate. At that time, operate
the air conditioner in “fan operation mode”. To change the airflow rate, press and set the
airflow adjustment button of the remote controller to HH, H, or L.
(3) Make settings for airflow automatic adjustment. After setting the air conditioner to “fan
operation mode”, stop the air conditioner, go to “field setting mode”, select “mode No. 21”
(11 in the case of group settings), set the setting “first code No.” to 7, and set the setting
“second code No.” to 03.
Return to normal mode after these settings, and press the ON/OFF operation button.
Then the operation lamp will be lit and the air conditioner will go into fan operation for
airflow automatic adjustment. Do not adjust the throttles of the air outlets or inlets during
automatic adjustment of the air conditioner. After the air conditioner runs approximately
1~8 minutes, the air conditioner will finish airflow adjustment automatically, the operation
lamp will be turned OFF, and the air conditioner will come to a stop.
(4) After the air conditioner stops operating, check with “mode No. 21” on an indoor unit
basis that 02 is set for the “second code No.” in the table below. If the air conditioner
does not stop operating automatically or the “second code No.” is not 02, repeat steps
from (3). If the outside unit is not turned ON, U4 or UH will be displayed. This display is
not problematic, because this function is set for the indoor unit. Continue setting the
function.
After setting this function, be sure to turn ON the outside unit before the test operation of
the outside unit.
CAUTION
z If there is any change after airflow adjustment in the ventilation paths (e.g., the duct and air
outlet), be sure to make airflow auto adjustment again.
z Consult your Daikin representative if there is any change in the ventilation paths (e.g., the
duct and air outlet) after the test operation of the outside unit is finished or the air
conditioner is moved to another place.
(b) Select external static pressure with remote controller check that 01 (OFF) is set for the
“second code No.” in “mode No. 21” for airflow adjustment on an indoor unit basis in the
table below. The “second code No.” is set to 01 (OFF) at factory setting. Change the “second
code No.” as shown in external static pressure settings on page 116 according to the
external static pressure of the duct to be connected.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Airflow Adjustment
01 OFF
11 (21) 7 02 Completion of airflow adjustment
03 Start of airflow adjustment
112 Field Settings

Optional Output Switching

Using this setting, "operation output signal" and "abnormal output signal" can be provided.
Output signal is output between terminals X1 and X2 of "Adaptor of wiring," an optional
accessory.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Remarks
Indoor unit thermostat ON/OFF signal is
01 provided.
12 (22) 0 03 Output linked with "ON/OFF" of remote
controller is provided.
In case of "Error Display" appears on the
04 remote controller, output is provided.
External ON/OFF Input

This input is used for "ON/OFF operation" and "Protection device input" from the outside. The
input is performed from the T1-T2 terminal of the operation terminal block in the el. compo. box.
F2 T1 T2
Forced OFF
Input A
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Operation by Input of The Signal A
Input ON: Forced OFF (prohibition of
01 using the remote controller)
Input OFF: Permission of using the
remote controller
12 (22) 1 Input OFF → ON: Operation
02 Input ON → OFF: OFF
Input ON: Operation
03 Input OFF: The system stops, then the
applicable unit indicates A0.
Thermostat Switching
Differential value during thermostat ON/OFF control can be changed. (For details, refer to "6.2.2
Thermostat Control in Normal Operation" on page 92.)
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Differential Value
01 1ºC
12(22) 2
02 0.5ºC
Airflow Setting when Heating Thermostat is OFF

This setting is used to set airflow when heating thermostat is OFF.
∗ When using thermostat OFF airflow rate up mode, careful consideration is required before
deciding installation location.
During heating operation, this setting takes precedence over "Fan stop when thermostat is
OFF".
01 LL airflow
12 (22) 3
02 Preset airflow
Setting of Operation Mode to "AUTO"

This setting changes differential values for mode selection while in automatic operation mode.
Second Code No.
Mode No. First Code No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
12 (22) 4 0°C 1°C 2°C 3°C 4°C 5°C 6°C 7°C
The automatic operation mode setting is made by the use of the "Operation Mode Selector"
button.
Field Settings 113

Auto Restart after Power Failure Reset

For the air conditioners with no setting for the function, the units will be left in the stop condition
when the power supply is reset automatically after power failure reset or the main power supply
is turned ON again after once turned OFF. However, for the air conditioners with the setting
(same as factory setting), the units may start automatically after power failure reset or the main
power supply turned ON again (return to the same operation condition as that of before power
failure).
For the above reasons, when the unit is set enabling to utilize “Auto restart function after power
failure reset”, utmost care should be paid for the occurrence of the following situation.
Caution 1. The air conditioner starts operation suddenly after power failure reset or
the main power supply turned ON again. Consequently, the user might be
surprised (with question for the reason why).
2. In the service work, for example, turning OFF the main power switch while
the unit is in operation, and turning ON the switch again after the work is
completed start the unit operation (the fan rotates).
Airflow when Cooling Thermostat is OFF

This is used to set airflow to "LL airflow" when cooling thermostat is OFF.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code Setting
No.
01 LL airflow
12 (22) 6
02 Preset airflow
Setting of Normal Airflow

Make the following setting according to the ceiling height. The Second Code No. is set to “01” at
the factory.
FXAQ
Second Code
Mode No. First Code No. No. Setting
01 Standard
13(23) 0 02 Slight increase
03 Normal increase
FXHQ
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code Ceiling Height

No.
01 ≤ 2.7 m
13(23) 0
02 2.7 - 3.5 m
FXFQ25~80 (All Round Outlet)

Second Code
Mode No. First Code No. No. Setting Ceiling Height
01 Standard/All round outlet ≤ 2.7 m
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling 2.7 - 3 m
03 Higher Ceiling 3 - 3.5 m
FXFQ100~125 (All Round Outlet)
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code Setting Ceiling Height
No.
01 Standard/All round outlet ≤ 3.2 m
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling 3.2 - 3.6 m
03 Higher Ceiling 3.6 - 4.2 m
114 Field Settings

In the Case of FXFQ25~80 (∗24-Way, 3-Way, 2-Way Outlets)
Mode First Second Ceiling Height

No. Code Code Setting
No. No. 4-way Outlets 3-way Outlets 2-way Outlets
01 Standard (N) Lower than 3.1 m Lower than 3.0 m Lower than 3.5 m
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling (H) Lower than 3.4 m Lower than 3.3 m Lower than 3.8 m
03 Higher Ceiling (S) Lower than 4.0 m Lower than 3.5 m —
In the Case of FXFQ100~125 (∗24-Way, 3-Way, 2-Way Outlets)

01 Standard (N) Lower than 3.4 m Lower than 3.6 m Lower than 4.2 m
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling (H) Lower than 3.9 m Lower than 4.0 m Lower than 4.2 m
03 Higher Ceiling (S) Lower than 4.5 m Lower than 4.2 m —
∗1 “Mode No.” setting is done in a batch for the group. To make or confirm settings for an
individual unit, set the internal mode number in parentheses.
∗2 The figure of the ceiling height is for the all round outlet. For the settings for 4-direction (part
of corner closed off), 3-direction and 2-direction outlets, see the installation manual and
technical guide supplied with the separately sold sealing material kit.
FXUQ71AVEB

01 Standard ≤ 2.7 m ≤ 3.0 m ≤ 3.5 m
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling ≤ 3.0 m ≤ 3.5 m ≤ 3.8 m
03 Higher Ceiling ≤ 3.5 m ≤ 3.8 m —
FXUQ100AVEB
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Ceiling Height
01 ≤ 3.2 m
13 (23) 0 02 ≤ 3.6 m
03 ≤ 4.0 m
Airflow Direction Setting

Set the airflow direction of indoor units as given in the table below. (Set when sealing material
kit of air discharge outlet has been installed.) The second code No. is factory set to “01.”
01 F: 4-direction airflow
13 (23) 1 02 T: 3-direction airflow
03 W: 2-direction airflow
Operation of Downward Flow Flap: Yes/No (Only for FXKQ)

When using only the front-flow, sets yes/no of the swing flap operation of down-flow.
01 Down-flow operation: Yes
13 (23) 3
02 Down-flow operation: No
Airflow Direction Adjustment Range

Make the following airflow direction setting according to the respective purpose.

01 Upward (Draft prevention)
13 (23) 4 02 Standard
03 Downward (Ceiling soiling prevention)
∗ Some indoor unit models are not equipped with draft prevention (upward) function.
Field Settings 115

Setting of the Static Pressure Selection

FXDQ
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. External Static Pressure
01 Standard (10 Pa)
13 (23) 5
02 High static pressure (30 Pa)
External Static Pressure Settings

FXMQ
01 30 Pa (∗1)(∗4)
02 50 Pa (∗5)
03 60 Pa
04 70 Pa
05 80 Pa
06 90 Pa
07 100 Pa (∗5)
13 (23) 6 08 110 Pa (∗3)
09 120 Pa (∗3)
10 130 Pa (∗3)
11 140 Pa (∗3)
12 150 Pa (∗3) (∗4)
13 160 Pa (∗3) (∗4)
14 180 Pa (∗2) (∗3) (∗4)
15 200 Pa (∗2) (∗3) (∗4)
∗1 FXMQ50/63/80/100/125PVE cannot be set to 30 Pa.
∗2 FXMQ40PVE cannot be set to 180 or 200 Pa.
∗3 FXMQ20/25/32PVE cannot be set to 110-200 Pa.
∗4 FXMQ140PVE cannot be set to 30 Pa and 150-200 Pa.
∗5 FXMQ20/25/32PVE: Second Code No. is set to 02 in factory settings.
FXMQ40/50/63/80/100/125/140PVE: Second Code No. is set to 07 in factory settings.
FXSQ
03 30 Pa (∗1)
04 40 Pa (∗1)
05 50 Pa
06 60 Pa
07 70 Pa
08 80 Pa
13 (23) 6 09 90 Pa
10 100 Pa
11 110 Pa
12 120 Pa
13 130 Pa
14 140 Pa
15 150 Pa (∗2)
∗1 FXSQ50/63/80/100/125PVE cannot be set to 30 Pa or 40 Pa.
∗2 FXSQ140PVE cannot be set to 150 Pa.
116 Field Settings

Humidification when Heating Thermostat is OFF

Setting to "Humidification Setting" turns ON the humidifier if suction air temperature is 20ºC or
above and turns OFF the humidifier if suction air temperature is 18ºC or below when the heating
thermostat is OFF.
01 —
15 (25) 1
02 Setting of humidifier
Setting of Direct Duct Connection

This is used when "fresh air intake kit equipped with fan" is connected. The indoor fan carries
out residual operation for 1 minute after the thermostat is stopped. (For the purpose of
preventing dust on the air filter from falling off.)
01 Without direct duct connection
15 (25) 2 With direct duct connection equipped with
02 fan
Interlocked Operation between Humidifier and Drain Pump

This is used to interlock the humidifier with the drain pump. When water is drained out of the
unit, this setting is unnecessary.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Contents
01 Individual operation of humidifier
15 (25) 3 Interlocked operation between humidifier
02
and drain pump
Individual Setting of Ventilation

This is set to perform individual operation of heat reclaim ventilator using the remote controller/
central unit when heat reclaim ventilator is built in.
(Switch only when heat reclaim ventilator is built in.)
01 Normal
15 (25) 5
02 Individual operation of ventilation
Field Settings 117

2.5.2 Setting of Operation Control Mode from Remote Controller

(Field Setting)
The operation control mode is compatible with a variety of controls and operations by limiting
the functions of the operation remote controller. Furthermore, operations such as remote
controller ON/OFF can be limited in accordance with the combination conditions. (Refer to
information in the table on next page.)
Centralized controller is normally available for operations. (Except when centralized monitor is
connected)
2.5.3 Contents of Control Modes

20 modes consisting of combinations of the following 5 operation modes with temperature and
operation mode setting by remote controller can be set and displayed by operation modes 0
through 19.
z ON/OFF control impossible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by centralized remote controller only.
(Cannot be turned ON/OFF by remote controller.)
z OFF control only possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON by centralized remote controller only, and OFF by remote
controller only.
z Centralized
Used when you want to turn ON by centralized remote controller only, and turn ON/OFF
freely by remote controller during set time.
z Individual
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by both centralized remote controller and remote
controller.
z Timer operation possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by remote controller during set time and you do not
want to start operation by centralized remote controller when time of system start is
programmed.
118 Field Settings

Selection of Select whether to accept or to reject the operation from the remote controller regarding the operation,
Control Mode No. stop, temperature setting and operation mode setting, respectively, and determine the particular
control mode from the rightmost column of the table below.
(Example)
Operation by remote Operation by remote Stop by Temperature Operation

controller (at time of controller (at time of remote control by mode setting
unified operation by unified operation by controller remote by remote
centralized control) centralized control) controller controller
The control
mode is “ 1 ”.
[Rejection] [Rejection] [Rejection] [Acceptance] [Acceptance]
Control by Remote Controller

Operation
Operation Unified operation, Unified stop, individual Control
Mode individual operation by Stop Temperature Operation Mode
stop by centralized control mode setting
centralized remote remote controller, or
controller, or operation timer stop
controlled by timer
Acceptance 0
Rejection
ON/OFF control Rejection 10
Rejection
impossible by Acceptance
remote controller (Example) Acceptance 1 (Example)
(Example)
Rejection (Example)
Rejection 11
(Example)
Acceptance 2
Only OFF control Rejection Rejection
Rejection 12
possible by remote (Example)
controller Acceptance 3
Acceptance
Rejection 13
Acceptance 4
Rejection
Rejection 14
Centralized
Acceptance 5
Acceptance
Rejection 15
Acceptance Acceptance
Acceptance 6
Rejection
Rejection 16
Individual Acceptance
Acceptance 7
Acceptance
Rejection 17
Acceptance 8
Timer operation Acceptance Rejection Rejection
Rejection 18
possible by remote (During timer at (During timer at OFF
controller ON position only) position only) Acceptance 9
Acceptance
Rejection 19
BRC1C62, BRC1D61 BRC1E61, BRC1E62

Local remote controllers cannot set
temperature or operation mode when
the system is under centralized control
and CENTRAL CONTROL is displayed
on the screen.
Field Settings 119

Field Setting from Outside Unit PCB SiAU301015EC
3. Field Setting from Outside Unit PCB

3.1 Location of DIP Switch and BS Button
Outside Unit PCB
(1) Micro-computer normal monitor

HAP
(2) Set mode display (LED)
(3) BS button H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P
BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5
MODE SET RETURN TEST RESET
1
2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS3
DS1 DS2
(4) DIP switch
Connection terminal for transmission use
A B C F1 F2 F1 F2 Q1 Q2
Indoor − Outside − Multi
C/H selector Outside unit Outside unit outside unit
(1) Micro-computer normal monitor

This monitor blinks while in normal operation, and turns ON or OFF when an error occurs.
(2) Set mode display (LED)

LEDs display mode according to the setting.
(3) BS button
Used to change mode.
(4) DIP switch

Used to make field settings.
120 Field Settings

SiAU301015EC Field Setting from Outside Unit PCB
3.2 Setting by DIP Switches

The following field settings are made by DIP switches on PCB.
Dip Switch
Setting Item Description
No. Setting
ON
DS1-1 OFF Cool/Heat select Used to set cool/heat select by remote controller
equipped with outside unit.
(Factory setting)
ON
DS1-2 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
~DS1-4 OFF
(Factory setting)
ON
DS2-1 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
~4 OFF
(Factory setting)
ON
DS3-1, Not used Do not change the factory settings.
2 OFF
(Factory setting)
Caution DIP switch setting after changing the main PCB (A1P) to spare PCB
When you change the main PCB (A1P) to spare PCB, please carry out the following setting.
Initial Condition
ON ON
OFF OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2
DS No. Item Contents

DS1-1 — —
Power supply ON 200 V

DS1-2 setting
OFF 400 V
DS1-3 — —
DS1-4 — —
ON Except Japan
DS2-1 Japan/Except
Japan setting OFF Japan
DS2-2 8 10
DS2-2 ON OFF
DS2-3 HP setting
DS2-3 OFF ON
DS2-4 DS2-4 OFF OFF
Refer to “Detail of DS1-1~4, DS2-1~4 setting” on next page.
Field Settings 121

Detail of DS1-1~4, DS2-1~4 setting
Model Setting Method ( represents the position of switches)
ON
RWEYQ8PY1(9)(3) Set DS2-1 and DS2-2 to ON.
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ON
RWEYQ10PY1(9)(3) Set DS2-1 and DS2-3 to ON.
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Model Setting Method ( represents the position of switches)
BSVQ100PV1(3) ON
BSV4Q100PV1 Set DS1-3 to ON.
BSV6Q100PV1 OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ON
BSVQ160PV1(3) Set DS1-4 to ON.
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ON
BSVQ250PV1(3) Set DS1-3 and DS1-4 to ON.
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
122 Field Settings

3.3 Setting by BS Buttons

The following settings are made by BS buttons on PCB.
In case of multi outside unit system, various items should be set with the master unit.
(Setting with the sub unit is disabled.)
The master unit and slave unit can be discriminated with the LED indication as shown below.
Factory Setting k: ON h: OFF l: BLINK
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P
Master unit h h k h h h h k
Slave unit 1 h h h h h h h l
Slave unit 2 h h h h h h h h
BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5
MODE SET RETURN TEST RESET
(1) Setting mode 1 (H1P off)

Initial status (normal) : Also indicates during abnormal.
(2) Setting mode 2 (H1P on)
Used to modify the operating status and to set program addresses, etc. Usually used in
servicing the system.
(3) Monitor mode (H1P blinks)
Used to check the program made in setting mode 2.
Setting mode 1
Press the BS1 (MODE button) for more (Initial condition) Press the BS1 (MODE button).
than 5 seconds. H1P
OFF
MODE
H1P H1P
Setting mode 2 ON Monitor mode Blinking
MODE MODE
Select a setting item with Select a check item with

the BS2 (SET button). the BS2 (SET button).
Press the BS3 (RETURN button). Press the BS3 (RETURN button).
Select a setting condition

with the BS2 (SET button). Contents display
Press the BS3 (RETURN button). Press the BS3 (RETURN button).
Setting condition
(Contents) display
Press the BS3 (RETURN button).
Press the BS1 (MODE button). Press the BS1 (MODE button).
Field Settings 123

3.4 Setting Mode 1

Normally, “Setting mode 1” is set. In
case of other status, press MODE
button (BS1) once and set to
“setting mode 1”.
Selection of setting items Table 1 k: ON h: OFF l: BLINK

LED Display Example
Press the SET button (BS2) and set No. Setting (displayed) Item
LED display to a setting item you H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
want. Display for error/preparation/
1 h h k h h h h
test operation ∗
2 C/H selector (individual) h h k h h h h
3 C/H selector (master) h h h k h h h
4 C/H selector (slave) h h h h k h h
z Regarding setting item No. 1, 5 5 Demand operation ∗ h h k h h h h
only the present status is
displayed. For the respective ∗ Setting No. 1, 5, 6 are the present status display only.
description, refer to table 1.
z The cool/heat selection setting can Display for error/preparation/test operation
be changed on setting item 2, 3, 4.
→ After setting, press the RETURN Normal h h k h h h h
button (BS3) and decide the
item.
Error h k k h h h h
Preparation/Test operation h l k h h h h
Display during demand operation

Normal h h k h h h h
During demand operation h h k h h h k
When the RETURN button (BS3) is
pressed, the status becomes the H3P to H5P LED display changes
initial status of “setting mode 1”. depending on setting No. 2, 3, 4.
124 Field Settings

3.5 Setting Mode 2

Press and hold the MODE button No. Setting Item Description
(BS1) for 5 seconds and set to
“setting mode 2”. 1 Cool/heat unified Sets address for cool/heat unified operation.
address
2 demand address Sets address for demand operation
4 Number of units for Sets the number of units for sequential starting.
sequential starting
Indoor unit forced Allows forced operation of indoor fan while unit is
Selection of setting items 5 fan H stopped. (H tap)
Press the SET button (BS2) and set 6 Indoor unit forced Allows forced operation of indoor unit.
the LED display to a setting item operation
shown in the table on the right. 8 Te setting Target evaporating temperature for cooling
↓
Press the RETURN button (BS3) 9 Tc setting Target condensing temperature for heating
and decide the item. (The present 12 Demand setting Reception of demand signal
setting condition is blinked.)
13 AIRNET address Sets address for AIRNET.
Additional
20 refrigerant charge Carries out additional refrigerant charge operation.
operation setting
Refrigerant
21 collection mode Sets to refrigerant collection mode.
setting
Interlock error
26 display setting Sets interlock error display
Selection of setting conditions
Power transistor Used for service diagnosis of DC compressor. Since the
Press the SET button (BS2) and set check mode waveform of inverter is output without wiring to the
to the setting condition you want. 28 ∗Check after compressor, it is convenient to probe whether the trouble
↓ disconnection of
Press the RETURN button (BS3) comes from the compressor or PCB.
compressor wires
and decide the condition.
Changes target value of power consumption when
30 Demand setting 1 demand control 1 is input.
Normal demand Normally enables demand control 1 without external

32 setting input. (Effective to prevent a problem that circuit breaker
of small capacity is shut down due to large load.)
Emergency
operation
(Setting for the
38 main unit operation
Press the RETURN button (BS3) prohibition in multi
and set to the initial status of “setting outside unit system)
mode 2”.
Emergency
operation Used to temporarily prohibit the applicable outside unit
(Setting for the from operating should there be any defective part in multi
Note: 39 slave unit 1 outside unit system. Since the comfortable environment
operation is extremely impaired, prompt replacement of the part is
∗ If you become unsure of how to proceed, prohibition in multi
press the MODE button (BS1) and return required.
outside unit system)
to setting mode 1.
Emergency
operation
(Setting for the
40 slave unit 2
operation
prohibition in multi
outside unit system)
Field Settings 125

k: ON h: OFF l: BLINK
Setting Item Setting Condition
No. C/H Selection Low LED Display
Setting Item MODE TEST Noise Demand Contents
H1P H2P IND
H3P
Master Slave
H4P H5P H6P
H7P
∗ Factory setting
Address 0 khhhhhh ∗
1
Cool / Heat
k h h h h h k
Binary number 1 khhhhhk
Unified address (6 digits) ~
31 khkkkkk
2 Demand address k h h h h k h
(6 digits) ~
31 khkkkkk
1 unit khhhhhk
4
Number of units for
sequential starting k h h h k h h 2 units khhhhkh
3 units khhhhkk
5 Indoor forced fan H k h h h k h k
Normal operation khhhhhk ∗
Indoor forced fan H khhhhkh
6
Indoor forced
k h h h k k h
Normal operation khhhhhk ∗
operation Indoor forced operation khhhhkh
Low (“L” tap) khhhhhk
Normal (“M” tap) khhhhkh ∗
High (1) khhhhkk
8 Te setting k h h k h h h High (2) khhhkhh
High (3) (“H” tap) khhhkhk
High (4) khhhkkh
High (5) khhhkkk
Low khhhhhk
9 Tc setting k h h k h h k Normal (factory setting) khhhhkh ∗
High khhhkhh
12 Demand setting k h h k k h h
Demand: NO khhhhhk ∗
Demand: YES khhhhkh
13 AIRNET address k h h k k h k
(6 digits) ~
63 khkkkkk
Additional refrigerant
20 operation setting k h k h k h h
Refrigerant charging: OFF khhhhhk ∗
Refrigerant charging: ON khhhhkh
21 Refrigerant recovery k h k h k h k
Refrigerant recovery: OFF khhhhhk ∗
mode setting Refrigerant recovery: ON khhhhkh
26 Interlock
error
k h k k h k h
OFF khhhhhk ∗
display setting ON khhhhkh
28 Power
transistor
k h k k k h h
OFF khhhhhk ∗
check mode ON khhhhkh
60 % demand khhhhhk
30 Demand setting 1 k h k k k k h 70 % demand khhhhkh ∗
80 % demand khhhkhh
32 Continuous
demand
k k h h h h h
OFF khhhhhk ∗
setting ON khhhhkh
Emergency
operation OFF khhhhhk ∗
(Master unit with
38 multi outside unit k k h h k k h
system is inhibited to
operate.)
Master unit operation: Inhibited khhhhkh
126 Field Settings

Setting Item Setting Condition
No. C/H Selection Low LED Display
MODE TEST Demand
Setting Item Noise Contents
H1P H2P IND
H3P
Master
H4P
Slave
H5P H6P
H7P
∗ Factory setting
khhhhhk ∗
Emergency
operation OFF
39
(Sub unit 1 with multi
outside unit system k k h h k k k
is inhibited to
operate.)
Slave unit 1 operation:
Inhibited khhhhkh
khhhhhk ∗
Emergency
operation OFF
40
(Sub unit 2 with multi
outside unit system k k h k h h h
is inhibited to
operate.)
Slave unit 2 operation:
Inhibited khhhhkh
Field Settings 127

3.6 Monitor Mode

To enter the monitor mode, press LED Display
the MODE button (BS1) when in No. Setting Item Data Display
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
“Setting mode 1”.
0 Various setting l h h h h h h (∗2)
1 C/H unified address l h h h h h k

2 Demand address l h h h h k h
4 AIRNET address l h h h k h h
Selection of setting item
5 Number of connected indoor units l h h h k h k Lower 6 digits
(∗3)
Press the SET button (BS2) and set 6 Number of connected BS units l h h h k k h
the LED display to a setting item.
7
Number of connected zone units
(excluding outside and BS unit) l h h h k k k
8 Number of outside units l h h k h h h
9 Number of connected BS units l h h k h h k Lower 4 digits:
upper (∗4)
10 Number of connected BS units l h h k h k h Lower 4 digits:

lower (∗4)
Confirmation on setting contents 11
Number of zone units (excluding
outside and BS unit) l h h k h k k Lower 6 digits
(∗3)
Press the RETURN button (BS3) to
display different data of set items.
12 Number of terminal blocks l h h k k h h Lower 4 digits:
upper (∗4)
13 Number of terminal blocks l h h k k h k Lower 4 digits:

lower (∗4)
14 Contents of error (the latest) l h h k k k h Error code table
15 Contents of error (1 cycle before) l h h k k k k Refer to

page 161.
16 Contents of error (2 cycle before) l h k h h h h
20 Contents of retry (the latest) l h k h k h h
21 Contents of retry (1 cycle before) l h k h k h k
Press the RETURN button (BS3)
and switches to the initial status of 22 Contents of retry (2 cycle before) l h k h k k h
“monitor mode”.
Note:
∗1. The numbers in the "No." column represent the number of times to press the
∗ Press the MODE button (BS1) and
returns to “setting mode 1”. SET (BS2) button.
∗2. Display contents of “Various setting”
LED Display
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
Operation/backup operation ON l h h k h h h
setting
OFF l h h h h h h
Te setting L l h h h h h h
M l h h h h l h
H (1)~(5) l h h h h k h
Tc setting L l h h h h h h
M l h h h h h l
H l h h h h h k
128 Field Settings

∗3. Data such as addresses and number of units is expressed as binary numbers.
The No. 1 cool/heat unified address is expressed as a binary number consisting of the
lower 6 digits. (0 - 63)
(Example 1)
In (Example 1) the address is 010110 (binary number), which
translates to 16 + 4 + 2 = 22 (base 10 number). In other words, the
16 4 1
32 8 2 address is 22.
∗4. The number of connected BS units for No.9 and 10 / the number of terminal blocks for No.
12 and 13 is expressed as an 8-digit binary number, which is the combination of 4 upper,
and 4 lower digits respectively. (0 - 128)
(Example 2)
In (Example 2) the address for No. 12 is 0101, the address for No.
13 is 0110, and the combination of the 2 is 01010110 (binary
64 16 number), which translates to 64 + 16 + 4 + 2 = 86 (base 10
No.12 128 32
number). In other words, the number of terminal block is 86.
4 1
No.13 8 2
Field Settings 129

3.7 Detailed Explanation of Setting Modes

3.7.1 Cool/Heat Mode Switching (Heat Pump Connection)
There are the following 5 cool/heat switching modes.
(1) Set cool/heat separately for each outside unit system by indoor unit remote controller.
(2) Set cool/heat separately for each outside unit system by cool/heat selector.
(3) Set cool/heat for more than single outside unit system simultaneously in accordance with
unified master outside unit by indoor unit remote controller.
(4) Set cool/heat for more than single outside unit system simultaneously in accordance with
unified master outside unit by cool/heat switching remote controller.
(5) Set cool/heat at all outside unit systems simultaneously for each outside unit external control
adaptor by using the centralized remote controller.
(1) Set Cool / Heat Separately for Each Outside Unit System by Indoor Unit Remote Controller
z It does not matter whether or not there is outside - outside unit wiring.
z Set outside unit PCB DS1-1 to IN (factory setting).
z Set cool/heat switching to IND (individual) for “Setting mode 1” (factory setting).
TEST C/H SELECT

MODE L.N.O.P. DEMAND
MALFNC.
IND MASTER SLAVE
OUT O C/H SELECT

DIP SW.
DS1-1
IN I
C/H SELECTOR I-O O-O OUT-MULTI
Indoor unit Indoor unit
Remote Remote
controller controller
130 Field Settings

(2) Set Cool/Heat Separately for Each Outside Unit System by Cool / Heat Selector
z It does not matter whether or not there is outside - outside unit wiring.
z Set outside unit PCB DS1-1 to OUT (factory setting).
z Set cool/heat switching to IND (individual) for “Setting mode 1” (factory setting).
TEST C/H SELECT

MODE MALFNC. L.N.O.P. DEMAND
IND MASTER SLAVE
OUT O C/H SELECT
DIP SW.
DS1-1 IN I
C/H SELECT R.C. I-O O-O OUT-MULTI
Cool/Heat Indoor unit Indoor unit

selector
Remote Remote
controller controller
Field Settings 131

(3) Set Cool / Heat for more than Single Outside Unit System Simultaneously in Accordance with Unified
Master Outside Unit by Indoor Unit Remote Controller
z Install the external control adaptor for outside unit on either the outside-outside, indoor-
outside transmission line.
z Set outside unit PCB DS1-1 to IN (factory setting).
z In setting mode 1, set the outside unit you want to give cool/heat selection permission to as
the group master, and set the other outside units as group slave units.
z Set the outside unit external control adaptor SS1 to BOTH (factory setting) or C/H, and SS2
to OFF (factory setting).
z When multiple external control adaptors are used and cool/heat is selected for each external
control adaptor, use "setting mode 2" and set DS1 and DS2 on the external control adaptors
and the unified heat/cool address on the outside unit main PCB to the same address No.
(For details, refer to page 134.)
External control adaptor for outside unit
DEMAND
DEMAND
L.N.O.P.
MODE
L.N.O.P.
MODE
C/H SELECT C/H SELECT
TEST
TEST
CENTRAL IND SLAVE

C/H IND MASTER SLAVE MASTER
SELECTOR
OFF ON
C/H SELECT OUT O C/H SELECT

OUT O
BOTH C/H DE
FUNCTION X24A
DS1-1
IN I IN I
C/H SELECTOR I-O O-O OUT-MULTI C/H SELECTOR I-O O-O OUT-MULTI
CENTRAL TERMINAL
C/H NO. ADDRESS
To indoor unit To indoor unit

Master unit Slave unit
DEMAND
DEMAND
L.N.O.P.
C/H SELECT
MODE
MODE
L.N.O.P.
C/H SELECT
Multi
Multi
TEST
TEST
IND MASTER SLAVE IND MASTER SLAVE

OUT O
IN I IN I
To indoor unit
Multi outside units connection
132 Field Settings

(4) Set Cool/Heat for more than Single Outside Unit System Simultaneously in Accordance with Unified
Master Outside Unit by Cool / Heat Selector
z Install the external control adaptor for outside unit on either the outside-outside, indoor-
outside transmission line.
z Mount the COOL/HEAT selector to the master outside unit for the unified control.
Set the DS1-1 on the PCB of master outside unit to OUT.
z In setting mode 1, set the outside unit you want to give cool/heat selection permission to as
the group master, and set the other outside units as group slave units.
z When multiple external control adaptors are used and cool/heat is selected for each external
control adaptor, use "setting mode 2" and set DS1 and DS2 on the external control adaptors
and the unified heat/cool address on the outside unit main PCB to the same address No.
(For details, refer to page 134.)
External control adaptor for outside unit
DEMAND
DEMAND
L.N.O.P.
MODE
L.N.O.P.
MODE
C/H SELECT C/H SELECT
TEST
TEST
CENTRAL IND SLAVE

C/H IND MASTER SLAVE MASTER
SELECTOR
OFF ON

OUT O
BOTH C/H DE
FUNCTION X24A
DS1-1
IN I IN I
CENTRAL TERMINAL
C/H NO. ADDRESS
Cool/Heat
selector To indoor unit To indoor unit
Master unit Slave unit

DEMAND
DEMAND
L.N.O.P.
C/H SELECT
L.N.O.P.
MODE
MODE
C/H SELECT
Multi
Multi
TEST
TEST
IND MASTER SLAVE IND MASTER SLAVE

OUT O
IN I IN I
To indoor unit
Multi outside units connection
Field Settings 133

Supplementation on (3) and (4).

When switching cool/heat for each adaptor PCB with the use of more than 1 adaptor PCB, set
the address of the external control adaptor for outside unit PCB DS1 and DS2 so that it matches
the unified cool/heat address of outside unit main PCB.
DS2/DS1 C/H group address DS2/DS1 C/H group address
External Outside Outside Outside External Outside Outside

control unit group unit group unit group control unit group unit group
adaptor No.0 master No.0 slave No.0 slave No.0 adaptor No.1 master No.1 slave No.1
DS2/DS1 C/H group address DS2/DS1 C/H group address
External Outside Outside Outside External Outside Outside

control unit group unit group unit group control unit group unit group
adaptor No.2 master No.2 slave No.2 slave No.2 adaptor No.3 master No.3 slave No.3
Address setting for (3) and (4) (Set lower 5 digits with binary number.) [No.0 to No.31]
Address Outside unit PCB LED External control adaptor for outside unit
No. Set with setting mode 2 DS2 DS1
No 0 kh hhhhh
0 0
No 1 kh hhhhk
1 1
No 2 kh hhhkh
2 2
No 3 kh hhhkk
3 3
No 4 kh hhkhh
4 4
~
No 30 kh kkkkh
30 30
No 31 kh kkkkk
31 31
k ON h OFF Upper position (ON) lower position (OFF)

(The shaded part shows knob)
134 Field Settings

(5) Set cool/heat at all outside unit systems simultaneously for each outside unit external control adaptor
by using the centralized remote controller.
z Install the outside unit external control adaptor (optional accessory) onto the outside-outside,
indoor-outside, or indoor-indoor transmission line.
z Use "setting mode 1" and set all outside units to SLAVE.
z Set the outside unit external control adaptor SS1 to BOTH (factory setting) or C/H and set SS2 to ON.
z Use "setting mode 2" and set DS1 and DS2 on the outside unit external control adaptors and
the unified heat/cool address on the outside unit main PCB to the same address. (The
factory setting addresses are all "0".)
No. 0 C/H group address No. 0

(Central) (Terminal)
External control adaptor
L.N.O.P.
DEMAND
L.N.O.P.
DEMAND
MODE
L.N.O.P.
DEMAND
MODE
C/H SELECT
TEST
C/H SELECT
TEST
MODE
C/H SELECT
TEST
for outside unit CENTRAL IND IND MASTER SLAVE IND MASTER SLAVE
C/H
MASTER SLAVE
SELECTOR
OFF ON
C/H SELECT OUT O C/H SELECT OUT O C/H SELECT

OUT O
BOTH C/H DE DIP switch DIP switch
FUNCTION X24A DS1-1 DS1-1
IN I IN I IN I
C/H SELECTOR I-O O-O OUT-MULTI C/H SELECTOR I-O O-O OUT-MULTI C/H SELECTOR I-O O-O OUT-MULTI
CENTRAL TERMINAL
C/H ADDRESS
NO.
To indoor unit To indoor unit To indoor unit

L.N.O.P.
DEMAND
DEMAND
MODE
L.N.O.P.
C/H SELECT
MODE
TEST
C/H SELECT
TEST
for outside unit CENTRAL MASTER SLAVE IND MASTER SLAVE

C/H IND
SELECTOR
OFF ON

OUT O
DIP switch
BOTH C/H DE DS1-1
Central C/H remote FUNCTION
X24A
controller
IN I IN I
No. 0 C/H CENTRAL

NO.
TERMINAL
ADDRESS


L.N.O.P.
DEMAND
DEMAND
L.N.O.P.
MODE
C/H SELECT
MODE
TEST
C/H SELECT
TEST
for outside unit CENTRAL MASTER IND MASTER SLAVE

C/H IND SLAVE
SELECTOR
OFF ON

OUT O
DIP switch
BOTH C/H DE
FUNCTION X24A DS1-1
IN I IN I
CENTRAL TERMINAL
C/H NO. ADDRESS
Field Settings 135

Setting of Address
In binary, set the address number (middle 2 digits) and terminal No. (last 3 digits) of the external
control adaptor (DIP switches) and outside unit main PCB (LED lamps).
Address Terminal External control adaptor for outside unit Outside unit main PCB LED
No. No. DS2 DS1 Set with setting mode 2
Central Terminal
No. 0 No. 0 kh hh hhh
0 0 0 0
No. 0 No. 1 kh hh hhk
0 1 0 1
No. 0 No. 2 kh hh hkh
0 2 0 2
No. 0 No. 3 kh hh hkk
0 3 0 3
~
~
No. 1 No. 4 kh hk khh

1 4 1 4
~
~
No. 2 No. 5 kh kh khk
2 5 2 5
~
~
No. 3 No. 6 kh kk kkh
3 6 3 6
No. 3 No. 7 kh kk kkk
3 7 3 7
as same
as same
k ON h OFF
Upper Lower
(ON) (OFF)
(part shows knob)
136 Field Settings

3.7.2 Cool/Heat Mode Switching (Heating and Simultaneous Cooling/

Heating Operation Connection)
Set Cool/Heat Separately for Each BS Unit by Cool/Heat Selector.
(1) Before turning ON the power of the BS unit, set the DIP switch (DS1-1) on the BS unit PCB
as following.
(2) Then, connect the COOL/HEAT selector to the terminal A, B and C of the terminal block
X2M on the BS unit PCB.
1 2
ON X2M
A B C
OFF
DS1
COOL/HEAT selector
Note: • This setting is read into the micro-computer when turning ON the power supply.
• Be sure to make the setting before turning ON the power supply.
• Be sure to close the El. compo. box lid after setting.
Example of transmission line connection

• Example of connecting transmission wiring.
Connect the transmission wirings as shown in the Fig. 1.
In case of the indoor unit connect as the cool only unit, it wire
the terminal F1 F2 of the last BS unit.
OUT/D.BS
F1 F2 F1 F2
IN/D OUT/D.BS
F1 F2 F1 F2
Final BS unit
1st unit Final unit
To the indoor unit where
the selection of heating Cooling Only
and cooling is available.
Cool/heat selector remote

Outside unit Branch wiring
control wiring
Use 2-core wires.
TO IN/D UNIT TO OUT/D UNIT
(There is no polarity.) Use 3-core wires.
F1 F2 F1 F2
(Keep in mind the polarity.)
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
A A A
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
F1 F2 F1 F2 B F1 F2 F1 F2 B F1 F2 F1 F2 B
IN/D OUT/D.BS C IN/D OUT/D.BS C IN/D OUT/D.BS C
BS unit A BS unit B Final BS unit F1 F2
F1 F2 F1 F2 COOL/HEAT F1 F2 COOL/HEAT F1 F2 COOL/HEAT F1 F2

selector selector selector
Fig. 1 Indoor unit for cooling
Field Settings 137

3.7.3 Setting of Demand Operation

Setting of Demand Operation
By connecting the external contact input to the demand input of the external control adaptor for
outside unit (optional), the power consumption of unit operation can be saved suppressing the
compressor operating condition.
Setting content Setting method
Set item Condition Content External control Outside unit PCB

adaptor
The compressor operates at Set item No. 32 to "Demand 1", and item No.
Mode 1 approx. 60% or less of rating. 30 to "Level 1".
Short circuit "1" and
Demand 1 Mode 2 The compressor operates at "C" on the terminal Set item No. 32 to "Demand 1", and item No.
approx. 70% or less of rating. strip (TeS1). 30 to "Level 2".
The compressor operates at Set item No. 32 to "Demand 1", and item No.
Mode 3 approx. 80% or less of rating. 30 to "Level 3".
Demand 2  The compressor operates at Short circuit "2" and "C". Set item No. 32 to "Demand 2".
approx. 40% or less of rating.
Demand 3  Forced thermostat OFF. Short circuit "3" and "C". 
*: However the demand operation does not occur in the following operation modes.
(1) Startup control, (2) Oil return operation, (3) Pump down residual operation
If carrying out demand input, connect the adaptor’s terminals as shown below.
F1 X
F2 X
P3 X
P4 X
External control Demand Low

adaptor for 1 2 3 C noise
outside unit X X X X X X
Host computer Outside wiring indicated

monitor panel by dotted line
or demand
controller
A. When the demand operation is carried out by external contact (with the use of the
external control adaptor for outside unit).
1. Connect external control adaptor for outside unit and short-circuit terminals as required
(Refer above figure).
2. While in "Setting mode 2", set the setting condition for set item No. 12 (Setting of demand
operation) to "YES".
3. If necessary, while in "Setting mode 2", select the set item No. 30 (Setting of Demand 1
level) and then set the setting condition to targeted mode.
B. When the normal demand operation is carried out. (Use of the external control
adaptor for outside unit is not required.)
1. While in "Setting mode 2", make setting of the set item No. 32 (Setting of alternate demand)
to "ON".
2. While in "Setting mode 2", select the set item No. 30 (Setting of Demand 1 level) and then
set the setting condition to targeted mode.
138 Field Settings

Image of operation in the case of A

Power consumption
Rated power consumption The power

consumption during
80 % of rated power consumption Demand level 1 instructing Demand level 2 instructing Demand level 3 instructing the demand level 1
70 % of rated power consumption instructing can be
60 % of rated power consumption set with the
Power consumption set by "Demand 1 level
40 % of rated power consumption "Demand 1 level setting". setting".
("70 % of rated
power consumption"
Forced thermostat OFF has been set at
(Fan operation) factory.)
Image of operation in the case of B
Power consumption When the "Normal

demand setting" is set
to ON ("OFF" has been
Rated power consumption set at factory.) , the
power consumption can
80 % of rated power consumption be set with the
70 % of rated power consumption "Demand 1 level
60 % of rated power consumption setting". ("70 % of rated
The power consumption set with "Demand 1 level setting". power consumption"
has been set at
factory.)
Image of operation in the case of A and B

Power consumption The power
consumption can
be set with the
"Demand 1 level
Rated power consumption setting". ("70 % of
rated power
80 % of rated power consumption consumption" has
70 % of rated power consumption been set at
60 % of rated power consumption factory.)
The power consumption set with "Demand 1 level setting".
40 % of rated power consumption Demand level 2 instructing Demand level 3 instructing
During continuous demand operation,
when the external demand instruction is
Forced thermostat OFF received repeatedly, the instruction with
(Fan operation) higher demand level has the precedence.
Field Settings 139

Detailed Setting Procedure and Demand Control
1. Setting mode 1 (H1P OFF)

(1) In setting mode 2, press the BS1 (MODE button) once. → Setting mode 1 is entered and H1P
lights OFF.
While the setting mode 1 is displayed, “In demand control” is displayed.
2. Setting mode 2 (H1P ON)

(1) In setting 1, press the BS1 (MODE button) for 5 seconds or more. → Setting mode 2 is
entered and H1P ON.
(2) Press the BS2 (SET button) several times and match the LED display with the setting No.
you want.
(3) Press the BS3 (RETURN button) once, and the present setting content is displayed.
→ Press the BS2 (SET button) several times and match the LED display with the setting
content (as shown below) you want.
(4) Press the BS3 (RETURN button) twice. → Returns to (1).
(5) Press the BS1 (MODE button) once. → Returns to the setting mode 1 and turns H1P OFF.
(1) (2) (3) k: ON h: OFF l: BLINK

Setting Setting Setting No. indication Setting No. indication Setting Setting contents indication (Initial setting)
No. Contents contents
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
12 Demand NO
setting { z z z z z z { z z { { z z (Factory { z z z z z l
setting)
YES { z z z z l z
30 Demand 60 % of
setting 1 { z { { { { z rated power { z z z z z l
consumption
70 % of
rated power
consumption { z z z z l z
(Factory
setting)
80 % of
rated power { z z z l z z
consumption
32 Normal OFF
demand { z z z z z z (Factory { z z z z z l
setting setting)
Continuous
demand 1 { z z z z l z
fixed
Setting mode indication section Setting No. indication section Set contents indication section
140 Field Settings

3.7.4 Setting of Refrigerant Additional Charging Operation

When additional refrigerant is not charged all with outside unit in stop mode, operate the outside
unit and charge the liquid refrigerant from the service port of liquid stop valve. The additional
charging operation is activated by BS button switch on the outside unit PCB.
Additional refrigerant charge total flow
Confirm discharge, suction and

liquid stop valves closed.
STEP 1
Additional
charge Turn off the power.
without
compressor
operation Charge through service port of
liquid stop valve.
YES
Is all refrigerant charged?
NO
Open discharge gas, liquid,
suction gas stop valve.
Open discharge & suction gas stop valve.

Liquid side stop valve:
STEP 2
1. Fully open the liquid side stop valve.
2. After 10 minutes, fully close liquid line stop
Additional valve and then, open the valve by turning
180º. Disconnect charge hose.
charge with (∗)
compressor
operation
Start additional refrigerant charge mode. End of charge method.

(Setting Mode 2 : Refer to operation procedure
detail on next page.)
YES
Is all refrigerant charged? Open liquid stop valve.
NO
Stop refrigerant charge.
Note: ∗ The stop valve operations are different from Heat Pump and Heat Recovery connection, refer
to page 143 for detail.
Field Settings 141

Caution Refrigerant cannot be charged until field wiring has been completed.
Refrigerant may only be charged after performing the leak test and the vacuum drying.
When charging a system, care shall be taken that its maximum permissible charge is never
exceeded, in view of the danger of liquid hammer.
Charging with an unsuitable substance may cause explosions and accidents, so always ensure
that the appropriate refrigerant (R-410A) is charged.
Refrigerant containers shall be opened slowly.
Always use protective gloves and protect your eyes when charging refrigerant.
This outside unit is factory charged with refrigerant and depending on pipe sizes and pipe
lengths some systems require additional charging of refrigerant.
Determine the amount of refrigerant to be added by referring to the table, write it down on
the included “Added Refrigerant” plate and attach it to the rear side of the front cover.
Note: refer to the example of connection for the amount to be added.
Additional refrigerant charge procedure (1)-normally
Charge the refrigerant to the liquid pipe in its liquid state. Since R-410A is a mixed
refrigerant, its composition changes if charged in a state of gas and normal system operation
would no longer be assured.
Make sure to use installation tools you exclusively use on R-410A installations to withstand
the pressure and to prevent foreign materials from mixing into the system.
1. Before charging, check whether the tank has a siphon attached or not.
How to charge with a siphon attached tank.
Charge with the tank upright.
There is a siphon tube
inside, so there is no need
to turn the tank upside-down.
How to charge with other tank.
Charge with the tank upside-down.
2. After the vacuum drying is finished, charge the additional refrigerant in its liquid state
through the liquid stop valve service port.
Taking into account following instructions:
Check that gas and liquid stop valves are closed.
Stop the compressor and charge the specified weight of refrigerant.
(If the outside unit is not in operation and the total amount cannot be charged, follow the
Additional refrigerant charge procedure (2) shown next page.)
142 Field Settings

Procedures for charging additional refrigerant.
[Heat Pump system]

Close
Close Gas side
Pressure Outside unit Liquid Outside unit
reducing valve side
Charge hose
R-410A
Valve A
Refrigerant
Nitrogen
tank
With
a siphon
Stop valve service port

To indoor unit
Measuring instrument
Vacuum pump Dotted lines represent
onsite piping
[Heat Recovery system] Suction

gas side
Close Discharge
Close gas side
Outside unit Liquid Outside unit
Pressure
reducing valve side
Charge hose
R-410A
Valve A
Refrigerant
tank
Nitrogen
With
a siphon
Valve B
Stop valve service port
To indoor
units / BS units
Measuring instrument
Vacuum pump Dotted lines represent
onsite piping
Additional refrigerant charge procedure (2)-by Additional refrigerant charge operation

About the system settings for additional refrigerant charge operation, refer to the [Service
Precaution] label attached on the el. compo. box lid in the outside unit.
1. Fully open all stop valves (valve A and valve B must be left fully closed).
2. After 10 minutes, fully close liquid line stop valve and then, open the valve by turning 180°.
Start the additional refrigerant charge operation.
See [Service precautions] label for detail.
If it is difficult to charge the refrigerant additionally, decrease the water temperature or warm
the refrigerant tank.
(Warm the refrigerant tank with a stupe or a warm hot water of 40 degrees or less.)
3. After the system is charged with a specified amount of refrigerant, press the RETURN button
(BS3) on the PCB (A1P) in the outside unit to stop the additional refrigerant charge
operation.
4. Immediately open both liquid-side and gas-side stop valve.
(If do not open the stop valve immediately, liquid seal may cause the pipe to burst.)
Stop valve operation procedure

Caution Do not open the stop valve until checking of device and installation conditions are completed. If
the stop valve is left open without turning on power, it may cause refrigerant to buildup in the
compressor, leading to insulation degradation.
Opening stop valve

1. Remove the cap and turn the valve counterclockwise with the hexagon wrench (JISB4648).
2. Turn it until the shaft stops.
Do not apply excessive force to the stop valve. Doing so may break the valve body, as the
valve is not a backseat type. Always use the hexagon wrench.
3. Make sure to tighten the cap securely.
Field Settings 143

Closing stop valve

1. Remove the cap and turn the valve clockwise with the hexagon wrench (JISB4648).
2. Securely tighten the valve until the shaft contacts the main body seal.
3. Make sure to tighten the cap securely.
∗ For the tightening torque, refer to the table below.
Tightening torque
Tightening torque N-m (Turn clockwise to close)
Stop valve Gas side
size Cap
Shaft (valve body) (valve lid) Service port Flare nut accessory
pipe (1)
Liquid side 5.4-6.6 Hexagonal 13.5-16.5 11.5-13.9 32.7-39.9 —

wrench 4 mm
Hexagonal
Gas side 27-33 wrench 10 mm 36-44 11.5-13.9 — 22-28
(Refer to figure below)
Shaft
Hexagon hole
Cap
The main
body seal
Service port
Caution Do not damage the cap sealing.

Always use a charge hose for service port connection.
After tightening the cap, check that no refrigerant leaks are present.
After working, securely tighten the cover of service port without fail by specified torque.
When loosening a flare nut, always use 2 wrenches in combination. When connecting the
piping, always use a spanner and torque wrench in combination to tighten the flare nut.
When connecting a flare nut, coat the flare (inner and outer faces) with ether oil or ester oil
and hand-tighten the nut 3 to 4 turns as the initial tightening.
Do not forget to open the stop valve before starting operation.
[Heat pump system] [Heat recovery system]
Remove the cap and turn Never remove Remove the cap and turn
the valve counter clockwise the partition flange the valve counter clockwise
with the hexagon wrenches for any reason. with the hexagon wrenches
until it stops. until it stops.
Discharge Discharge
gas side Liquid side gas side Liquid side
Full close on
the suction gas Suction
gas side Suction
side gas side
[Operation state]
• Compressor frequency : Normal cooling PI control, upper limit 177 Hz
• Y5S, Y7S, four way valve: OFF Y1E, electronic expansion valve: Normal cooling control
• Indoor unit electronic expansion valve (All unit): 1024 pulse Y3E: 0 pulse
• Indoor fan: H tap
144 Field Settings

3.7.5 Setting of Refrigerant Recovery Mode

When carrying out the refrigerant collection on site, fully open the respective electronic
expansion valve of indoor and outside units
[Operation procedure]
(1) In setting mode 2 with units in stop mode, set “B Refrigerant Recovery/Vacuuming mode”
to ON. The respective electronic expansion valve of indoor and outside units are fully
opened. (H2P turns to display “TEST OPERATION” (blinks), “TEST OPERATION” and “IN
CENTRALIZED CONTROL” are displayed on the remote controller, and the operation is
prohibited.
(2) Collect the refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery unit. (See the instruction attached to the
refrigerant recovery unit for more detail.)
(3) Press Mode button “BS1” once and reset “Setting Mode 2”.
3.7.6 Setting of Vacuuming Mode

In order to perform vacuuming operation at site, fully open the electronic expansion valves of
indoor and outside units to turn on some solenoid valves.
[Operating procedure]
(1) With Setting Mode 2 while the unit stops, set (B) Refrigerant recovery/Vacuuming mode to
ON. The electronic expansion valves of indoor and outside units fully open and some of
solenoid valves open.
(H2P blinks to indicate the test operation, and the remote controller displays "Test
Operation" and "In Centralized control", thus prohibiting operation.)
After setting, do not cancel “Setting Mode 2” until completion of vacuuming operation.
(2) Use the vacuum pump to perform vacuuming operation.
(3) Press Mode button “BS1” once and reset “Setting Mode 2”.
Field Settings 145

3.7.7 Check Operation

To prevent any trouble in the period of installation at site, the system is provided with a test
operation mode enabling check for incorrect wiring, stop valve left in closed, coming out (or
misplacing with suction pipe thermistor) of discharge pipe thermistor and judgement of piping
length, refrigerant overcharging, and learning for the minimum opening degree of electronic
expansion valve.
Check Operation Function
LED display (H1P~H7P) (k: ON h: OFF l: Blink)

Unit stopping
Press the TEST button for 5 seconds.

Step 1 Pressure equalizing
10 seconds to 10 minutes
Step 2 Cooling start control
3~5 minutes
Step 3 Stability waiting operation
10 minutes
Step4~6 Judgement function
• Stop valve close check
• Wrong wiring check
• Refrigerant over change check
• Piping length check
3 minutes
Step 7 Pump down residual operation

10 seconds ~ 5 minutes
Step 8 Standby for restarting

5 minutes
Completion
: Normal completion
: Abnormal completion
3.7.8 Power Transistor Check Operation

When the inverter system errors (error of inverter, inverter compressor), to locate where the
error occurs, switching to the power transistor check mode of inverter in the service mode
setting enables not to judge the position detection signal error but to output waveform only
during inverter operation. (The waveform can be checked by disconnecting the wiring of
compressor.)
After the completion of checks, return the system to the previous mode and wait for 30 seconds
or more until the discharge of capacitor is completed. Then, conduct a subsequent work.
Note: Be sure to disconnect the compressor wiring when conducting the check operation mentioned
above.
When the output voltage is approx. 100~200 V (10 Hz) and the voltage balance between
phases U-V, V-W, W-U is within ±5%, the inverter PCB is normal.
For details, refer to power transistor check on page 257.
146 Field Settings

SiAU301015EC Emergency Operation
4. Emergency Operation
If the compressor cannot operate, this control inhibits any applicable compressor or outside unit
from operating to perform emergency operation only with the operative compressor or outside
unit.
Caution
For making a compressor unable to operate due to an error, etc., be sure to conduct the
work with emergency operation settings.
Never execute work such as disconnection of the power cable from the magnet contact
switch.
(Otherwise, other normal compressors may become defective.)
∗ Because units will be operated in a combination in which oil pressure equalization
between compressors cannot be performed.
4.1 Restrictions for Emergency Operation

If the emergency operation is set while the outside unit is in operation, the outside unit stops
once after pump down residual operation (a maximum of 5 minutes elapsed).
4.2 In the Case of Multi Outside Unit System

Automatic backup operation
With multi outside unit system, if a certain outside unit system errors (i.e., the system stops
and indoor unit remote controller displays the error), by resetting the system with the indoor
unit remote controller, the applicable outside unit is inhibited from operating for 8 hours, thus
making it possible to perform emergency operation automatically.
However, in the event any of the following errors occurs, automatic backup operation can be
performed.
Errors under which automatic backup operation can be performed:
• E3, E4, E5, E7
• F3
• J3, J5, J6, J7, J9, JA, JC
• L4, L5, L8, L9, LC
• U2, UJ
Emergency operation with settings in service mode

∗ “Inhibition of operation” is set with each outside unit.
Make the following settings with the master unit. (Setting with the slave unit becomes disabled.)
∗ Discriminate the operating status of the master unit/slave units through the following LED
display.
LED display (k: ON h: OFF l: Blink)
H1P---H7P H8P
Master:
Slave 1:
Slave 2:
(Factory setting)
Field Settings 147

Emergency Operation SiAU301015EC
• To inhibit the master unit from operating → Set

setting mode 2 from No. 38 to No. 2. LED display (k: ON h: OFF l: Blink)
H1P---H7P
(Procedure)
(1) Press and hold the MODE button (BS1) for 5
seconds or more.
(2) Press the SET button (BS2) 38 times.
(3) Press the RETURN button (BS3) once. (Factory setting)
(4) Press the SET button (BS2) once.
(5) Press the RETURN button (BS3) twice.
(6) Press the MODE button (BS1) once.
• To inhibit the sub unit 1 from operating → Set

H1P---H7P
(Procedure)
seconds or more.
• To inhibit the sub unit 2 from operating → Set

H1P---H7P
(Procedure)
seconds or more.
• In the case of multi outside unit system, when the

above “Inhibition of operation” is set, outside unit rotation is not functional.
Note : Reset the power supply while the outside unit is stopping to cancel the
automatic backup operation forcibly.
148 Field Settings

SiAU301015EC
Part 6
Service Diagnosis
1. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................151
2. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller ...............................................154
2.2 Error Codes and Description ................................................................159
2.3 Error Code Indication by Outside Unit PCB .........................................161
2.4 Error of External Protection Device ......................................................163
2.5 PCB Abnormality ..................................................................................164
2.6 Drain Level Control System (S1L) Abnormality....................................165
2.7 Fan Motor Lock, Overload....................................................................167
2.8 Abnormal Indoor Fan Motor .................................................................168
2.9 Swing Flap Motor Abnormality .............................................................173
2.10 Abnormal Power Supply Voltage..........................................................175
2.11 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality/Dust Clogging ...............176
2.13 Drain Level above Limit........................................................................180
2.14 Capacity Determination Device Abnormality ........................................181
2.15 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB) ............182
2.17 Combination Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB)..............185
2.19 Humidity Sensor System Abnormality ..................................................187
2.20 Abnormal Room Temperature Thermistor in Remote Controller..........188
2.21 PCB Abnormality ..................................................................................189
2.22 Earth Leakage by Leak Detection Circuit .............................................190
2.23 High Pressure Abnormality...................................................................192
2.24 Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor .......................................................194
2.25 Inverter Compressor Motor Lock..........................................................196
2.27 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality ...........................................200
2.28 Refrigerant Overcharged......................................................................202
(BSQ100/160/250AV1, BS4/6/8/10/12/16Q14AV1 only)......................204
2.30 Water System Abnormality...................................................................205
2.31 Thermistor System Abnormality ...........................................................207
2.32 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality ......................................................208
2.33 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality .......................................................210
2.34 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality .........................212
2.35 Momentary Overcurrent of Inverter Compressor..................................213
2.36 Overcurrent Abnormality of Inverter Compressor.................................215
2.37 Inverter Compressor Startup Abnormality ............................................217
2.38 Transmission Error (between Inverter PCB and
Outside Unit Main PCB) .......................................................................219
2.39 Inverter Over-Ripple Protection............................................................221
2.40 Inverter Radiation Fin Thermistor Abnormality.....................................223
Service Diagnosis 149

SiAU301015EC
2.41 Defective Field Setting after Replacing Outside Unit Main PCB or
Defective Combination of PCB.............................................................224
2.42 Refrigerant Shortage ............................................................................225
2.43 Reverse Phase, Open Phase...............................................................227
2.44 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Failure .............................228
2.45 Check Operation Not Executed............................................................230
2.46 Transmission Error (between Indoor and Outside Units) .....................231
2.47 Transmission Error (between Remote Controller and Indoor Unit) ......233
2.48 Transmission Error (between Outside Units) .......................................234
2.49 Transmission Error (between Main and Sub Remote Controllers).......240
2.50 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit and Outside Unit
in the Same System) ............................................................................241
2.51 Improper Combination of Indoor, BS and Outside Units ......................242
2.52 Address Duplication of Centralized Control Equipment .......................247
2.53 Transmission Error (between Centralized Control Equipment and
Indoor Unit)...........................................................................................248
2.54 System Not Set ....................................................................................251
2.55 System Error, Refrigerant System Address Undefined ........................252
2.56 Check ...................................................................................................254
150 Service Diagnosis

SiAU301015EC Symptom-based Troubleshooting
1. Symptom-based Troubleshooting
Symptom Supposed Cause Countermeasure
1 The system does not start operation at all. Blowout of fuse(s) Turn OFF the power supply and
then replace the fuse(s).
Cutout of breaker(s) • If the knob of any breaker is in
its OFF position, turn ON the
power supply.
• If the knob of any circuit
breaker is in its tripped position,
do not turn ON the power
supply.
ON
Knob
Tripped
OFF
Circuit breaker
Power failure After the power failure is reset,

restart the system.
2 The system starts operation but makes an Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
immediate stop. or outside unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
3 The system does not cool air well. Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
or outside unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
Enclosed outside unit(s) Remove the enclosure.
Improper set temperature Set the temperature to a proper
degree.
Airflow rate set to "LOW" Set it to a proper airflow rate.
Improper direction of air diffusion Set it to a proper direction.
Open window(s) or door(s) Shut it tightly.
[In cooling] Direct sunlight received Hang curtains or shades on
windows.
[In cooling] Too many persons staying in a The model must be selected to
room match the air conditioning load.
[In cooling] Too many heat sources (e.g. OA
equipment) located in a room
4 The system does The system stops and If the OPERATION lamp on the Normal operation. The system will
not operate. immediately restarts operation. remote controller turns ON, the automatically start operation after
Pressing the TEMP ADJUST system will be normal. These a lapse of 5 minutes.
button immediately resets the symptoms indicate that the
system. system is controlled so as not to
put unreasonable loads on the
system.
The remote controller displays The system is controlled with Operate the system using the
"UNDER CENTRALIZED centralized remote controller. COOL/HEAT centralized remote
CONTROL", which blinks for a Blinking display indicates that the controller.
period of several seconds system cannot be operated using
when the OPERATION button the remote controller.
is depressed.
The system stops immediately The system is in preparation Wait for a period of approximately
after turning ON the power mode of micro-computer 1 minute.
supply. operation.
5 The system The remote controller displays The system stops due to an Remove causes of electrical
makes error codes U4 or U5, and the interruption in communication noises.
intermittent system stops but restarts after between units caused by If these causes are removed, the
stops. a lapse of several minutes. electrical noises coming from system will automatically restart
equipment other than air operation.
conditioners.
6 COOL-HEAT The remote controller displays This remote controller has no Use a remote controller with
selection is "UNDER CENTRALIZED option to select cooling operation. option to select cooling operation.
disabled. CONTROL".
The remote controller displays COOL-HEAT selection is made Use the COOL-HEAT selection
"UNDER CENTRALIZED using the COOL-HEAT selection remote controller to select cool or
CONTROL", and the COOL- remote controller. heat.
HEAT selection remote
controller is provided.

Symptom-based Troubleshooting SiAU301015EC

7 The system This symptom occurs The system is in preparation Wait for a period of approximately
conducts fan immediately after turning ON mode of operation. 10 minutes.
operation but not the power supply.
cooling or
heating
operation.
8 The airflow rate Even pressing the AIRFLOW In heating, when the room Normal operation.
is not RATE SET button makes no temperature reaches the set
reproduced changes in the airflow rate. degree, the outside unit will stop
according to the while the indoor unit is brought to
setting. fan LL operation so that no one
gets cold air.
Furthermore, if fan operation
mode is selected when other
indoor unit is in heating, the
system will be brought to fan LL
operation.
(The fan LL operation is also
enabled while in oil return mode in
cooling.)
9 The airflow The airflow direction is not Automatic control Normal operation.
direction is not corresponding to that
reproduced displayed on the remote
according to the controller.
setting. The flap does not swing.
10 A white mist Indoor unit Uneven temperature distribution Clean the inside of the indoor unit.
comes out from In cooling, the ambient due to heavy stain of the inside of
the system. humidity is high. the indoor unit
(This indoor unit is installed in
a place with much oil or dust.)
Indoor unit Hot gas (refrigerant) flown in the Normal operation.
Immediately after cooling indoor unit results to be vapor
operation stopping, the from the unit.
ambient temperature and
humidity are low.
11 The system Indoor unit These are operating sounds of Normal operation.
produces Immediately after turning ON the electronic expansion valve of This sound becomes low after a
sounds. the power supply, indoor unit the indoor unit. lapse of approximately 1 minute.
produces ringing sounds.
Indoor and outside units These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Hissing sounds are gas (refrigerant) flowing
continuously produced while in respectively through the indoor
cooling operation. and outside units.
Indoor and outside units These sounds are produced Normal operation.
Hissing sounds are produced when the gas (refrigerant) stops
immediately after the startup or or changes flowing.
stop of the system.
Indoor unit These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Faint sounds are continuously the drain discharge device in
produced while in cooling operation.
operation or after stopping the
operation.
Indoor unit These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Creaking sounds are produced resin parts expanding and
while in heating operation or contracting with temperature
after stopping the operation. changes.
Indoor unit On VRV systems, these sounds Normal operation.
Sounds like trickling or the like are produced when other indoor
are produced from indoor units units in operation. The reason is
in the stopped state. that the system runs in order to
prevent oil or refrigerant from
dwelling.
Outside unit The reason is that the compressor Normal operation.
The pitch of operating sounds changes the operating frequency.
changes.
12 Dust comes out Dust comes out from the Dust, which has deposited on the Normal operation.
from the system. system when it restarts after inside of indoor unit, is blown out
the stop for an extended period from the system.
of time.
13 Odors come out In operation Odors of room, cigarettes or else The inside of the indoor unit
from the system. adsorbed to the inside of indoor should be cleaned.
unit are blown out.

SiAU301015EC Symptom-based Troubleshooting

14 Outside fan does In operation The reason is that fan revolutions Normal operation.
not rotate. are controlled to put the operation
to the optimum state.
15 LCD display 88 Immediately after turning ON The reason is that the system is Normal operation.
appears on the the power supply checking to be sure the remote This code is displayed for a period
remote controller is normal. of approximately 1 minute at
controller. maximum.
16 The outside unit After stopping operation It stops in order to prevent oil or Normal operation.
compressor or refrigerant from dwelling. It stops after a lapse of
the outside fan approximately 5 to 10 minutes.
does not stop.
17 The outside gets While stopping operation The reason is that the compressor Normal operation.
hot. is warmed up to provide smooth
startup of the system.
18 Hot air comes Hot air is felt while the system On VRV systems, small quantity Normal operation.
out from the stops. of refrigerant is fed to indoor units
system even in the stopped state when other
though it stops. indoor units are in operation.
19 The system does The system is in dry operation. The reason is that the dry Change the system to cooling
not cool air well. operation serves not to reduce operation.
the room temperature where
possible.

Troubleshooting by Remote Controller SiAU301015EC
2. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller

2.1 Wired Remote Controller
2.1.1 BRC1C62, BRC1D61
The following modes can be selected by using the INSPECTION/TEST button on the remote controller.
Hold the INSPECTION/TEST
Indoor unit settings can be made. button for more than 4 seconds. Service data can be obtained.
z Filter cleaning sign time z Error code history
z Airflow direction
Field z Temperature data of various sections
Service
setting
z Others mode Service settings can be made.
mode
z Forced fan ON
z Airflow direction/Airflow rate setting
Hold the INSPECTION/TEST Press the INSPECTION/TEST button once.

button for more than 4 seconds.
Normal
mode
Press the INSPECTION/TEST Press the INSPECTION/TEST button once or leave the
button once. remote controller untouched for 30 minutes.
After 10 seconds
Following codes can be checked. Test
z Error codes Inspection Thermostat is forcibly turned on.
operation
z Indoor model code mode
mode
z Outdoor model code
Press the INSPECTION/TEST button once.
If operation stops due to error, the operation lamp on the remote controller blinks, and error code is displayed.
(Even if stop operation is carried out, error contents are displayed when the inspection mode is entered.) The
error code enables you to tell what kind of error caused operation to stop. Refer to page 159 for error code
and description.
Operation lamp
ON/OFF button
Display of indoor unit

for which an error has
been detected
Inspection display
Error code
INSPECTION/TEST button
Note:
1. When you press the INSPECTION/TEST button, the inspection display blinks.
2. While in service mode, hold down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or more to clear the error history
indication. In this case, the error code blinks twice and then changes to 00 (Normal), the Unit No. changes
to 0, and the operation mode automatically switches from service mode to normal mode (displaying the
set temperature).

SiAU301015EC Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
2.1.2 BRC1E61
The following will be displayed on the screen when an error (or a warning) occurs during operation.
Check the error code and take the corrective action specified for the particular model.
Screen
Operation lamp
(1) Checking an error or warning

Operation Status Display
The operation lamp (green)

Abnormal starts to blink. The message
shutdown The system stops operating. Error: Press Menu button will
appear and blink at the bottom of
the screen.
The operation lamp (green)

remains on. The message
Warning The system continues its operation. Warning: Press Menu button
will appear and blink at the
bottom of the screen.
(2) Taking corrective action
· Press the Menu/Enter button to check the error code.
· Take the corrective action specific to the model.
Error code
Applicable
model names

2.1.3 BRC1E62
Main Menu
• Airflow direction
• Quick start
• Ventilation
• Energy saving options
• Schedule
• Filter auto clean
• Maintenance information
• Configuration
Main Menu screen • Current settings
• Clock & calendar
Basic Screen • Language
• Operation mode changeover
• Airflow direction Press Press the Cancel
• Airflow rate the Menu/Enter button once.
• Menu display button once.
• Confirmation of each setting
• On
• Off
• Cancel
• Operation lamp
Press the Cancel button Press the Cancel

for 4 seconds or more. button once.
Basic screen
Press the Cancel

button once.
Press the Cancel button
for 4 seconds or more.
Service Settings screen Maintenance Menu screen
Service Settings Menu Maintenance Menu

• Test operation • Model name
• Maintenance Contract • Operation hours
• Field settings • Indoor unit status
• Min setpoints differential • Outdoor unit status
• Group address • Error display
• Indoor unit Airnet address • Swap unit No.
• Outdoor unit Airnet address • Addressed sensor value
• Error history
• Indoor unit status
• Outdoor unit status
• Forced fan ON
• Switch main sub controller
• Filter indicator

2.1.4 Wireless Remote Controller

If unit stops due to an error, the operation indicating LED on the signal receiving part of indoor unit blinks.
The error code can be determined by following the procedure described below. (The error code is displayed
when an operation error has occurred. In normal condition, the error code of the last problem is displayed.)
1 Press the INSPECTION/TEST button to enter the inspection mode. Then the
figure 0 blinks on the UNIT No. display.
2 Press the UP or DOWN button and change the UNIT No. until the receiver of the
remote controller starts to beep.
3 short beeps : Follow all steps below.
1 short beep : Follow steps 3 and 4. Continue the operation in step 4 until you
hear a continuous beep. This continuous beep indicates that the
error code is confirmed.
Continuous beep : There is no abnormality.
3 Press the MODE button. The left 0 (upper digit) indication of the error code blinks.
4 Press the UP or DOWN button to change the error code upper digit until the
receiver of the remote controller starts to beep.
The upper digit of the code changes as shown below.
O0 A C E H F J L P U 9 8 7 6 5 4
"UP" button "DOWN" button
Continuous beep : Both upper and lower digits match. (Error code is confirmed.)
2 short beeps : The upper digit matches but the lower digit does not.
1 short beep : The upper digit does not match.
5 Press the MODE button. The right 0 (lower digit) indication of the error code blinks.
6 Press the UP or DOWN button and change the error code lower digit until the
receiver of the remote controller generates a continuous beep.
The lower digit of the code changes as shown below.
0123456789AHCJEF
"UP" button "DOWN" button
Continuous beep : Both upper and lower digits match. (Error code is confirmed.)
2 short beeps : The upper digit matches but the lower digit does not.
1 short beep : The upper digit does not match.
7 Press the MODE button to return to the normal mode. If you do not press any
button for 1 minutes, the remote controller automatically returns to the normal
mode.

2. Change the UNIT No. with

Normal mode UP or DOWN button.
1. Press INSPECTION/TEST button to enter the

inspection mode.
If no button is pressed
for 1 minute, equipment
returns to normal mode.
3. Press MODE
button.
The upper digit
7. When MODE button is blinks.
pressed or no button is
pressed for 1 minute,
equipment returns to
normal mode.
If no button is pressed
for 1 minute, equipment
returns to normal mode.
6. Change the lower

digit with UP or
DOWN button. 4. Change the
upper digit with
UP or DOWN
5. Press MODE button. button.
The lower digit blinks.

2.2 Error Codes and Description

Error code Description Reference
Page
Indoor Unit A0 Error of external protection device 163
A1 PCB abnormality 164
A3 Drain level control system (S1L) abnormality 165
A6 Fan motor lock, overload 167
Abnormal indoor fan motor 168
A7 Swing flap motor abnormality 173
A8 Abnormal power supply voltage 175
A9 Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality/Dust clogging 176
Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality 178
AF Drain level above limit 180
AJ Capacity determination device abnormality 181
C1 Transmission error (between indoor unit PCB and fan PCB) 182
C4 Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (R2T) abnormality 184
C5 Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R3T) abnormality 184
C6 Combination error (between indoor unit PCB and fan PCB) 185
C9 Suction air thermistor (R1T) abnormality 184
CA Discharge air thermistor (R4T) abnormality 186
CC Humidity sensor system abnormality 187
CJ Abnormal room temperature thermistor in remote controller 188
Outside Unit E1 PCB abnormality 189
E2 Earth leakage by leak detection circuit 190
E3 High pressure abnormality 192
E4 Actuation of low pressure sensor 194
E5 Inverter compressor motor lock 196
E9 Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality 198
F3 Discharge pipe temperature abnormality 200
F6 Refrigerant overcharged 202
F9 BS unit electronic expansion valve abnormality (BSQ100/160/250AV1, 204
BS4/6/8/10/12/16Q14AV1 only)
HJ Water system abnormality 205
J3 Discharge pipe thermistor (R3T) abnormality 207
J4 Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R4T) abnormality 207
J5 Suction pipe thermistor (R2T) abnormality 207
J7 Receive outlet liquid pipe thermistor (R6T) abnormality 207
J9 Subcooling heat exchanger outlet pipe thermistor (R5T) abnormality 207
JA High pressure sensor abnormality 208
JC Low pressure sensor abnormality 210
L4 Inverter radiation fin temperature rise abnormality 212
L5 Momentary overcurrent of inverter compressor 213
L8 Overcurrent abnormality of inverter compressor 215
L9 Inverter compressor startup abnormality 217
LC Transmission error (between inverter PCB and outside unit main PCB) 219
P1 Inverter over-ripple protection 221
P4 Inverter radiation fin thermistor abnormality 223
PJ Defective field setting after replacing outside unit main PCB or defective 224
combination of PCB

Reference
Error code Description Page
System U0 Refrigerant shortage 225
U1 Reverse phase, open phase 227
U2 Power supply insufficient or instantaneous failure 228
U3 Check operation not executed 230
U4 Transmission error (between indoor and outside units) 231
U5 Transmission error (between remote controller and indoor unit) 233
U7 Transmission error (between outside units) 234
U8 Transmission error (between main and sub remote controllers) 240
U9 Transmission error (between indoor unit and outside unit in the same system) 241
UA Improper combination of indoor, BS and outside units 242
UC Address duplication of centralized control equipment 247
UE Transmission error (between centralized control equipment and indoor unit) 248
UF System not set 251
UH System error, refrigerant system address undefined 252
The system operates for error codes indicated in black squares, however, be sure to check and repair.

2.3 Error Code Indication by Outside Unit PCB

To enter the monitor mode, press Error
Contents of Error Code
the MODE button (BS1) when in
“Setting mode 1”. PCB abnormality E1
Earth leakage by leak detection circuit E2
High pressure abnormality E3
∗ Refer to page 128 for Monitor Actuation of low pressure sensor E4
mode. Inverter compressor motor lock E5
Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality (Y1E)
E9
Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality (Y3E)
Selection of setting item
Discharge pipe temperature abnormality F3
Press the SET button (BS2) and set
Refrigerant overcharged F6
the LED display to a setting item.
Water system abnormality HJ
Discharge pipe thermistor (R3T) abnormality J3
∗ Refer to page 128 for Monitor Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R4T) abnormality J4
mode. Suction pipe thermistor (R2T) abnormality J5
Receiver outlet liquid pipe thermistor (R6T) abnormality J7
Subcooling heat exchanger outlet pipe thermistor (R5T) abnormality J9
Confirmation of error 1
High pressure sensor abnormality JA
Low pressure sensor abnormality JC
once to display "First digit" of error
code. Inverter radiation fin temperature rise abnormality L4
Momentary overcurrent of inverter compressor L5
Overcurrent abnormality of inverter compressor L8
Inverter compressor starting abnormality L9
Transmission error (between inverter PCB and outside unit main PCB) LC
Inverter over-ripple protection P1
Inverter radiation fin thermistor or related abnormality P4
Confirmation of error 2
Defective field setting after replacing outside unit main PCB or defective
combination of PCB PJ
Press the SET button (BS2) once to Detail
display "Second digit" of error code. description Refrigerant shortage U0
on next Reverse phase, open phase U1
page.
Power supply insufficient or instantaneous failure U2
Check operation not executed U3
Transmission error (between indoor and outside units) U4
Transmission error (between outside units) U7
Transmission error (between indoor unit and outside unit in the same U9
Confirmation of error 3 system)
Improper combination of indoor, BS and outside units UA
Press the SET button (BS2) once to
display "master or slave 1 or slave System not set UF
2" and "error location". System error, refrigerant system address undefined UH

and switches to the initial status of
“Monitor mode”.
∗ Press the MODE button (BS1) and

returns to “Setting mode 1”.

1k: ON h: OFF l: BLINK

Error Confirmation of Error 1 Confirmation of Error 2 Confirmation of Error 3
Code LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7 LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7 LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7
E1 l h k h h l l l k h h h h l l k k h h
E2 l k h h h l h l k k h h
E3 l k h h h l l l k k h h
E4 l k h h l h h l k k h h
E5 l k h h l h l l k k h h
l k k h l
E9 l k h l h h l
l k k l l
F3 l h k h l h l l k h h h l l l k k h h
F6 l k h h l l h l k k h h
HJ l h k h l h h l k h l l h l l k k h h
J3 l h k h l l h l k h h h l l l k k h l
J4 l k h h l h h l k k h l
J5 l k h h l h l l k k h h
J7 l k h h l l l l k k h h
J9 l k h l h h l l k k h h
JA l k h l h l h l k k h h
JC l k h l l h h l k k h h
L4 l h k h l l l l k h h l h h l k k h h
L5 l k h h l h l l k k h h
L8 l k h l h h h l k k h h
L9 l k h l h h l l k k h h
LC l k h l l h h l k k h h
P1 l h k l h h h l k h h h h l l k k h h
P4 l k h h l h h l k k h h
PJ l k h l l h l l k k h h
U0 l h k l h h l l k h h h h h l k k h h
U1 l k h h h h l l k k h h
U2 l k h h h l h l k k h h
U3 l k h h h l l l k k h h
U4 l k h h l h h l k k h h
U7 l k h h l l l l k k h h
U9 l k h l h h l l k k h h
UA l k h l h l h l k k h h
UF l k h l l l l l k k h h
UH l k h l h l l l k k h h
Error code 1st Error code 2nd

digit display section digit display section
Master h h Error
location
Slave 1 h l
Slave 2 l h

2.4 Error of External Protection Device

Remote A0
Controller
Display
Applicable All indoor models

Models
Method of Error Detect open or short circuit between external input terminals in indoor unit.
Detection
Error Decision When an open circuit occurs between external input terminals with the remote controller set to
Conditions "external ON/OFF terminal".
Supposed Actuation of external protection device

Causes Improper field setting
Defective indoor unit PCB
Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
External
protection device is
connected to terminals T1 YES
and T2 of the indoor unit Actuation of external protection
terminal block. device.
NO
Check the setting state of the

ON/OFF input from outside
by remote controller.
ON/OFF
input from
outside (mode No.
12, first code No. 1) has YES
been set to external Change the second code No. to
protection device input 01 or 02.
(second code No.
03) by remote
controller.
NO
Replace the indoor unit PCB.

2.5 PCB Abnormality

Remote A1
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Check data from EEPROM.

Detection
Error Decision When data could not be correctly received from the EEPROM
Conditions EEPROM: Type of nonvolatile memory. Maintains memory contents even when the power
supply is turned OFF.
Supposed Defective indoor unit PCB

Causes External factor (Noise etc.)
Troubleshooting
Turn the power supply OFF,

then the power ON again.
Does the YES

system return to The indoor unit PCB is
normal? normal.
External factor other than
NO error (for example, noise
etc.).
Replace the indoor unit
PCB.

2.6 Drain Level Control System (S1L) Abnormality

Remote A3
Controller
Display
Applicable FXFQ, FXZQ, FXUQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXDYQ (Option), FXSQ, FXSYQ, FXMQ-P,
Models FXMQ-M(A) (Option), FXHQ (Option), FXAQ (Option)
Method of Error By float switch OFF detection

Detection
Error Decision When rise of water level is not a condition and the float switch goes OFF
Conditions
Supposed 220~240 V power supply is not provided

Causes Defective float switch or short circuit connector
Defective drain pump
Drain clogging, upward slope, etc.
Loose connection of connector

Troubleshooting
Is power supply NO
220~240 V provided? Provide 220~240 V power
supply.
YES
The float A short

switch is connected NO circuit connector is NO
to X8A or X15A of the indoor connected to X8A or Connect either a short circuit
unit PCB. X15A. connector or float switch and
turn ON again.
YES YES
The float
switch contact Becomes
is forming a short YES normal when X8A NO
circuit. (continuity check or X15A of the indoor unit Replace the indoor unit PCB.
with X8A or X15A PCB is short
disconnected) circuited.
NO YES
Loose the connection of
connector.
Water builds up NO The float switch NO

in the drain pan. functions normally. Replace the float switch.
YES YES Modify the float switch's

connection and turn ON again.
The drain
pump is connected to NO
X10A, X25A, or terminals Y1 Connect the drain pump and
and Y2 of the indoor unit turn ON again.
PCB.
YES
The
drain pump YES
works when the power Check the drain piping for
supply is reset for the clogging or upward slope, etc.
indoor unit.
NO
The
voltage of
X10A, X25A, or
terminals Y1 and Y2 is NO
220~240 V (within 5 Replace the indoor unit PCB.
minutes of resetting
the power
supply).
YES
Replace the drain pump or

check for dirt, etc.

2.7 Fan Motor Lock, Overload

Remote A6
Controller
Display
Applicable FXDQ, FXHQ

Models
Method of Error This error is detected if there is no revolutions detection signal output from the fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision When no revolutions can be detected even at the maximum output voltage to the fan
Conditions
Supposed Fan motor lock

Causes Broken wires
Disconnected or defective contact between fan motor and PCB
Troubleshooting
Is the
wiring from the fan
motor securely connected to NO
connectors X4A and X27A on Connect the connector correctly.
the indoor unit (At this time, check for any
PCB? defective connector contact or
broken wires.)
YES
Disconnect the connectors with

power supply and check the
voltage between 1 and 3 of
connector X4A.
Is there approx. YES

DC 12 Volt between 1 Check for wiring of indoor fan
and 2 pins? motor and motor itself.
NO

2.8 Abnormal Indoor Fan Motor

2.8.1 Abnormal Indoor Fan Motor (FXFQ)
Remote A6
Controller
Display
Applicable FXFQ
Models
Method of Error Detection of abnormal fan revolutions with the signal from the fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision When the fan revolutions do not increase

Conditions
Supposed Disconnected/short-circuited fan motor harnesses or disconnected connectors

Causes Defective fan motor
(Disconnection and insulation failure)
Abnormal signal output from the fan motor
(Circuit breakdown)
Defective PCB
Instantaneous disturbance of power supply voltage
Fan motor lock
(Caused by the motor or external factors)
Fan does not rotate because foreign matter is trapped in it.
Disconnected connector between PCB (A1P and A2P)

Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply.
Is there any
foreign matter YES
Remove the foreign matter.
around the fan?
NO
Are the
harness from the fan
motor and the harness of NO
Connect properly.
A1P fan motor (fixed to
X20A) connected
properly?
YES
Can the fan

be removed from the
junction connector between NO
Replace the fan motor.
the fan motor and A1P and
rotated easily with
hands?
YES
Does
the resistance
NO
between pins satisfy the Replace the fan motor.
judgement
criteria?
YES
Are
high-power PCB
NO
(A1P) and low-power PCB Connect properly.
(A2P) connected
properly?
YES

2.8.2 Abnormal Indoor Fan Motor (FXSQ140P, FXMQ50-140P)

Remote A6
Controller
Display
Applicable FXSQ140P, FXMQ50-140P

Models
Method of Error Detection from the current flow on the fan PCB.
Detection Detection from the RPM of the fan motor in operation.
Detection from the position signal of the fan motor.
Detection from the current flow on the fan PCB when the fan motor starting operation.
Error Decision An overcurrent flows.

Conditions The RPM is less than a certain level for 6 seconds.
A position error in the fan rotor continues for 5 seconds or more.
Supposed The clogging of a foreign matter

Causes The disconnection of the fan motor connectors (X1A and X2A)
The disconnection of the connectors between the indoor unit PCB (A1P) and fan PCB (A2P)
Defective fan PCB (A2P)
Defective the fan motor

Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power and wait

for 10 minutes.
There is a YES
foreign matter around Remove the foreign matter.
the fan.
NO
The fan
motor connectors (X1A YES
and X2A) of the fan PCB (A2P) are Connect correctly.
disconnected.
NO
The connectors
between the indoor unit YES
PCB (A1P) and the fan PCB Connect correctly.
(A2P) are
disconnected.
NO
The fuse
(F3U, white) on the NO
fan PCB (A2P) has no Replace the fan PCB
continuity. (A2P).
YES
The fan
can be moved
lightly by hand after the fan NO
motor connector of the fan Replace the fan motor.
PCB (A2P) is
removed.
YES
The
resistance between
the power supply wire YES
terminals of the fan motor and motor Replace the fan motor.
frame (metal part) is 1 MΩ
or below.
NO
Remove the power wire

connector from the fan motor
and measure the resistance
between U and V, V and W, and
W and U phases (∗1).
The
resistance among U, YES
V, and W are unbalanced or Replace the fan motor.
short-circuited.
NO

Remove the signal connector

from the fan motor and check
the resistance (∗2).
Between
VCC and GND YES
terminals, and between GND and Replace the fan motor.
HW, HV, or HU terminals are
short-circuited.
NO
Turn ON the power.
The HAP
lamp of the indoor
unit PCB (A1P) blinks and YES
Replace the fan PCB
the HAP lamp of the fan (A2P).
PCB (A2P) is
OFF.
NO
Replace the fan motor.
Note: ∗1: Connector of fan motor (Power supply cable) check

Turn OFF the power supply.
Measure the resistance between phases of U,V,W at the motor side connectors (three-
corewire) to check that the values are balanced and there is no short circuiting, while
connector or relay connector is disconnected.
Red
Measuring Points Judgement

White Black - Red 3.5 Ω ± 10%
Black - White 3.5 Ω ± 10%
Black
∗2: Signal wire connector measurement

Remove the X2A connector and measure the resistance between GND and VCC, HW, HV,
or HU terminals of the motor connector (with 5 cores).
Connector signal wire use (X2A)
5 Gray GND
4 Pink Vcc
3 Orange Hw
2 Blue HV
1 Yellow HU

2.9 Swing Flap Motor Abnormality

Remote A7
Controller
Display
Applicable FXCQ, FXKQ, FXHQ, FXUQ-MA

Models
Method of Error Utilizes ON/OFF of the limit switch when the motor turns.
Detection
Error Decision When ON/OFF of the micro-switch for positioning cannot be reversed even though the swing
Conditions flap motor is energized for a specified amount of time (about 30 seconds).
∗ Error code is displayed but the system operates continuously.
Supposed Defective swing motor

Causes Defective relay cable (power supply and limit switch)
Defective airflow direction adjusting flap-cam

Troubleshooting
Is power supply NO
220~240 V provided? Provide 220~240 V power
supply.
YES
Indoor
unit is a model NO
equipped with a swing Replace the indoor unit PCB.
flap function
YES
The swing The

motor works when the YES connector is NO
power supply is turned connected to X9A of the Connect the connector to X9A
OFF and then indoor unit PCB. and turn ON again.
back ON.
NO YES
The limit NO
switch functions Replace the swing motor.
normally.
YES
After The relay cable is YES

turning the short-circuited or Replace the limit switch relay
swing-flap ON disconnected. cable.
and then stopping
with the remote
controller, the voltage of NO
X6A of the indoor unit PCB is NO
220 VAC (50 Hz) when
turned ON again (within
30 seconds of
turning ON
again).
YES
The relay YES

cable has no continuity. Replace the power supply relay
cable.
NO
When
the airflow
direction flap-cam
mechanism is NO
disconnected from the swing Replace the swing motor.
motor, operation is
normal when
turned ON
again.
YES
Take the cam mechanism
apart, reassemble and turn ON
again.

2.10 Abnormal Power Supply Voltage

Remote A8
Controller
Display
Applicable FXMQ20-140P
Models
Method of Error The error is detected by checking the input voltage of fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision When the input voltage of fan motor is 150 V or less, or 386 V or more.
Conditions
Supposed Power supply voltage abnormality

Causes Defective connection on signal line
Defective wiring
Instantaneous power failure, others
Troubleshooting
Check the condition of the
power supply.
(1) Check if power supply
voltage is 220 V - 240
V ± 10%.
(2) Check if there is power
open phase or
defective wiring.
(3) Check if power supply
voltage unbalance is
within 6V.
There are
problems on the YES
condition of power supply Correct any fault.
described above.
NO
YES
Error is displayed again? Check and correct each wiring.
NO
It is possible to have external

factor, such as brownout and
instantaneous power failure.

2.11 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality/Dust

Clogging
Remote A9
Controller
Display
Applicable FXFQ
Models
Method of Error Check the coil condition of electronic expansion valve by using micro-computer.
Detection Check the dust clogging condition of electronic expansion valve main body by using micro-
computer.
Error Decision Pin input for electronic expansion valve coil is abnormal when initializing micro-computer.
Conditions Either of the following conditions is seen/caused/occurs while the unit stops operation.
z Temperature of suction air (R1T) – temperature of liquid pipe of heat exchanger (R2T) >
8°C.
z Temperature of liquid pipe of heat exchanger (R2T) shows fixed degrees or below.
Supposed Defective electronic expansion valve coil

Causes Defective PCB indoor unit
Defective relay cables

Troubleshooting

NO
When power is supplied. Replace the electronic expansion
valve main body.
YES
Electronic
expansion valve is NO
connected to X7A Shut the power supply OFF after
of indoor unit connection and then restart.
PCB.
YES
Check (∗1) of
electronic expansion NO
Replace the electronic expansion
valve coil indicates valve coil.
normal.
YES
Relay cables short YES

circuit or Replace the relay cables.
disconnected.
NO
When restarting the operation after
shutting the power supply OFF
does not work, replace the indoor
unit PCB.
Note: ∗1: How to check the electronic expansion valve coil

Remove the connector for electronic expansion valve (X7A) from PCB. Measure the
resistance value between pins and check the continuity to judge the condition.
1) White
White (1) 2) Yellow

φ1
Red (5) M
φ3 3) Orange
Orange (3)
4) Blue
φ2 φ4
Yellow Brown Blue 5) Red

(2) (6) (4)
6) Brown
The normal products will show the following conditions:

(1) No continuity between (1) and (2)
(2) Resistance value between (1) and (3) is approx. 300 Ω

2.12 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality

Remote A9
Controller
Display
Applicable Indoor units except FXFQ models

Models
Method of Error Use a micro-computer to check the electronic expansion valve for coil conditions.
Detection
Error Decision When the pin input of the electronic expansion valve is not normal while in the initialization of
Conditions the micro-computer.
Supposed Defective electronic expansion valve coil

Causes Defective indoor unit PCB
Defective relay cable
Troubleshooting
The
electronic
expansion valve is NO
connected to X7A of After connecting, turn OFF the
the indoor unit power supply and then turn the
PCB. power ON.
YES
Normal when
(∗1) the electronic NO
expansion valve coil is Replace the electronic expansion
checked. valve coil.
YES
The relay YES

cable is short-circuited Replace the relay cable.
or disconnected.
NO
If you turn OFF the power supply
and turn ON again, and it still does
not help, replace the indoor unit
PCB.

Note: ∗1: Coil check method for the electronic expansion valve
Discount the electronic expansion valve from the PCB and check the continuity between the
connector pins.
(Normal)
Pin No. 1. White 2. Yellow 3. Orange 4. Blue 5. Red 6. Brown
1. White × { × { ×
Approx. Approx.
300 Ω 150 Ω
2. Yellow × { × {
Approx. Approx.
300 Ω 150 Ω
3. Orange × { ×
Approx.
150 Ω
4. Blue × {
Approx.
150 Ω
5. Red ×
6. Brown
{: Continuity
× : No continuity
1 White
White (1) 2 Yellow

φ1
Red (5) M
φ3 3 Orange
Orange (3)
4 Blue
φ2 φ4
Yellow Brown Blue 5 Red

(2) (6) (4)
6 Brown

2.13 Drain Level above Limit

Remote AF
Controller
Display
Applicable FXFQ, FXZQ, FXUQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXDYQ, FXSQ, FXSYQ, FXMQ-P, FXMQ-M(A),
Models FXHQ, FXAQ
Method of Error Water leakage is detected based on float switch ON/OFF operation while the compressor is in
Detection non-operation.
Error Decision When the float switch changes from ON to OFF while the compressor is in non-operation
Conditions ∗ Error code is displayed but the system operates continuously.
Supposed Humidifier unit (optional accessory) leaking

Causes Defective drain pipe (upward slope, etc.)
Troubleshooting
Field drain
piping has a defect such YES
Modify the drain piping.
as upward sloping.
NO
A humidifier
unit (optional YES
accessory) is installed Check if the humidifier unit is
on the indoor leaking.
unit.
NO

2.14 Capacity Determination Device Abnormality

Remote AJ
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Capacity is determined according to resistance of the capacity setting adaptor and the memory
Detection inside the IC memory on the indoor unit PCB, and whether the value is normal or abnormal is
determined.
Error Decision When the capacity code is not saved to the PCB, and the capacity setting adaptor is not
Conditions connected
When a capacity that does not exist for that unit is set.
Supposed Capacity setting adaptor is not installed

Troubleshooting
The
indoor unit NO
PCB was replaced with a Replace the indoor unit PCB.
spare PCB.
YES
The
capacity
setting adaptor need NO
to be installed when Replace the indoor unit PCB.
replacing the
PCB.
YES
Install a capacity setting adaptor.

2.15 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan

PCB)
Remote C1
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Check the condition of transmission between indoor unit PCB (A1P) and fan PCB (A2P) using
Detection micro-computer.
Error Decision When normal transmission is not carried out for certain amount of time.
Conditions
Supposed Connection error of the connecter between indoor unit PCB (A1P) and fan PCB (A2P)
Causes Defective indoor unit PCB (A1P)
Defective fan PCB (A2P)
External factor, such as instantaneous power failure

Troubleshooting
Is the
connector
between indoor unit NO
PCB (A1P) and fan PCB Connect the connector accurately.
(A2P) accurately
connected?
(∗1)
YES
Confirm the condition of

transmission on indoor unit
PCB using field setting mode.
(∗2)
Under above field NO

setting mode, second Replace the indoor unit PCB (A1P).
code No. is 01.
YES
Connect the connecter X70A

and turn the power ON again.
Error is YES
displayed again? Replace the fan PCB (A2P).
NO
Connect it and operate (It is

possible to have a cause, such
as instantaneous power
failure)
Note: ∗1: Pull out and insert the connecter once and check it is accurately connected.
∗2: Method to check transmission part of indoor unit PCB.
(1) Turn OFF the power and remove the connecter X70A of indoor unit PCB (A1P).
(2) Short circuit X70A.
(3) After turning ON the power, check below numbers under field setting remote control.
(Confirmation: Second code No. at the condition of first code No. 21 on mode No. 41)
↓
Determination 01: Normal
Other than 01: Transmission defect on indoor unit PCB
∗ After confirmation, turn OFF the power, take off the short circuit and connect X70A back to
original condition.

2.16 Thermistor Abnormality

Remote C4, C5, C9
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error The error is detected by temperature detected by thermistor.

Detection
Error Decision When the thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is running.
Conditions
Supposed Defective connector connection

Causes Defective thermistor
Troubleshooting
Remove the thermistor from

the indoor unit PCB, and
then insert it again.
Is the YES
thermistor normal? Normal (The error is caused by
defective contact.)
NO

the indoor unit PCB, and then
make resistance measurement
of the thermistor using a
multiple meter.
CHECK 11 NO
5 to 90 kΩ Replace the thermistor (∗1).
YES
Note: ∗1: Error code and defective thermistor

Error code Defective thermistor Electric
symbol
C4 Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor R2T
C5 Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor R3T
C9 Suction air thermistor R1T
CHECK 11 Refer to page 262.

2.17 Combination Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan

PCB)
Remote C6
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Check the condition of transmission with fan PCB (A2P) using indoor unit PCB (A1P).
Detection
Error Decision When the communication data of fan PCB (A2P) is determined as incorrect
Conditions
Supposed Defective fan PCB (A2P)

Causes Defective connection of capacity setting adaptor
Field setting error
Troubleshooting
Is the type of fan NO

PCB (A2P) correct? Replace it with the correct fan
PCB (A2P).
YES
Was the indoor

unit PCB (A1P) replaced After establishing
with a spare PCB? transmission for indoor and
outside, diagnose the
operation again.
YES
Was
the correct
capacity setting NO
adaptor installed when Install the correct capacity
replacing it with a setting adaptor.
spare PCB?
YES
After establishing
transmission for indoor and
outside, diagnose the
operation again.

2.18 Thermistor Abnormality

Remote CA
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error The error is detected by temperature detected by thermistor.

Detection
Error Decision When the thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is running.
Conditions
Supposed Defective connector connection

Causes Defective thermistor
Troubleshooting

the indoor unit PCB, and
then insert it again.
Is the YES
thermistor normal? Normal (The error is caused by
defective contact.)
NO

the indoor unit PCB, and then
make resistance measurement
of the thermistor using a
multiple meter.
CHECK 11 NO
Replace the thermistor (∗1).
5 to 90 kΩ
YES
Note: ∗1: Error code and defective thermistor

Error code Defective thermistor Electric
symbol
CA Discharge air thermistor R4T

2.19 Humidity Sensor System Abnormality

Remote CC
Controller
Display
Applicable FXFQ
Models
Method of Error Even if an error occurs, operation still continues.

Detection Error is detected according to the moisture (output voltage) detected by the moisture sensor.
Error Decision When the moisture sensor is disconnected or short circuited

Conditions
Supposed Defective sensor

Causes Disconnection
Troubleshooting
Remove the humidity sensor

from the indoor unit PCB
and insert it again.
Does it function YES

It is normal.
normally?
(Poor connector contact)
NO
Delete the error code history

from the remote controller.
(∗1)
Is CC displayed
YES
on the remote Replace the humidity sensor
controller? (∗2) PCB (A2P).
(∗3)
NO
It is believed that external factors

(noise or else) other than failure
caused the error.
Note: ∗1: To delete the history, the ON/OFF button of the remote controller must be pressed and
held for 5 seconds in the check mode.
∗2: To display the code, the Inspection/Test Operation button of the remote controller must be
pressed and held in the normal mode.
∗3: If CC is displayed even after replacing the humidity sensor PCB assy (A2P) and taking the
steps ∗1 and 2, replace the indoor unit PCB assy (A1P).

2.20 Abnormal Room Temperature Thermistor in Remote

Controller
Remote CJ
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error The error is detected by temperature detected by room temperature thermistor in remote
Detection controller. (∗1)
Error Decision When the room temperature thermistor in remote controller becomes disconnected or shorted
Conditions while the unit is running
∗ Error code is displayed but the system operates continuously.
Supposed Defective room temperature thermistor in remote controller

Causes Defective remote controller PCB
Troubleshooting
Clear the error code history.

(When in inspection mode,
press and hold the "ON/OFF"
button for a period of 4
seconds or more.)
Error is YES
displayed again? Replace the remote
controller.
NO
External factor (Noise, etc.)
Note: ∗1: In case of room temperature thermistor in remote controller error, unit is still operable by
suction air thermistor on indoor unit.

2.21 PCB Abnormality

Remote E1
Controller
Display
Applicable RWEYQ8/10P
Models
Method of Error Abnormality is detected under the communication conditions in the hardware section between
Detection the indoor unit and outside unit.
Error Decision When communication conditions in the hardware section between the indoor unit and heat
Conditions source unit is abnormal
Supposed Defective outside unit main PCB

Causes Defective communication part on the outside unit main PCB
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply

once and then turn it ON again.
YES
Does it return normally? Check the following parts and
continue operation
• Check noise, etc.
NO • Check whether foreign
particles attach to the terminal
of the outside unit main PCB
Foreign (X1M).
particles are
attached on the YES
Remove the foreign particles
terminal (X1M) of the and restart operation.
outside unit main
PCB.
NO
Replace the outside unit
main PCB (A1P).

2.22 Earth Leakage by Leak Detection Circuit

Remote E2
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Failure is to be detected by using leak detection PCB assy.

Detection Reverse phase is to be detected at all times during operation by the reverse protector PCB
assy.
Error Decision Leakage is detected under the conditions outside of the scope of high pressure sensor
Conditions operation.
Supposed Defective compressor

Causes

Troubleshooting
Check for power

supply voltage. Voltage NO
Onsite causes.
between phases: 380
to 415 V Make proper wire
connections without open
YES
phase, erroneous
Check connections, or erroneous
for any wiring order of phases.
errors in the R-, S-, and T- Wiring error
phase electric wiring in the outside Correct the connection at
unit power (including the location of the wiring
auxiliary power).
error.
Disconnect compressor lead wire.
Turn OFF the power supply, and then

disconnect compressor lead wire.
Check
the compressor for Insulation fault
insulation using a megger Replace the defective
tester. part.
Check the
whole product for Insulation fault
insulation resistance using a Replace the defective
megger tester. part.
Check the
connectors of the high Disconnected
pressure sensor line for any Securely connect the
disconnection. connectors.
Check the
sub PCB (A4P) (+1) for YES
Replace the sub PCB
any broken wire in it.
(A4P) (+1).
NO
Reinstall all wirings.
Turn ON the power supply.
Check
whether there is
continuity between both X3A No continuity *1
Replace the sub PCB
ends of the sub PCB (A4P)
(+1). (A4P) (+1).
Check whether
there is continuity between both No continuity
ends of high pressure
Replace the high pressure
switch. switch.
+1 RWEYQ-PY1 only
Normal
It is supposed that ground leakage occurs due to temporary liquid back or accumulation of refrigerant.
This phenomenon can occur when power fails while in operation or is cut off for an extended period of time.
*1: It is normal that there is no continuity between both ends of X3A when the power supply turns OFF and for
a period of 9 seconds at maximum after the power supply turns ON.

2.23 High Pressure Abnormality

Remote E3
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error The error is detected by the protection device circuit that detects continuity at high pressure
Detection switch.
Error Decision When the protector circuit is partially opened

Conditions For reference: Operating pressure for the high pressure switch
Operating pressure:4.0 MPa
Reset pressure: 3.0 MPa
Supposed Actuation of outside unit high pressure switch

Causes Defective high pressure switch
Defective outside unit main PCB
Momentary power failure
Defective high pressure sensor

Troubleshooting
Check the following items:

(1) Is the stop valve open?
(2) Is the connector for high pressure switch properly
connected to the outside unit main PCB?
(3) Does the high pressure switch have
continuity?
Are the 3 NO
points above OK? Rectify the defective points, if
any.
YES
• Mount a pressure gauge on the high pressure service port.
• Connect the Service Checker.
• Reset the operation using the remote controller, and then
restart the operation.
Is the
Does the
YES high pressure NO
emergency stop due
switch operating value Replace the high pressure
to error E3 recur?
(4.0 MPa) switch.
normal?
NO YES
Are the
characteristics
of the high pressure NO
Replace the high pressure sensor.
sensor normal?
CHECK 12
YES
SERVICE CHECKER
Connect the service checker to compare the "high pressure" value and the
actual measurement value by pressure sensor (∗2) by using the service
checker.
Are the
"high pressure"
value and the actual NO
measurement value by Replace the outside unit main
pressure sensor PCB (A1P).
the same?
YES
• The high pressure sensor is normal and the pressure detected with the
outside unit main PCB is also normal.
• The high pressure or field piping pressure has really become high.
CHECK 1 : Remove the causes by which the high pressure or field piping
pressure has become high.

2.24 Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor

Remote E4
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Judge the pressure detected by a low pressure sensor with the outside unit main PCB.
Detection
Error Decision When low pressure drops while the compressor is in operation
Conditions Operation pressure: 0.07 MPa
Supposed Abnormal drop of low pressure

Causes Defective low pressure sensor
The stop valve is not opened.

Troubleshooting
Is the stop valve NO

Open the stop valve.
open?
YES
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the low pressure
service port.
(2) Reset the operation using the remote
controller, and then restart the operation.
Are the
characteristics of the NO
low pressure sensor normal? Replace the low pressure sensor.
CHECK 12
YES
SERVICE CHECKER
Connect the service checker to compare the "low pressure" value and the
actual measurement value by pressure sensor (∗2) by using the service
checker.
Are
the "low
pressure" value
and the actual NO
measurement valve by Replace the outside unit
pressure sensor main PCB.
the same?
YES
• The low pressure sensor is normal and the pressure detected with the
outside unit main PCB is also normal.
• The low pressure has really become low.
CHECK 2 : Remove the causes by which the low pressure has become low.

2.25 Inverter Compressor Motor Lock

Remote E5
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Inverter PCB takes the position signal from UVW line connected between the inverter and
Detection compressor, and the error is detected when any abnormality is observed in the phase-current
waveform.
Error Decision This error will be output when the inverter compressor motor does not startup even in forced
Conditions startup mode.
Supposed Inverter compressor lock

Causes High differential pressure (0.5 MPa or more)
Incorrect UVW wiring
Defective inverter PCB
Stop valve is not opened

Troubleshooting

Local factor
open? Open the stop valve.
YES
Are the relay NO
wires to the compressor Replace the relay wires and
correct? ensure right connection of the
connector.
YES
Is the connection NO
of UVW phase order Ensure correct connection.
correct? W
YES U
Power OFF
Is the wiring NO V
the same as in the electric Ensure correct connection.
wiring diagram? Check if the wiring has
any error in mistake for
YES inverter compressor.
The insulation
resistance of the compressor is YES
low (not more than 100 kW). Replace the compressor.
NO
The
compressor coil has YES
disconnection of wires.
NO
Restart and
check the operation. Check NO
if the condition occurs again. Conclude the work
There is a possibility of defective
pressure equalizing.
YES Check the refrigerant circuit.
Power ON
Is the
start mode in the YES
high differential pressure Defective pressure equalizing
(not less than 0.5 Check the refrigerant circuit.
MPa)?
NO
CHECK 4 NO
Power OFF Is the power transistor Replace the inverter PCB (A2P).
normal?
YES
Restart
Power ON and check if the NO
error occurs again. Continue the operation.
(There is a possibility of
instantaneous power failure etc.)
YES
Power OFF Replace the inverter PCB
(A2P).
Restart
and check if the NO
Power ON error occurs again. Continue the operation.
YES
Replace the inverter compressor.
+ The inverter PCB is not
defective.
Return the inverter PCB to
original position.

2.26 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality

Remote E9
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Check the continuity of electronic expansion valve coil (Y1E)
Detection
Error Decision No current is detected in the common (COM [+]) when the power supply is ON.
Conditions
Supposed Disconnection of connectors for electronic expansion valve (Y1E)

Causes Defective electronic expansion valve coil
Defective outside unit main PCB (A1P)
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply once

and then turn it ON again.
YES
Return to normal? External factor (Noise, etc.)
NO
Check the electronic expansion valve corresponding to the error code E9 in the monitor mode.
{ When confirmation of error 3 shows as follows:
→ Electronic expansion valve for main (Y1E)
{ When confirmation of error 3 shows as follows:
→ Electronic expansion valve for subcooling (Y3E)
{ Explanation of “ ” Master unit
Slave unit 1
Slave unit 2
System
The connector of
outside unit main PCB (A1P) for NO
Ensure correct connection.
electronic expansion valve is
connected.
YES
The coil resistance NO

of electronic expansion valve Replace the electronic
is normal.(∗1) expansion valve coil.
YES
Replace the outside unit main
PCB (A1P).

Note: ∗1: Coil check method for the electronic expansion valve
Discount the electronic expansion valve from the PCB and check the continuity between the
connector pins.
(Normal)
Pin No. 1. White 2. Yellow 3. Orange 4. Blue 5. Red 6. Brown
1. White × { × { ×
Approx. Approx.
300 Ω 150 Ω
2. Yellow × { × {
Approx. Approx.
300 Ω 150 Ω
3. Orange × { ×
Approx.
150 Ω
4. Blue × {
Approx.
150 Ω
5. Red ×
6. Brown
{: Continuity
× : No continuity
1 White
White (1) 2 Yellow

φ1
Red (5) M
φ3 3 Orange
Orange (3)
4 Blue
φ2 φ4
Yellow Brown Blue 5 Red

(2) (6) (4)
6 Brown

2.27 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality

Remote F3
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error The error is detected according to the temperature detected by the discharge pipe thermistor.
Detection
Error Decision When the discharge pipe temperature rises to an abnormally high level (135°C or more)
Conditions When the discharge pipe temperature rises suddenly (120°C or more continues 10 minutes)
Supposed Defective discharge pipe thermistor

Causes Defective outside unit main PCB (A1P)
Discharge pipe abnormality

Troubleshooting
Connect the service checker.

Reset the operation and start
operation again.
Is the discharge NO
pipe thermistor Replace the discharge pipe
property normal? thermistor.
(∗1)
YES
Service Checker
Connect the service checker to compare the
temperature of discharge pipe by using service
checker with actual measurement value of discharge
pipe thermistor. CHECK 11
Is the temperature
of discharge pipe by
using service NO
checker same with Replace the outside unit
actual measurement main PCB (A1P).
value of discharge
pipe thermistor?
YES
· Discharge pipe thermistor is normal and the

temperature detection of the outside unit main PCB
is also normal.
· Actually the temperature of discharge pipe is high.
CHECK 3 Remove the factor of overheat operation.
Note: ∗1: Compare the resistance value of discharge pipe thermistor and the value based on the
surface thermometer.

2.28 Refrigerant Overcharged

Remote F6
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error The error is detected according to the temperature detected by the discharge pipe temperature
Detection during check operation
Error Decision When the discharge pipe temperature drops during check operation
Conditions
Supposed Refrigerant overcharge

Causes Defective discharge pipe thermistor

Troubleshooting
Check the mounting condition

of the suction pipe thermistor
and the subcooling heat
exchanger outlet thermistor
mounted to piping.
Is the thermistor NO
mounted properly? Mount the thermistor properly
before operation.
YES
Remove the suction pipe

thermistor and the subcooling
heat exchanger outlet
thermistor from the outside
unit main PCB and measure
the resistance with a tester.
Is it normal? NO
Replace the thermistor if it
CHECK 11 functions abnormally before
operation.
YES
Carry out check operation again.
NO
Error is displayed Continue the operation.
again?
YES
There is a possibility that there are other causes of
refrigerant overfilling.
CHECK 5 : Remove the causes of wet operation.


(BSQ100/160/250AV1, BS4/6/8/10/12/16Q14AV1 only)
Error Code F9
Applicable BS unit
Models
Method of Error This error is detected by whether or not all coils of the electronic expansion valve have
Detection continuity.
Error Decision When the power supply turns ON, there is no currents pass through the common (COM[+]).
Conditions
Supposed Connector disconnected from the electronic expansion valve

Causes Defective electronic expansion valve coil
Defective PCB of BS unit
Troubleshooting
Turn power supply OFF, and

turn power supply ON again.
YES
Return to normal? External factor other than
error (for example, noise
NO etc.).
While in monitor mode, identify an electronic expansion valve

subject to the Error Code F9.
{ When Check 4 is set as shown below:
Check 3 Check 4
→ Electronic expansion valve (Y2E)
The connector
of outdoor unit PCB for NO
electronic expansion valve Ensure the correct
is connected. connection.
YES
The coil
resistance of electronic NO
expansion valve is normal. Replace the electronic
(∗1) expansion valve coil.
YES
Replace the BS unit
PCB.
Note: ∗1. Procedure for checking the electronic expansion valve for the drive unit coil.
Disconnect the electronic expansion valve connector (X7A) from the PCB, and then make
measurement of resistance and check for continuity between the connector pins to make
judgement.

2.30 Water System Abnormality

Remote HJ
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Detect abnormalities using the thermistor on the heat exchanger gas side.
Detection Detect turned OFF interlock circuit.
(When interlock setting is provided.)
Error Decision When temperature on the heat exchanger gas side (R4T) drops remarkably with the
Conditions minimum operation step (52 Hz) of the compressor
With interlock setting provided, when interlock circuit is turned OFF
Supposed Clogged water piping system

Causes Insufficient heat exchanger water
Dirty heat exchanger
Disconnected connector
Defective thermistor on the heat exchanger gas side
Defective low pressure sensor

Troubleshooting
Clogged
water piping
system (contamination YES
Remove the clog.
by foreign matter,
solenoid valve for
water use)
NO
Is the
amount of water
NO
of heat exchanger 50 l/ Secure enough water.
minute or more?
YES
Is the heat YES

exchanger dirty? Clean the heat exchanger.
NO
Is the
connection
between the
thermistor on the heat NO
exchanger gas side (R4T) and Connect the connector properly.
the low pressure sensor
(S1NPL)
proper?
YES
Are
characteristics
of the thermistor on
the heat exchanger gas side NO
(R4T) and the low pressure sensor Replace the thermistor/sensor if
(S1NPL) normal? any of its characteristics are
CHECK 11 abnormal.
YES
Is the coil of YES

compressor broken? Replace the inverter compressor.
NO
The
power transistor is
NO
normal? Replace the inverter PCB (A2P)
CHECK 4 concerned.
YES
Connect the relay cable to the
compressor, and the restart
the operation.
Error is displayed NO
again? Continue the operation.
YES
main PCB (A1P).

2.31 Thermistor System Abnormality

Remote J3, J4, J5, J7, J9
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error The error is detected according to the temperature detected by each individual thermistor.
Detection
Error Decision When thermistor is disconnected or short-circuited during operation

Conditions
Supposed Defective thermistor

Causes Defective connection of thermistor
Troubleshooting
Check connectors for thermistor.
NO Connect correctly.
Is it normal?
YES
CHECK 11
Remove thermistor from outside
unit main PCB, then measure
the resistance using a tester.
NO Replace the thermistor.

Is it normal?
YES

PCB (A1P).
Error Code Defective Thermistor Electric Symbol Connector

J3 Discharge pipe thermistor R3T X34A
J4 Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor R4T X37A
J5 Suction pipe thermistor R2T X37A
J7 Receiver outlet liquid pipe thermistor R6T X37A
J9 Subcooling heat exchanger outlet pipe thermistor R5T X37A

2.32 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality

Remote JA
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error The error is detected from the pressure detected by the high pressure sensor.
Detection
Error Decision When the high pressure sensor is short-circuit or open circuit
Conditions (Not less than 4.22 MPa or 0.01 MPa or less)
Supposed Defective high pressure sensor

Causes Connection of low pressure sensor with wrong connection
Defective connection of high pressure sensor

Troubleshooting
1. Mount the high pressure

gauge.
2. Connect the checker for
VRV.
CHECK 12
Are the
characteristics of the
high pressure sensor NO
normal? (Make a comparison Replace the high pressure sensor.
between the voltage
characteristics and
the gauge
pressure.)
YES
CHECK 12
Is the PCB
pressure detection
normal? (Make a NO
comparison between the Replace the outside unit main
checker pressure data and PCB (A1P).
the voltage
characteristics.)
YES
Reset the operation, and then
restart the outside unit.
Are the
Replace the high pressure sensor.
high pressure sensor
normal?
YES
PCB (A1P).

2.33 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality

Remote JC
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error The error is detected from pressure detected by low pressure sensor.
Detection
Error Decision When the low pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit
Conditions (Not less than 1.77 MPa or –0.01 MPa or less)
Supposed Defective low pressure sensor

Causes Connection of high pressure sensor with wrong connection
Defective connection of low pressure sensor

Troubleshooting
1. Mount the low pressure

gauge.
2. Connect the checker for
VRV.
CHECK 12
Are the
characteristics of
the low pressure
sensor normal? (Make a NO
Replace the low pressure sensor.
comparison between the
voltage characteristics
and the gauge
pressure.)
YES
CHECK 12
Is the PCB
pressure detection
normal? (Make a NO
comparison between the Replace the outside unit main
checker pressure data and PCB (A1P).
the voltage
characteristics.)
YES
Reset the operation, and then
restart the outside unit.
Are the
Replace the low pressure sensor.
low pressure sensor
normal?
YES
PCB (A1P).

2.34 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality

Remote L4
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Radiation of compressor inverter PCB

Detection Fin temperature is detected by the radiation fin thermistor
Error Decision When the temperature of the inverter radiation fin increases above 87°C
Conditions
Supposed Actuation of fin thermal (Actuates above 87°C)

Causes Defective inverter PCB
Defective radiation fin thermistor
Troubleshooting
The radiation
fin of the inverter PCB YES
concerned exceeded Defective radiation from the power unit
a temperature of • Blocked air suction port
87°C. • Stained radiation fin
• High outdoor air temperature
NO
Turn OFF the power supply,
and then make measurement
of resistance of the radiation
fin thermistor.
resistance normal? Replace the thermistor.
CHECK 11
YES
Connect and disconnect the
connector (X111A) for the
radiation fin thermistor, and
then properly connect it.
Error is
displayed again when YES
the power supply Replace the inverter PCB.
turns ON to start the
compressor?
NO
Continue the operation.
z It is supposed that the radiation
fin temperature became high due
to some field factors. In this
connection, check the following
points:
• Stained radiation fin
• Airflow obstructed with dirt or
foreign matter
• Damage to fan impellers
• Too high outdoor air
temperature

2.35 Momentary Overcurrent of Inverter Compressor

Remote L5
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Error is detected from current (32 A) flowing in the power transistor
Detection
Error Decision When an excessive current flows in the power transistor

Conditions
Supposed Defective compressor coil (disconnected, defective insulation)

Causes Compressor startup error (mechanical lock)

Troubleshooting Compressor inspection

NO
Is the stop valve open? Open the stop valve.
YES
Are the
compressor lead NO
Replace the compressor
wires normal?
lead wires.
YES
Are the wiring

and connection to the NO
Correct the wiring and
compressor
normal? connection.
YES
Power OFF
Is the
insulation resistance YES
of the compressor 100 kΩ Replace the inverter
or less? compressor.
NO
Compressor YES
coils are disconnected. Replace the inverter
compressor.
NO
CHECK 4 NO
Is the power transistor Replace the inverter PCB
normal? (A2P).
YES
Failure occurs NO
Power ON again after restarting the Continue the operation.
unit. (
YES
(Momentary power failure
is possible.
Replace the inverter PCB

Power OFF
(A2P).
Power ON Failure occurs NO

again after restarting the Continue the operation.
unit.
YES
Replace the inverter

compressor.

2.36 Overcurrent Abnormality of Inverter Compressor

Remote L8
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Error is detected from the current flowing in the power transistor
Detection
Error Decision When the inverter secondary current value is below

Conditions (1) 17 A or more continues for 5 seconds
(2) 14.5 A or more continues for 260 seconds
Supposed Compressor overload

Causes Compressor coil disconnected
Defective wiring to the compressor

Troubleshooting Output current check


open?
YES
Are the
compressor NO
lead wires Replace the compressor
normal? lead wires.
YES
Are the wiring

and connection to NO
the compressor Correct the wiring and
normal? connection.
YES
Power OFF
Is the insulation
resistance of the YES
Replace the inverter
compressor 100 kΩ compressor.
or less?
NO
Compressor coils YES

are disconnected. Replace the inverter
compressor.
NO
CHECK 4 NO
Is the power transistor Replace the inverter
normal? PCB (A2P).
YES
Connect the compressor lead

wires then restart the operation.
Error is displayed NO
again?
YES
Is the
pressure difference
between high pressure and NO
low pressure before Defective pressure
restarting 0.2 MPa equalizing in the
or below? refrigerant circuit.
YES
Inspection of the
compressor.

2.37 Inverter Compressor Startup Abnormality

Remote L9
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Error is detected based on the signal waveform of the compressor
Detection
Error Decision Starting the compressor does not complete

Conditions
Supposed Stop valve is not opened

Causes Defective compressor
Wiring connection error to the compressor
Large pressure difference before startup the compressor
Troubleshooting
Is it the initial time to NO Go on to the next page.

start after installation? (Starting error due to aged operation.)
YES
Is a right amount of NO
Charge a right amount of
refrigerant charged? refrigerant.
YES

opened?
YES
Refrigerant
is melting in refrigerant
oil. (The unit is out of YES
Cancel the melting state of
power supply for more refrigerant.
than 6 hours.)
NO
Is the
insulation resistance of NO
the compressor more Cancel the melting state of
than 100 kΩ? refrigerant.
YES
Are the compressor lead YES

Fix the compressor lead wire.
wires disconnected?
NO
Correct the wiring then supply the
power to restart.

Troubleshooting
Continued from the previous page.

(Starting error due to aged operation.)
Refrigerant
is melting in refrigerant NO
oil. (The unit is out of Cancel the melting state of
power supply for more refrigerant.
than 6 hours.)
YES
Is the insulation
resistance of the NO
Replace the inverter compressor.
compressor 100 kΩ
or more?
YES
Broken wire inside YES

the compressor Replace the inverter compressor.
NO
CHECK 4
Check if the NO
Replace the inverter PCB (A2P).
power transistor
is normal.
YES
Recheck the compressor/

refrigerant circuit.

2.38 Transmission Error (between Inverter PCB and Outside

Unit Main PCB)
Remote LC
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Check the communication state between inverter PCB and outside unit main PCB by micro-
Detection computer.
Error Decision When the transmission is not carried out in a specified period of time or longer
Conditions
Supposed Incorrect transmission wiring between the inverter PCB and outside unit main PCB
Causes Defective outside unit main PCB (transmission section)
Defective noise filter
External factor (Noise, etc.)
Defective inverter compressor
Defective fan motor

Troubleshooting
Are the
connectors of the
outside unit main PCB and NO
inverter PCB all securely Properly connect the connectors.
connected?
(∗1)
YES
Is the type of the NO

inverter PCB correct? Replace it with a correct PCB.
YES
The
inverter compressor YES
has insulation resistance of not Replace the inverter compressor
more than 100 kΩ. (M1C).
NO
The fan
motor has insulation YES
resistance of not more Replace the fan motor.
than 1 MΩ.
NO
The
micro-computer
normal monitor (green) NO
of the outside unit main PCB Not the LC error. Check the error
(A1P) is blinking. code again.
YES
The micro-
computer normal NO
monitor (green) of the Replace the inverter PCB (A2P).
inverter PCB (A2P) is
blinking.
YES
Error is displayed YES

again? PCB (A1P).
NO
(It is supposed that the error
results from causes such as
instantaneous power failure.)
Note: ∗1: Disconnect the connector once, then reconnect it and check that it is securely connected.

2.39 Inverter Over-Ripple Protection

Remote P1
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Imbalance in supply voltage is detected in PCB.

Detection
Error Decision When the amplitude of the ripple exceeding 6V is detected

Conditions Error is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
P1 will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
Supposed Open phase

Causes Voltage imbalance between phases
Defective main circuit capacitor
Defective K1M
Improper main circuit wiring

Troubleshooting
Imbalance in
supplied voltage is YES YES
Open phase? Open phase
in excess of 6 V. Normalize the field cause.
(∗1)
NO NO
Repair power supply
voltage imbalance.
Is the voltage
imbalance applied YES
to the inverter in Parts or wiring defect
excess of 6 V? After turning the power supply
(∗2) OFF, check and repair the
main circuit wiring or parts.
NO (1) Loose or disconnected
<When voltage monitoring is possible:> wiring between power
supply and inverter
(2) K1M contact disposition,
Using a device capable of fusion or contact is poor.
constant recording of power (3) Loose or disconnected
supply voltage record power noise filter
supply voltage between 3
phases (R-S, S-T, R-T) for
about 1 continuous week.
No abnormalities are Power supply voltage imbalance.

observed in the power Even if the power supply voltage is not
supply, but the imbalance unbalanced when measuring it, there are
in voltage recurs. many cases where it gets unbalanced during
night-time (around 6:00PM to 10:00PM).
measure
Replace the inverter PCB.
Explanation for users ∗In accordance with "notification of inspection results" accompanying spare parts.
Be sure to explain to the user that
Give the user a copy of "notification of inspection results" and leave there is a "power supply imbalance"
it up to him to improve the imbalance. for which DAIKIN is not responsible.
Note: ∗1: Measure voltage at the X1M power supply terminal block.
∗2: Measure voltage at terminals R, S and T of the diode module inside the inverter PCB while
the compressor is running.

2.40 Inverter Radiation Fin Thermistor Abnormality

Remote P4
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Radiation fin thermistor resistance is detected when compressor stops.
Detection
Error Decision When the resistance value of thermistor becomes a value equivalent to open or short-circuited
Conditions status
Error is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
P4 will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
Supposed Defective radiation fin thermistor

Causes Defective inverter PCB
Defective inverter compressor
Defective fan motor
Troubleshooting
Measure resistance value of

the radiation fin thermistor.
resistance value Replace the inverter
normal? PCB (A2P).
YES
The inverter YES

compressor's insulation
resistance is not more Replace the inverter
than 100 kΩ. compressor (M1C).
NO
The fan motor's YES

insulation resistance is Replace the fan motor.
not more than
1 MΩ.
NO
Error is displayed YES

again when the power Replace the inverter
supply turns ON? PCB (A2P).
NO

2.41 Defective Field Setting after Replacing Outside Unit

Main PCB or Defective Combination of PCB
Remote PJ
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error This error is detected according to communications with the inverter PCB.
Detection
Error Decision Make judgement according to communication data on whether or not the type of the inverter
Conditions PCB is correct.
Supposed Mis-matching of type of PCB

Causes Improper (or no) field setting after replacing outside unit main PCB
Troubleshooting
Is the
type of the inverter NO
PCB (A2P) correct? Replace it with the
correct inverter PCB.
YES
Is the type
of the inverter PCB NO
Replace it with the
(A2P) correct? correct inverter PCB.
YES
Is the setting of
DIP switches when the outside NO
Set the DIP switches
unit main PCB is replaced correctly.
correct? (After setting: Reset the
YES power supply)
Does the
preparation indication lamp NO
(H2P) on the outside unit main Rectify the connection
PCB turn OFF? wiring.
YES
Replace the outside
unit main PCB (A1P).

2.42 Refrigerant Shortage

Remote U0
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Detect refrigerant shortage based on the temperature difference between low pressure
Detection equivalent saturation temperature or suction pipe and heat exchanger temperature.
Error Decision In cooling

Conditions Low pressure becomes 0.1 MPa or less
In heating
The degree of superheat of suction gas becomes 20°C or more
SH = Ts1 – Te
Ts1: Temperature detected by suction pipe thermistor
∗ Error is not determined while the unit continues operation.
Supposed Refrigerant shortage and refrigerant clogging (wrong piping)

Causes Defective thermistor (R2T, R4T)
Defective low pressure sensor

Troubleshooting
(1) Mount a pressure gauge at the service port on the low

pressure side.
(2) Reset the operation using the remote controller then restart.
Is the
Is the low pressure NO characteristics of NO
0.1 MPa or less? (∗1) low pressure sensor Replace the low pressure
normal? (∗2) sensor.
YES YES

main PCB (A1P).
Remove the factor of
decreasing low pressure.
CHECK 2
In heating
Reset the operation using the remote controller then restart.
Is the Are the

temperature property of suction pipe
difference between the suction NO NO
thermistor (R2T) and heat exchanger Replace the thermistor.
pipe and the heat exchanger thermistor (R4T) normal?
20 ˚C or more?
(∗3)
YES YES

PCB (A1P).
Remove the factor of

superheating.
CHECK 3
Note: ∗1: Check the low pressure value by using pressure gauge in operation.
∗2: Compare the actual measurement value by pressure sensor with the value by the pressure
gauge.
(To gain actual measurement value by pressure sensor, measure the voltage at the
connector [between (2)-(3)] and then convert the value into pressure referring to page 211.)
∗3: Compare the thermistor resistance value with the value on the surface thermometer.

2.43 Reverse Phase, Open Phase

Remote U1
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error The phase of each phase are detected by reverse phase detection circuit and right phase or
Detection reverse phase are judged.
Error Decision When a power supply is reverse phase, or T phase is open phase
Conditions
Supposed Power supply reverse phase

Causes T phase open phase
Troubleshooting
There
is an open
phase at the power YES
supply (T phase) terminal Fix the open phase. Requires
section (X1M) of the inspection of field power supply
outside unit. section.
NO
Operation is
normal if one place of YES
power supply line phase Reverse phase.
is replaced. Countermeasure of the problem is
completed by phase replacement.
NO
Replace the outside unit PCB
(A1P).

2.44 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Failure

Remote U2
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Detection of voltage of main circuit capacitor built in the inverter PCB and power supply voltage
Detection
Error Decision When the voltage aforementioned is 190 V or less.

Conditions
Supposed Power supply insufficient

Causes Instantaneous power failure
Open phase
Defective K1M
Defective main circuit wiring

Troubleshooting
Check if power NO
supply voltage is 200 to Correct the power
240 V? supply voltage.
YES
Is the
resistance between
NO Replace the inverter PCB
terminals P and N more
than hundreds of (A2P).
ohms?
YES
Turn ON again.
Measure the voltage between

terminals P and N of power
module when the compressor
is running.
The voltage is NO
Replace the inverter PCB
190 V or more. (A2P).
YES
Check the connection wiring.

• X4A (A2P) ↔ X25A (A1P)
• X8A (A2P) ↔ X21A (A1P)
Is the YES
connection wiring Replace the connection
defective? wire.
NO
To diagnosis error
code P1.

2.45 Check Operation Not Executed

Remote U3
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Check operation is executed or not executed.

Detection
Error Decision The error is decided when the unit starts operation without check operation.
Conditions
Supposed Check operation is not executed.

Causes
Troubleshooting
Has the
check operation NO
Press the BS4 on PCB on the
performed? master outside unit for 5 seconds
or more to execute check
YES operation.
Perform the check operation again

and complete the check operation.

2.46 Transmission Error (between Indoor and Outside Units)

Remote U4
Controller
Display

Models RWEYQ8/10P
Method of Error Micro-computer checks if transmission between indoor and outside units is normal.
Detection
Error Decision When transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Conditions
Supposed Indoor to outside, outside to outside transmission wiring F1, F2 disconnection, short circuit
Causes or wrong wiring
Outside unit power supply is OFF
System address does not match

Troubleshooting
Check if
indoor unit
PCB or outside unit
PCB has been replaced. YES
Or check if indoor-outside, Press the RESET button on the
outside-outside outside unit main PCB of the
transmission wires master outside unit. Keep
has been pressing for 5 seconds or more.
modified.
(Operation does not start for a
maximum 12 minutes.)
NO
Do all
the indoor Are the
remote controllers indoor-outside,
NO outside-outside YES
within the same Replace the indoor unit PCB.
refrigerant circuit transmission wires
display U4? normal?
YES NO
Correct the transmission wires.
Reset the power supply.
Does Is the
the normal
condition monitor for NO voltage between NO
the micro-computer (HAP) R, S terminals on the Correct the voltage (220-240 V).
on the outside unit outside unit PCB
PCB blink? 220-240 V?
YES YES
Does
the LED in
preparation mode NO Is the fuse on the YES
(H2P) on the outside outside unit PCB Replace the fuse.
unit PCB blink? blown?
YES NO
The
secondary voltage NO
of the transformer is Replace the transformer.
about 22 V.
YES
PCB (A1P).
Lights
do not go out YES
for 12 minutes or Press the RESET button on the
more. main PCB of the outside unit main
PCB (A1P). Keep pressing for 5
NO seconds or more.
Are the
indoor-outside, NO
outside-outside Correct the transmission wires.
transmission wires
normal?
YES
PCB (A1P).

2.47 Transmission Error (between Remote Controller and

Indoor Unit)
Remote U5
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Micro-computer checks if transmission between indoor unit and remote controller is normal.
Detection
Error Decision When transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time.
Conditions
Supposed Indoor unit and remote controller transmission error

Causes Connection of 2 main remote controllers (when using 2 remote controllers)
Defective remote controller PCB
Transmission error caused by noise
Troubleshooting
Using 2- YES SS1 of both YES

remote controllers remote controllers is set Set 1 remote controller to
control. to "MAIN." "Sub"; turn OFF the power
supply and then turn the
NO NO power ON.
All indoor unit Operation

NO returns to normal when NO
PCB micro-computer the power is turned OFF Replace the indoor unit
monitors blink. momentarily. PCB.
YES YES
The indoor unit PCB is normal.
Replace the remote controller. There is possibility of error
caused by noise. Check the
surrounding area and turn ON
again.
YES
Is it normal? Normal
NO
YES
Is it normal? Normal
NO
There is possibility of error
caused by noise. Check the
surrounding area and turn ON
again.

2.48 Transmission Error (between Outside Units)

Remote U7
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Micro-computer checks if transmission between outside units is normal.

Detection
Conditions
Supposed Improper connection of transmission wiring between outside unit and external control
Causes adaptor for outside unit.
Improper cool/heat selection
Improper cool/heat unified address (outside unit, external control adaptor for outside unit)
Defective outside unit main PCB (A1P)
Defective external control adaptor for outside unit
Improper connection of transmission wiring between outside units
Defective fuse of outside unit compressor

Troubleshooting
Check the LED lamps for

“Check 3” corresponding
to the error code U7 and
for Check 4 in the monitor
mode.
Check 3 Check 4
Go on to the Diagnosis Flow 1
(Defective transmission caused
when the external control adaptor
for outside unit is mounted)
Check 3 Check 4
(Transmission alarm given when
the external control adaptor for
outside unit is mounted)
Check 3 Check 4
(Abnormal transmission between
the master unit and the slave unit 1)
Check 3 Check 4
(Abnormal transmission between
the master unit and the slave unit 2)
Check 3 Check 4
(Defective auto address of the
slave units 1 and 2)
Check 3 Check 4
(Erroneous manual address
settings of the slave units 1 and 2)
Check 3 Check 4
(Connection of four or more
outside units to the same circuit)

Troubleshooting
Diagnosis Flow 1
Confirmation of error 3 Confirmation of error 4
Check if
any disconnection or
connection error is detected in NO
connecting wires with external Correct the connecting wiring
control adaptor for outside with the external control adaptor
unit. for outside unit.
YES
Check if the normal NO Check if power is NO

condition monitor LED for supplied to the outside Supply the power to the outside
the outside unit main PCB unit.
blinks. units.
YES YES
PCB (A1P).
Check if the
Check if the normal power supply wire for the
condition monitor LED for the NO NO
external control adaptor for Connect the power supply wire
external control adaptor for outside unit is connected to 5 V for the external control adaptor
outside unit blinks. supply line. for outside unit to 5 V supply
line.
YES YES
Replace the PCB of the external
control adaptor for outside unit.

PCB (A1P).

Troubleshooting
Diagnosis Flow 2
NO
Cool/Heat selection C/H SELECT of the external
is unified. control adaptor for outside unit
is set to “IND”.
YES
Setting of C/H SELECT of YES

the external control adaptor The unified addresses for COOL/
for outside unit is “unified HEAT within the outside-outside
MASTER”. transmission are duplicated. Set
the address again.
NO
Setting of C/H SELECT NO

of the external control Replace the outside unit main
adaptor for outside unit PCB.
is “SLAVE”.
YES
Check if the normal

condition monitor NO Check if power is NO
LED for the outside supplied to the Supply the power to the outside
unit main PCB outside unit. unit.
blinks.
YES YES
PCB (A1P).
Check if the normal Check if the power supply

condition monitor LED NO wire for the external NO
for the external control control adaptor for outside Connect the power supply wire
adaptor for outside unit unit is connected to 5 V for the external control adaptor
blinks. supply line. for outside unit to 5 V supply
line.
YES YES
Set the C/H SELECT of the

external control adaptor for NO
Replace the PCB of the external
outside unit to “IND”. Then control adaptor for outside unit.
check if the error occurs
again.
YES
PCB (A1P).

Troubleshooting

Diagnosis Flow 3
Check the
connection status of
connecting wires of the outside multi to NO
SLAVE 1. Check if the wiring is Replace the outside unit main
disconnected or is about to be PCB (A1P) of the SLAVE 1.
disconnected.
YES
Correct the connecting wires of the

outside multi and then reset the
power supply.
Diagnosis Flow 4
Check
the connection status
of connecting wires of the outside NO
multi to SLAVE 2. Check if the wiring is Replace the outside unit main
disconnected or is about to be PCB (A1P) of the SLAVE 2.
disconnected.
YES
Correct the connecting wires of

the outside multi and then reset
the power supply.
Diagnosis Flow 5
Check the
connection status of the
connecting wires of outside multi. Check NO
if the wiring has any connection error Replace the outside unit main
or broken, or is about to be PCB (A1P).
disconnected.
YES

power supply.

Troubleshooting

Diagnosis Flow 6
Check
the connection
status of one of the connecting NO
wires of outside multi. Check if Replace the outside unit main
the wiring is broken or PCB (A1P).
disconnected.
YES
power supply.
Diagnosis Flow 7
In the
connection status NO
of the outside multi, check if Replace the outside unit main
more than 4 outside units
are connected. PCB (A1P).
YES

power supply.

2.49 Transmission Error (between Main and Sub Remote

Controllers)
Remote U8
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error In case of controlling with 2-remote controller, check the system using micro-computer if signal
Detection transmission between indoor unit and remote controller (main and sub) is normal.
Conditions
Supposed Transmission error between main and sub remote controller

Causes Connection between sub remote controllers
Defective remote controller PCB
Troubleshooting
Using 2-remote NO SS1 of remote NO

controllers control. controller PCB is set to Set SS1 to "MAIN"; the
"MAIN." power supply OFF once and
then back ON.
YES YES
SS1 of both remote NO

controllers is set to Turn OFF the power and
"SUB." then turn ON the power. If
an error occurs, replace the
YES remote controller PCB.
Set 1 remote controller to
"MAIN"; the power supply
OFF once and then back
ON.

2.50 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit and Outside

Unit in the Same System)
Remote U9
Controller
Display

Models RWEYQ8/10P
Method of Error Detect the error signal for the other indoor units within the circuit by outside unit PCB.
Detection
Error Decision When the error decision is made on any other indoor unit within the system concerned.
Conditions
Supposed Transmission error within or outside of other system

Causes Defective electronic expansion valve in indoor unit of other system
Defective indoor unit PCB in other system
Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor and outside unit
Troubleshooting

Turn ON all indoor units.
All the units are NO Continue the operation.

indicating U9.
YES
U9 has been
displayed for 2 NO Re-diagnose by display
minutes or more. after passage of 2 minutes
or more.
YES
The outside unit PCB

indicated by the error code
U9 is normal.
Check for the indoor unit of
other system, and then
conduct troubleshooting by
diagnosis according to the
Error Code Flowchart.

2.51 Improper Combination of Indoor, BS and Outside Units

Remote UA
Controller
Display

Models BS unit
RWEYQ8/10P
Method of Error A difference occurs in data by the type of refrigerant between indoor, BS and outside units.
Detection The number of indoor units is out of the allowable range.
Signal transmission between indoor, BS and outside units is abnormal.
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as either of the abnormalities aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed Excess of connected indoor units

Causes Defective outside unit main PCB (A1P)
Mismatch of the refrigerant type of indoor and outside unit.
Setting of outside PCB was not carried out after replacing to spare PCB.

Troubleshooting
Check the LED lamps for

“Confirmation of error 3”
corresponding to the error code UA
and for Confirmation of error 4 in the
monitor mode.
Confirmation of Confirmation of
error 3 error 4
To Diagnosis Flow 1
error 3 error 4
To Diagnosis Flow 2
error 3 error 4
To Diagnosis Flow 3
error 3 error 4
To Diagnosis Flow 4
error 3 error 4
To Diagnosis Flow 5
error 3 error 4
To Diagnosis Flow 6

Troubleshooting

Diagnosis Flow 1
error 3 error 4
The
number of
indoor units
connected to the same YES Replace the outside unit main
refrigerant circuit system PCB (A1P).
should not more
than 64
units.
NO
The number of indoor units

exceeds the standard. Check the
connection to correct.
Diagnosis Flow 2
error 3 error 4
Check
if the refrigerant
type of the outside unit YES Replace the outside unit main
corresponds to that of PCB (A1P).
the indoor
unit.
NO
Match the refrigerant types of the

outside unit and the indoor unit.

Troubleshooting
Diagnosis Flow 3
error 3 error 4
Check if the Check if

outside unit PCB is NO the unit is not NO
connected to outside units Replace the outside unit main
replaced with spare
of different PCB (A1P).
PCB.
models.
YES YES
Check the model of the

outside unit.
Is the setting of spare NO

Correct the setting to reset
PCB correct? the power.
YES
Replace the spare PCB.
Diagnosis Flow 4
error 3 error 4
Is the wiring
between the outside NO Correct the wiring.
unit and BS unit
correct?
YES

main PCB (A1P).

Troubleshooting

Diagnosis Flow 5
error 3 error 4
Is the wiring
NO Correct the wiring.
between the BS units
correct?
YES
Replace the BS unit PCB.
Diagnosis Flow 6
error 3 error 4
Is the wiring
NO Correct the wiring.
between the indoor and BS
unit correct?
YES
Replace the indoor unit PCB or

BS unit PCB.

2.52 Address Duplication of Centralized Control Equipment

Remote UC
Controller
Display

Models Centralized remote controller
Method of Error The principal indoor unit detects the same address as that of its own on any other indoor unit.
Detection
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed Address duplication of centralized control equipment

Troubleshooting

The centralized address is Make setting change so that the

duplicated. centralized address will not be
duplicated.

2.53 Transmission Error (between Centralized Control

Equipment and Indoor Unit)
Remote UE
Controller
Display

Models intelligent Touch Controller
Centralized remote controller
Schedule timer
Method of Error Micro-computer checks if transmission between indoor unit and centralized control equipment is
Detection normal.
Conditions
Supposed Transmission error between optional controllers for centralized control and indoor unit
Causes Connector for setting main controller is disconnected.
(or disconnection of connector for independent/combined use changeover switch.)
Defective PCB for centralized remote controller

Troubleshooting
Check
the indoor unit for
which UE is displayed. Is YES
the transmission error UE Continued to A (on the
caused on all indoor following page)
units?
NO
Is the
power supply of
the indoor unit on which NO Make sure there are no
the UE occurred, hazardous situations, and then
turned ON? turn the power ON.
YES
Has the
setting of
centralized control group NO Can the setting of YES
No. been made with the indoor centralized control group Make correct setting of the
unit on which the UE No. be made? centralized control group No.
occurred?
YES NO
For
VRV
systems, can the
setting of centralized NO
control group No. be made in Check outside units to which
one and the same the refrigerant system is
refrigerant connected.
system?
Was the
YES
centralized control NO
group No. for indoor unit Check whether or not there are
changed? no problems with the
transmission wiring length,
branch numbers, types of
YES cables and wires, number of
units connected, and others. If
no problems, replace the indoor
unit PCB.
Reset the power supplies of

every centralized control
equipment.
For the intelligent Touch
controller, register the air
conditioner again while in DIII-
NET test operation menu.

Check the
transmission
wiring between
centralized control
equipment for any broken wire. Abnormal Correct the wiring.
For details, refer to information
in the “Procedure for
checking broken
wires”
section.
Normal
Check the
transmission
wiring between main
centralized controller for
any broken wire. For details, Abnormal Correct the wiring.
refer to information in the
"Procedure for
checking broken
wires"
section.
Normal
Has the
main centralized NO
controller setting connector Correct the connection of the
been connected? connector.
YES
Disconnect the transmission

wiring of the main centralized
control equipment, and then
check the voltage between
the transmission terminals
(F1 and F2) of the main unit
transmission equipment using
a tester.
Is the
voltage between
the terminals F1 (+) and NO Replace the centralized control
F2 (-) in the range of equipment.
15.2 to 17.6
VDC?
YES
Centralized control equipment:

Normal
It is supposed that the error

results from external factors
(e.g. noises) from other
equipment.

2.54 System Not Set

Remote UF
Controller
Display

Models RWEYQ8/10P
Method of Error On check operation, the number of indoor units in terms of transmission is not corresponding to
Detection that of indoor units that have made changes in temperature.
Error Decision The error is determined as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected through
Conditions checking the system for any erroneous connection of units on the check operation.
Supposed Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor-outside units and outside-
Causes outside units
Failure to execute check operation
Stop valve is not opened
Troubleshooting
Are the stop NO Open the stop valve.

valves opened?
YES
Is indoor-
Is the check operation NO outside and outside- YES
carried out? outside unit transmission
wiring normal?
YES NO
Is indoor -
outside and outside - NO
outside unit transmission After fixing the incorrect wiring,
wiring normal? press the RESET button on the
master outside unit main PCB
(A1P) for 5 seconds.
YES ∗ The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
Wiring check operation may not

have been carried out
successfully.

2.55 System Error, Refrigerant System Address Undefined

Remote UH
Controller
Display

Models RWEYQ8/10P
Method of Error Detect an indoor unit with no auto address setting.

Detection
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor-outside units and outside-
Causes outside units

Troubleshooting
Is Does
electricity being an error occur
introduce for the first even after 12 minutes
time after installation or after YES elapses from the time when NO Normal
an indoor or outside unit electricity is introduced to
PCB has been indoor and outside
replaced? units?
YES
NO
Is indoor - outside
and outside - outside unit NO After fixing the incorrect wiring,
transmission wiring press the RESET button on the
normal? (∗1) master outside unit PCB for 5
seconds.
YES ∗ The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
Press the RESET button on

the outside unit main PCB
for 5 seconds.
Error is displayed NO Normal

again?
YES
Disconnect the
outside-outside unit
transmission wiring to YES Install the DIII-NET extension
create the one-system status,
adaptor.
and then check whether
or not the system
is normal.
NO
Does a UH
error occur for all indoor NO Replace the indoor unit PCB.
units in the system?
YES

PCB (A1P).
Note: ∗1: Check the correct wiring “indoor-outside” and “outside-outside” by Installation Manual.
∗2: What is Auto Address?
This is the address automatically assigned to indoor units and outside units after initial
power supply upon installation, or after executing rewiring (Keep pressing the RESET
button for more than 4 seconds).

2.56 Check
CHECK 1 Check for causes of rise in high pressure
Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the defective points.
Stop valve closed ← Check to be sure the stop valve is open.

Local
pressure High pipe Bent or crashed pipe ← Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
rise resistance
Clogging of foreign ← Is there any temperature difference caused
particles before and after the filter or branch pipe.
[In cooling]
If the outside unit electronic Defective outside Defective valve coil ← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
expansion valve is throttled: unit electronic
(See ∗1.) expansion valve
Defective valve body
A temperature difference in excess of 10°C between the
Rise in high inlet and the outlet is deemed to be abnormal.
pressure Defective high pressure sensor ← Are the electrical characteristics normal?
Defective
control
Defective outside unit main PCB ← Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Defective high corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
pressure Defective valve coil ← Are the coil resistance and insulation
control Defective indoor
unit electronic normal?
expansion valve Defective valve body
Defective high pressure sensor ← Are the electrical characteristics normal?

[In heating]
If the indoor unit electronic Defective Defective indoor unit ← Is the connector properly connected?
control liquid pipe thermistor Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
expansion valve is excessively
throttled: ← Is the pressure value checked with the
(See ∗2.) Defective outside unit main PCB Service Checker corresponding to the
measurement of the pressure sensor?
[In cooling] Short circuit ← Is the suction air temperature not more
High suction air than 43°C?
temperature of
High suction indoor unit ← Is the outdoor air temperature not more
High outdoor air temperature
air than 43°C?
temperature
of the High suction air Short circuit ← Is the suction air temperature not more
condenser temperature of than 27°C?
indoor unit High outdoor air temperature ← Is the indoor temperature not more than 27°C?
← Is the connector properly connected?
Defective suction air thermistor of indoor unit Are the thermistor resistance
[In heating] characteristics normal?
High suction air temperature of outside unit ← Is the outdoor air temperature not more
than 16°CWB?
Defective outdoor air temperature thermistor of outside unit ← Is the connector properly connected?
Are the thermistor resistance
characteristics normal?
Degradation in
condensing
Dirty condenser ← Is the heat exchanger clogged? (In cooling)
capacity
Mixing of non-condensable gas ← Is air or else mixed in the refrigerant system?
Defective ← Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?

fan motor Are the motor coil resistance and
Decreased
fan output insulation normal?
Decreased Defective outside
fan airflow unit main PCB
rate ← If a spare PCB is mounted, is the capacity
(Including setting properly made?
capacity setting)
High air Dirty filter ← Is the air filter clogged?

passage
resistance
Obstacle ← Is there any obstacle in the air passage?
Refrigerant overcharge ← Refer to F6 troubleshooting.

← Is the indoor unit too small compared to
Improper model selection [In heating] the large-sized outside unit?
Note: ∗1: In cooling, it is normal if the outside unit electronic expansion valve is fully open.
∗2: In heating, the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for “subcooled degree control”.
(For details, refer to “Electronic Expansion Valve Control”.)

CHECK 2 Check for causes of drop in low pressure

Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the defective points.
[In cooling]
(See ∗1.) Defective low pressure sensor ← Are the electrical characteristics normal?
Defective
Defective low compressor ← Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
pressure capacity Defective outside unit main PCB corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
control control
Defective low pressure sensor ← Are the electrical characteristics normal?
Defective low
pressure Defective hot gas solenoid valve ← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
[In both cooling protection control
and heating] ← Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Defective outside unit main PCB corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
(See ∗2.) Defective indoor
Abnormally low [In cooling] ← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
low-pressure (Low unit electronic Defective valve coil
evaporating If the indoor unit expansion valve
temperature) electronic Defective valve body
expansion valve is
excessively Defective gas pipe ← Check for the thermistor resistance and
throttled: (See ∗3.) thermistor of indoor unit connection.
Defective
control
Defective electronic Defective liquid pipe ← Check for the thermistor resistance and
expansion valve thermistor of indoor unit connection.
control ← Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Defective outside unit main PCB corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
Defective outside Defective valve coil ← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
unit electronic
[In heating]
If the outside unit Defective low pressure sensor ← Are the electrical characteristics normal?
electronic
expansion valve Defective
excessively control
Defective suction pipe thermistor ← Check for the thermistor resistance and
throttled: connection.
(See ∗4.) Defective outside unit main PCB
[In cooling]
Low suction air Short circuit ← Is the suction air temperature not less than 14°C?
temperature of
indoor unit Low outdoor air temperature ← Is the indoor temperature not more than 14°C?
Low suction
air Defective suction air thermistor of indoor unit ← Is the connector properly connected?
temperature Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
of the
evaporator Low suction air temperature of outside unit ← Is the outdoor air temperature more than -20°C?
← Is the connector properly connected?
Defective outdoor air temperature thermistor of outside unit Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
[In heating]
Abnormal piping length ← Does the piping length fall in the permissible range?
High pipe Bent or crashed pipe ← Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
resistance
Clogging of foreign particles ← Is there any temperature difference caused
before and after the filter or branch pipe?
Stop valve closed ← Check to be sure the stop valve is open.
Less
circulation
quantity of Inadequate refrigerant quantity ← Refer to CHECK 7
refrigerant
Moisture choke ← Eliminate moisture by vacuum operation.
Dirty evaporator ← Is the heat exchanger clogged?

Degradation
in condensing Defective fan motor ← Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?
capacity Decreased Are the motor coil resistance and insulation normal?
fan output
Decreased Defective outside unit main ← If a spare PCB is mounted, is the
fan airflow PCB (Including capacity setting) capacity setting properly made?
rate High air
passage Dirty filter ← Is the air filter clogged?
resistance
Obstacle ← Is there any obstacle in the air passage?
Note: ∗1: For details of the compressor capacity control while in cooling, refer to “Compressor PI Control”.
∗2: The “low pressure protection control” includes low pressure protection control and hot gas bypass control.
∗3: In cooling, the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for “superheated degree control”.
∗4: In heating, the outside unit electronic expansion valve (EVM) is used for “superheated degree control of outside heat
exchanger”.

CHECK 3 Check the Factors of Overheat Operation

Identify the defective points referring to the defective factor analysis (FTA) as follows.
Hot gas circuit clogging
Defective hot
gas bypass Defective solenoid ← Check if coil resistance and insulation
control valve coil
are normal.
Defective solenoid
(∗1) valve body
Defective valve coil ← Check if coil resistance and

Subcooling insulation are normal.
Defective electronic Defective valve
discharge [In cooling mode only] expansion body
pipe Defective valve failure Defective low
temperature subcooling ← Check if the voltage property is
pressure sensor
control electronic normal.
expansion valve Control Defective subcooling
control failure heat exchanger outlet ← Check if the connector is connected properly.
thermistor Check if the thermistor resistance property is
(∗2) normal.
Temperature Defective outside ← Check if the pressure value given by the
increase of unit main PCB service checker corresponding to actual
discharge measurement value by the sensor.
pipe Four way valve is in the
Defective four ← Check if the piping temperature connected
middle position.
way valve to the four way valve is normal.
operation Leak from hot gas bypass
valve
Superheat due to
Compressor shaft damage
overheat Superheat due to
defective compressor
Indoor unit Defective valve coil ← Check if coil resistance and insulation are
electronic expansion normal.
[In cooling mode] valve failure Defective valve body
If the indoor unit
electronic Defective thermistor for ← Check if the connector is connected properly.
expansion valve indoor unit gas pipe Check if the thermistor resistance property is
is excessively
normal.
throttled. (∗3) Defective control
Defective thermistor for
indoor unit liquid pipe ← Check if the connector is connected properly.
Defective Check if the thermistor resistance property is
superheated normal.
degree Defective outside unit main PCB
control.
Outside unit Defective valve coil ← Check if coil resistance and insulation are
electronic expansion normal.
valve failure Defective valve body
[In heading
mode] If the Defective low pressure ← Check if the voltage property is normal.
outside unit sensor
electronic Defective thermistor for
Defective control ← Check if the connector is connected properly.
expansion valve suction pipe Check if the thermistor resistance property is normal.
is excessively
throttled. (∗4) Defective outside unit main PCB ← Check if the pressure value given by the
service checker corresponding to actual
measurement value by the sensor.
Refrigerant ← Refer to CHECK 7
shortage ← Does the piping length fall in the permissible range?
Irregular piping length
Bend/collapse ← Conduct visual checks.
Large resistance ← Remove the moisture by vacuum break. (Refer to CHECK 8 )

of piping (Including moisture choke)
Stop valve is closed. ← Check if the stop valve is open.
Note: ∗1:Refer to “Low pressure protection control” for hot gas bypass control.
∗2: Refer to “Subcooling electronic expansion valve control”.
∗3: “Superheating temperature control” in cooling mode is conducted by indoor unit electronic expansion valve.
∗4: Superheating temperature control in heating mode is conducted by outside unit electronic expansion valve
(EVM).
∗5: Judgement criteria of superheat operation:
(1) Suction gas superheating temperature: 10 degrees and over. (2) Discharge gas superheating
temperature: 45 degrees and over, except for immediately after starting and drooping control, etc..
(Use the above stated values as a guide. Depending on the other conditions, the unit may be normal despite
the values within the above scope.)

CHECK 4 Power Transistor Check

Perform the following procedures prior to check.
(1) Power OFF.
(2) Remove all the wiring connected to the PCB where power transistors are mounted on.
[Preparation] ∗ Preparing a tester in the analog system is recommended.

A tester in the digital system with diode check function will
· Tester
be usable.
[Point of Measurement and Judgement Criteria]

· Measure the resistance value using a tester at each point of measurement below, 10 minutes later after power OFF.
To use analog tester:

Measurement in the resistance value mode in the range of To use digital tester:
multiplying 1 kΩ. Measurement is executed in the diode check mode. ( )
Point of Measurement Point of Measurement
No. Judgement Criteria Remarks No. Judgement Criteria Remarks
+ – + –
1 P2 U 1 P2 U Due to condenser charge
and so on, resistance
2 P2 V 2 ~ 15 kΩ 2 P2 V 1.2 V and over measurement may require
3 P2 W 3 P2 W some time.
4 U P2 4 U P2
5 V P2 Due to condenser charge 5 V P2
15 kΩ or
6 W P2 and so on, resistance 6 W P2
more 0.3 ~ 0.7 V
7 N3 U measurement may require 7 N3 U
(including )
8 N3 V some time. 8 N3 V
9 N3 W 9 N3 W
10 U N3 10 U N3 Due to condenser charge
and so on, resistance
11 V N3 2 ~ 15 kΩ 11 V N3 1.2 V and over measurement may require
12 W N3 12 W N3 some time.
[PCB and Circuit Diagram]

CHECK 5 Check for causes of wet operation.

Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, identify defective points.
Defective crankcase heater

Refrigerant accumulation
Frequent ON/OFF of compressor
Overcharge of refrigerant ←Refer to information in the CHECK 6

section.
Defective indoor Defective valve coil ←Does the valve coil have normal
unit electronic resistance and insulation?
[Cooling] expansion valve Defective valve body
Indoor unit
electronic Defective indoor unit
expansion ←Is the connector correctly connected?
gas pipe thermistor Are the thermistor resistance
valve opens
Defective characteristics normal?
too much. (∗1)
control Defective indoor unit ←Is the connector correctly connected?
Defective control liquid pipe thermistor Are the thermistor resistance
of superheated characteristics normal?
degree Defective outside unit main PCB
Defective outside Defective valve coil ←Does the valve coil have normal
unit electronic resistance and insulation?
Wet operation [Heating] Defective power pressure sensor ←Are the voltage characteristics normal?
Outside unit
electronic Defective ←Is the connector correctly connected?
expansion
Defective suction pipe thermistor
control Does the thermistor have normal
valve opens too resistance characteristics?
much. (∗2) Defective outside unit main PCB ←Is the pressure reading of the service
checker corresponding to the actual
measurement of the sensor?
Dirty evaporator ←Does the heat exchanger get clogged?
Defective fan motor ←Can the fan motor be rotated by

Degraded Reduced hand?
evaporating Does the fan motor coil have
fan output normal resistance and
capacity
Defective outside unit main PCB insulation?
Reduced (including defective
air quantity capacity setting)
Increased Dirty filter ←Does the air filter get clogged?

resistance
in air
passage Obstacles ←Are there any obstacles in the air
passage?
Note: ∗1: "Superheated degree control" in cooling is exercised with the indoor unit electronic expansion valve.
∗2: "Superheated degree control" in heating is exercised with the outside unit electronic expansion valve (EV1).
∗3: Guideline of superheated degree to judge as wet operation
(1)Suction gas superheated degree: Not more than 3°C; (2)Discharge gas superheated degree: Not more than 15°C,
except immediately after compressor starts up or is running under drooping control.
(Use the values shown above as a guideline. Even if the superheated degree falls in the range, the compressor may
be normal depending on other conditions.)

CHECK 6 Check for overcharge of refrigerant.

In case of VRV Systems, the only way to judge as the overcharge of refrigerant is with operating
conditions due to the relationship to pressure control and electronic expansion valve control.
As information for making a judgement, refer to information provided below.
Diagnosis of overcharge of refrigerant

1. High pressure rises. Consequently, overload control is exercised to cause scant cooling
capacity.
2. The superheated degree of suction gas lowers (or the wet operation is performed).
Consequently, the compressor becomes lower in discharge pipe temperature despite of
pressure loads.
3. The subcooled degree of condensing rises. Consequently, in heating operation, the
temperature of outlet air passing through the subcooling section becomes lower.
Cooling
High pressure
drooping control
Frequency comes to
High pressure the minimum level.
gradually rises with
increase in frequency.
Subcooled degree
becomes higher.
(Liquid connection
High pressure pipe temperature
lowers.)
(Low pressure is
maintained at a
constant level.)
Low pressure
Low pressure rises
due to reduced
compressor output.
Frequency
To maintain low pressure,

frequency increases under
the capacity control.
The outside unit electronic

expansion valve is closed due to
Heating the overload control.
Frequency comes to
the minimum level.
(High pressure is maintained
at a constant level.)
High pressure
High pressure drops or rises

immediately after the overload
control is complete.
Low pressure
Low pressure rises
due to reduced
frequency.
Low pressure drops due to
closed outside unit electronic
expansion valve.
Frequency Hot gas bypass is activated
for low pressure protection,
i.e., hunting at low pressure.
To maintain high pressure,
frequency reduces under the
capacity control.
(Degree of overcharge)
Proper quantity Higher degree of overcharge

CHECK 7 Check for shortage of refrigerant.

In case of VRV Systems, the only way to judge as the shortage of refrigerant is with operating
conditions due to the relationship to pressure control and electronic expansion valve control.
As information for making a judgement, refer to information provided below.
Diagnosis of shortage of refrigerant

1. The superheated degree of suction gas rises. Consequently, the compressor discharge gas
temperature becomes higher.
2. The superheated degree of suction gas rises. Consequently, the electronic expansion valve
turns open.
3. Low pressure drops to cause the unit not to demonstrate cooling capacity (heating capacity).
Cooling
The opening degree of the indoor unit Fan control is activated for high
electronic expansion valve becomes larger. pressure protection under
cooling control at low outdoor
Either of the electronic expansion air temperature, i.e., the fan is
valves becomes fully open. hunting at high pressure.
Frequency comes to the minimum level.
High pressure
High pressure drops

(Low pressure is with decrease in
maintained at a compressor capacity.
constant level.)
Low pressure
Low pressure rises as the
opening degree of the indoor
unit electronic expansion valve
becomes larger. Frequency
slightly increases under If frequency comes to the
the capacity control. minimum level, low
pressure cannot be
Frequency maintained.
To maintain low
pressure, frequency
drops due to the
capacity control.
Heating
The opening degree of the outside unit electronic expansion valve becomes larger.
The outside unit electronic expansion valve fully opens and frequency increases.
Discharge pipe or low pressure drooping control
Frequency comes to
High pressure the minimum level.
(High pressure is
maintained at a
constant level.)
Low pressure
Frequency
To maintain low pressure, Frequency drops

frequency drops due to the due to the drooping
capacity control.
control.
(Degree of refrigerant shortage)

Proper quantity Higher degree of shortage

CHECK 8 Vacuuming and dehydration procedure

Conduct vacuuming and dehydration in the piping system following the procedure for normal
vacuuming and dehydration described below.
Furthermore, if moisture may get mixed in the piping system, follow the procedure for special
vacuuming and dehydration described below.
Normal vacuuming and dehydration

(1) Vacuuming and dehydration
• Use a vacuum pump that enables vacuuming up to 100.7 kPa (5 torr, -755 mmHg).
• Connect manifold gauges to the service ports of liquid pipe and gas pipe and run the
vacuum pump for a period of 2 or more hours to conduct evacuation to -100.7 kPa or less.
• If the degree of vacuum does not reach -100.7 kPa or less even though evacuation is
conducted for a period of 2 hours, moisture will have entered the system or refrigerant
leakage will have been caused. In this case, conduct evacuation for a period of another 1
hour.
• If the degree of vacuum does not reach -100.7 kPa or less even though evacuation is
conducted for a period of 3 hours, conduct leak tests.
(2) Leaving in vacuum state
• Leave the compressor at the degree of vacuum of -100.7 kPa or less for a period of 1 hour
or more, and then check to be sure that the vacuum gauge reading does not rise. (If the
reading rises, moisture may have remained in the system or refrigerant leakage may have
been caused.)
(3) Refrigerant charge
• Purge air from the manifold gauge connection hoses, and then charge a necessary
quantity of refrigerant.
Special vacuuming and dehydration - In case moisture gets mixed in the piping*
• Follow the same procedure as that for 1) Normal vacuuming and dehydration described
above.
(2) Vacuum break
• Pressurize with nitrogen gas up to 0.05 MPa.
• Conduct vacuuming and dehydration for a period of 1 hour or more. If the degree of
vacuum does not reach -100.7 kPa or less even though evacuation is conducted for a
period of two hours or more, repeat vacuum break - vacuuming and dehydration.
(4) Leaving in vacuum state
• Leave the compressor at the degree of vacuum of -100.7 kPa or less for a period of 1 hour
or more, and then check to be sure that the vacuum gauge reading does not rise.
(5) Refrigerant charge
• Purge air from the manifold gauge connection hoses, and then charge a necessary
quantity of refrigerant.
∗ In case of construction during rainy reason, if dew condensation occurs in the piping due
to extended construction period, or rainwater or else may enter the piping during
construction work:

CHECK 11 Thermistor Resistance/Temperature Characteristics
Table 1
Applicable Indoor unit Indoor unit Outdoor unit BP unit
thermistor R2T: Indoor heat exchanger R1T: Room temperature R1T: Outdoor temperature DGA - DGC: Gas pipe
1 (liquid) DLA - DLC: Liquid pipe
R3T: Indoor heat exchanger
2
Outdoor unit
R3T: Suction pipe 1
R4T: Outdoor heat
exchanger
R5T: Suction pipe 2
R6T: Subcooling heat
exchanger gas pipe
R7T: Liquid pipe
Thermistor
temperature Resistance (kΩ) Resistance (kΩ) Resistance (kΩ) Resistance (kΩ)
(°C)
–30 363.8 361.7719 362.4862 363.3
–25 266.8 265.4704 265.9943 266.6
–20 197.8 196.9198 197.3083 197.8
–15 148.2 147.5687 147.8597 148.2
–10 112.0 111.6578 111.8780 112.1
–5 85.52 85.2610 85.4291 85.60
0 65.84 65.6705 65.8000 65.93
5 51.05 50.9947 51.0954 51.14
10 39.91 39.9149 39.9938 39.99
15 31.44 31.4796 31.5417 31.52
20 24.95 25.0060 25.0554 25.02
25 19.94 20.0000 20.0395 20.00
30 16.04 16.1008 16.1326 16.10
35 12.99 13.0426 13.0683 13.04
40 10.58 10.6281 10.6490 10.62
45 8.669 8.7097 8.7269 8.707
50 7.143 7.1764 7.1905 7.176
55 5.918 5.9407 5.9524 5.947
60 4.928 4.9439 4.9536 4.953
65 4.123 4.1352 4.1434 4.146
70 3.467 3.4757 3.4825 3.487
75 – 2.9349 2.9407 2.946
80 – 2.4894 2.4943 2.499
85 – 2.1205 2.1247 2.130
90 – 1.8138 1.8173 1.822
95 – 1.5575 1.5605 1.565
100 1.339 1.3425 1.3451 1.349
105 – 1.1614 1.1636 1.167
3SA48002, 3SA48004 3SA48001 3PA50504 3P150006
Drawing No.
(AD94A045) (AD87A001) (AD87A001) (ED97B002, ED01B012)

Table 2
Applicable Outdoor unit Outdoor unit
thermistor FINTH: Radiation fin R2T: Discharge pipe
Thermistor
temperature Resistance (kΩ) Resistance (kΩ)
(°C)
–30 354.1 4759
–25 259.7 3454
–20 192.6 2534
–15 144.2 1877
–10 109.1 1404
–5 83.25 1059
0 64.10 806.5
5 49.70 618.9
10 38.85 478.8
15 30.61 373.1
20 24.29 292.9
25 19.41 231.4
30 15.61 184.1
35 12.64 147.4
40 10.30 118.7
45 8.439 96.13
50 6.954 78.29
55 5.761 64.10
60 4.797 52.76
65 4.014 43.63
70 3.375 36.26
75 2.851 30.27
80 2.418 25.38
85 2.060 21.37
90 1.762 18.06
95 1.513 15.33
100 1.304 13.06
105 1.128 11.17
110 0.9790 9.585
115 0.8527 8.254
120 0.7450 7.131
125 0.6530 6.181
130 0.5741 5.374
135 – 4.686
140 – 4.098
145 – 3.594
150 – 3.161
3PA61998 3SA48009
Drawing No.
(AD92A057) (AD970175)

CHECK 12 Voltage Measurement Point

High pressure sensor
Main PCB (A1P)
X46A
High pressure sensor

(4) Red
(3) Black
(2)
Micro-computer (1) White

A/D input
Measure DC voltage here.
Low pressure sensor

Main PCB (A1P)
X45A
Low pressure sensor

(4) Red
(3) Black
Micro-computer (2) White

A/D input
(1)
Measure DC voltage here.
Pressure Sensor and Voltage Characteristics

Detected Pressure
4.15 4.15
PH (MPa) = × VH – × 0.5
PH, PL 3.0 3.0
(kg/cm2)(MPa) 1.7 1.7
PL (MPa) = × VL – × 0.5
51.0 5.0 3.0 3.0
PH : High pressure (MPa)

45.9 4.5
High Pressure (PH) PL : Low pressure (MPa)
VH : Output Voltage (High Side) (VDC)
40.8 4.0 VL : Output Voltage (Low Side) (VDC)
35.7 3.5
30.6 3.0
25.5 2.5
20.4 2.0
Low Pressure (PL)
15.3 1.5
10.2 1.0
5.1 0.5
0 0
–5.1 –0.5
–0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4
Output Voltage VH, VL (VDC)

SiAU301015EC
Part 7
Procedure for Mounting/
Dismounting Switch Box
1. Procedure for Mounting/Dismounting Switch Box...............................266
1.1 Procedure for Dismounting...................................................................266
1.2 Procedure for Mounting........................................................................266
Procedure for Mounting/Dismounting Switch Box 265

Procedure for Mounting/Dismounting Switch Box SiAU301015EC
1. Procedure for Mounting/Dismounting Switch Box

1.1 Procedure for Dismounting
1. Dismount the lid from the switch box.
2. Disconnect high voltage and low voltage wirings from the PCB and the terminal blocks,
referring to Figure on the right.
3. Unscrew mounting screws from the top plate, the stop valve mounting plate, and the bottom
frame in a total of 6 places.
4. With attention paid not to make the switch box support leg into contact with the side panel,
rotate the switch box to pull out it, while referring to Figure on the right.
In order to pull out the switch box, check to be sure no wirings get stuck with the switch box.
Side panel
Switch box support leg
Procedure for Mounting/Dismounting Switch Box
1.2 Procedure for Mounting

Mount the switch box, following the procedure for dismounting in reverse.
After the completion of mounting, check to be sure connectors are all properly connected.
List of Detachable Connectors
High
voltage
wiring
Low
voltage
wiring
Attach or detach any

connector at the relay
connector.
266 Procedure for Mounting/Dismounting Switch Box

SiAU301015EC Procedure for Mounting/Dismounting Switch Box
Screw/Unscrew
the mounting screws.
Connect/Disconnect
the wirings.
Procedure for Mounting/Dismounting Switch Box 267

SiAU301015EC
Part 8
Appendix
1. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................269
1.1 Outside Unit..........................................................................................269
1.2 Outside Unit Field Wiring......................................................................271
1.3 Indoor Unit............................................................................................273
1.4 Air Treatment Equipment .....................................................................302
268 Appendix
1.1
Appendix
L1 L2 L3 N POWER SUPPLY
3/N ~ 380-415V 50Hz
SiAU301015EC
A1P RWEYQ8/10PY1
RED F1U X22A X23A
A3P X24A
BLU
L1 L2 L3 N F2U Q1RP T1R NOTE)4
BLK
K3R
K5R
K6R
K7R
K8R
K9R
K10R
K11R
K12R
K13R
Z1F X1A P> HAP H2P H4P H6P H8P
X1A S1PH X7A X9A X10A X11A X12A X13A X14A X15A X16A X17A
GRN E GRY GRY H1P H3P H5P H7P
X2A
GRY GRY BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5 S1NPL
X1M L1 L2 L3 N PNK ORG X45A
L11 L21 L31 N1 F1U X2A X3A WHT RED ON DS1 S1NPH
RED
WHT
BLK
BLU
Y1S Y3S Y4S Y5S Y7S E1HC X46A
Outside Unit
Y6S Y2S
BLK
BLU
RED
X4A
WHT
M(1) (2) X2M
M
OFF 1234
M1F M2F 1~ 1~
T1A OPERATION OUTPUT
N=1 V1CP R3T R2T R4T R5T R6T NOTE)9 X26A
t˚ X1A Y1E
t˚ t˚ t˚ t˚ t˚ ∗ : ∗ IS CONNECTOR COLOR FOR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD. 6 6M
R1T A2P ∗ : ∗ IS CONNECTOR COLOR FOR COMPONENT.
1. Wiring Diagrams
X2A X3A ∗ : ∗ IS DISCRIMINATION COLOR FOR COMPONENT LEAD WIRE.

X10A X1A X28A
X1A X111A BLU X3A Y3E
K1M 6 6M
A4P X8A 1 X34A 1 X37A X1M
V1R X21A
+ - COOL/HEAT SELECTOR IN-OUT OUT-OUT OUT-MULTI WHT BLU WHT BLU
P1 A B C F1 F2 F1 F2 Q1 Q2 X47A
WHT K1R X25A
L1R PS
R95 X4A
WHT
ORG
WHT NOTE)5
P2
C66 C63 outside(Q1)(Q2)
+ + COOL HEAT COOL
T1R S2S S1S outside(F1)(F2) (3) (4) X3M
R50 R59 L1R HEAT FAN indoor(F1)(F2)
M1F M2F
+ - INTERLOCK
COOL/HEAT SELECTOR (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY) AXP NOTE)8
V2R A4P A2P
X11A A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (MAIN) K10R MAGNETIC RELAY (OPERATION OUTPUT) (A1P) V1R DIODE BRIDGE (A2P)
Z1C A3P Z1C A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INV) K11R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y5S) (A1P) V2R POWER MODULE (A2P)
N=5 A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (NOISE FILTER) K12R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y7S) (A1P) X1A, X3A CONNECTOR (Y1E, Y3E)
RED
WHT
BLK
A1P A4P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (SUB) K13R MAGNETIC RELAY (E1HC) (A1P) X1M TERMINAL STRIP (POWER SUPPLY)
U V W X4M X1M BS1~5 BS BUTTON L1R REACTOR X1M TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL) (A1P)
DETAIL OF M1C (MODE, SET, RETURN, TEST, RESET) M1C MOTOR (COMPRESSOR) X2M TERMINAL STRIP (OPERATION OUTPUT)
RED
WHT
BLK
W X1M X4M X2M X3M C63, C66 CAPACITOR M1F, M2F MOTOR (FAN, INVERTER COOLING) X3M TERMINAL STRIP (INTERLOCK)
U U V W DS1 DIP SWITCH PS SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY X4M TERMINAL STRIP (M1C)
MS EL. COMPO. BOX E1HC CRANKCASE HEATER Q1RP PHASE REVERSAL DETECT CIRCUIT (A1P) Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN)
V 3~ F1U FUSE (250V, 5A, B ) (A3P) R50,R59 RESISTOR Y3E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUBCOOL)
NOTES) M1C F1U, F2U FUSE (250V, 10A, B ) (A1P) R95 RESISTOR (CURRENT LIMITING) Y1S SOLENOID VALVE (HOT GAS BYPASS)
H1P~8P PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-ORANGE) (A1P) R1T THERMISTOR (FIN) (A2P) Y2S SOLENOID VALVE (OIL RECOVERY)
1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLIED ONLY TO THE OUTSIDE UNIT. [H2P] PREPARE, TEST ------------------- FLICKERING R2T THERMISTOR (SUCTION) Y3S SOLENOID VALVE (RECEIVER PRESSURIZATION)
2. : FIELD WIRING. ERROR DETECTION ------------- LIGHT UP R3T THERMISTOR (M1C DISCHARGE) Y4S SOLENOID VALVE (RECEIVER GAS PURGE)
3. : TERMINAL STRIP : CONNECTOR : TERMINAL : PROTECTIVE EARTH (SCREW) HAP PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A1P) R4T THERMISTOR (HEX GAS PIPE) Y5S SOLENOID VALVE (4 WAY VALVE) (MAIN)
4. WHEN USING THE OPTION ADAPTOR, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL. K1M MAGNETIC CONTACT SWITCH (M1C) (A2P) R5T THERMISTOR (SUBCOOLING HEX) Y6S SOLENOID VALVE (LIQUID PIPE)
K1R MAGNETIC RELAY (A2P) R6T THERMISTOR (RECEIVER LIQ PIPE) Y7S SOLENOID VALVE (4 WAY VALVE) (HEAT EXCHANGER)
5. REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL, FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO INDOOR-OUTSIDE MAGNETIC RELAY (Y1S) (A1P) S1NPH NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
K3R PRESSURE SENSOR (HIGH) Z1C
TRANSMISSION F1 • F2, OUTSIDE-OUTSIDE TRANSMISSION F1 • F2, OUTSIDE-MULTI TRANSMISSION Q1 • Q2. K5R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y3S) (A1P) S1NPL PRESSURE SENSOR (LOW) Z1F NOISE FILTER (WITH SURGE ABSORBER)
6. REFER TO "SERVICE PRECAUTION" LABEL (ON EL. COMPO. BOX COVER), HOW TO USE BS1~BS5 AND DS1 SWITCH. K6R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y4S) (A1P) S1PH PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH)
7. WHEN OPERATING, DON'T SHORT CIRCUIT FOR PROTECTION DEVICE. (S1PH) K7R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F, M2F) (A1P) T1A CURRENT SENSOR (A4P) COOL/HEAT SELECTOR
8. BE SURE TO CONNECT AN INTERLOCK CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE TERMINAL (3)-(4) OF TERMINAL STRIP (X3M). K8R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y6S) (A1P) T1R TRANSFORMER (220 - 240V/20V) S1S SELECTOR SWITCH (FAN/COOL • HEAT)
K9R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y2S) (A1P) V1CP SAFETY DEVICES INPUT S2S SELECTOR SWITCH (COOL/HEAT)
9. INSTALL A HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP OPERATION CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE TERMINAL (1)-(2) OF TERMINAL STRIP (X2M),
WHEN INTERLOCKING A HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP AND SYSTEM OPERATION.
10. COOL/HEAT SELECTOR CANNOT BE CONNECTED WHEN OPERATING HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM.
11. COLORS BLK : BLACK RED : RED BLU : BLUE WHT : WHITE PNK : PINK GRY : GRAY ORG : ORANGE.
C: 3D061377E
269
Wiring Diagrams
Wiring Diagrams SiAU301015EC
RWEYQ8/10PY19, RWEYQ8/10PY13
3D070942
270 Appendix
1.2
Appendix
[Operation System: Heat Pump]
Notes 1) All wiring, components and materials to be 6) Unit shall be grounded in compliance with the applicable local and national codes.
SiAU301015EC
procured on the site must comply with the 7) Wiring shown are general points-of-connection guides only and are not intended for or
applicable local and national codes. to include all details for a specific installation.
2) Use copper conductors only. 8) Be sure to install the switch and the fuse to the power line of each equipment.
3) As for details, see wiring diagram. 9) Install the main switch that can interrupt all the power supply in an integrated manner
4) Install circuit breaker for safety. because this system consists of the equipment utilizing the multiple power supply.
5) All field wiring and components must be provided 10) If there exists the possibility of reversed phase, lose phase, momentary blackout or the
1.2.1 Heat Pump
by licensed electrician. power goes on and off while the product is operating, attach a reversed phase protection
circuit locally.
Running the product in reversed phase may break the compressor and other parts.
When the power supply is connected

When the power supply is supplied to 〈 in series between the units. 〉
〈 each outside unit individually. 〉
POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
MAIN MAIN OUTSIDE UNITS
OUTSIDE UNITS
SWITCH SWITCH
2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
(TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE)
[UNIT 1] [UNIT 2] [UNIT 3] [UNIT 1] [UNIT 2] [UNIT 3]
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
Outside Unit Field Wiring
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE

LN LN
MAIN MAIN
SWITCH SWITCH 2 WIRES CABLE
(TRANSMISSION LINE)
2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
(TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE)
L N L N L N L N L N L N L N L N
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
2 WIRES CABLE
(POWER LINE)
2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
(POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE)
(POWER LINE) (POWER LINE)
INDOOR UNITS INDOOR UNITS
3D048824F
271
Wiring Diagrams
272
[Operation system: Heat Recovery]
Notes 1) All wiring, components and materials to be procured 6) Unit shall be grounded in compliance with the applicable local and national codes.
on the site must comply with the applicable local and 7) Wiring shown are general points-of-connection guides only and are not intended for or
Wiring Diagrams
national codes. to include all details for a specific installation.

2) Use copper conductors only. 8) Be sure to install the switch and the fuse to the power line of each equipment.
3) As for details, see wiring diagram. 9) Install the main switch that can interrupt all the power supply in an integrated manner
4) Install circuit breaker for safety. because this system consists of the equipment utilizing the multiple power supply.
5) All field wiring and components must be provided by 10) If there exists the possibility of reversed phase, lose phase, momentary blackout or the
licensed electrician. power goes on and off while the product is operating, attach a reversed phase
protection circuit locally.
Running the product in reversed phase may break the compressor and other parts.
1.2.2 Heat Recovery
When the power supply is suppled to When the power supply is connected
〈 each outside unit individually. 〉 〈 in series between the units. 〉
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
MAIN MAIN OUTSIDE UNITS
OUTSIDE UNITS
SWITCH SWITCH
(TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE)
[UNIT 1] [UNIT 2] [UNIT 3] [UNIT 1] [UNIT 2] [UNIT 3]
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
SWITCH
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE

LN LN
MAIN
MAIN SWITCH 2 WIRES CABLE
SWITCH 2 WIRES CABLE (TRANSMISSION LINE)
(TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE)
L N L N L N L N L N L N
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
SWITCH
SWITCH
FUSE 2 WIRES CABLE FUSE FUSE FUSE 2 WIRES CABLE FUSE FUSE
(POWER LINE) 2 WIRES CABLE (POWER LINE) 2 WIRES CABLE
2 WIRES CABLE BS UNITS (POWER LINE) BS UNITS (POWER LINE)
2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
(POWER LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (POWER LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE)
L N L N L N L N L N L N L N L N L N L N
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
SWITCH SWITCH
FUSE 2 WIRES CABLE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE 2 WIRES CABLE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
2 WIRES CABLE (POWER LINE) 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE (POWER LINE) 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
(POWER LINE) INDOOR UNITS (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) INDOOR UNITS (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE)
COOLING ONLY UNIT COOLING ONLY UNIT
3D048823F
SiAU301015EC
Appendix
SiAU301015EC Wiring Diagrams
1.3 Indoor Unit

1.3.1 VRV Indoor Unit
FXFQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125SVM
3D084349
Appendix 273
FXFQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125PVE, FXFQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125PVE9,
FXFQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125PVE8
3D059890C
274 Appendix
Appendix
SiAU301015EC
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF)

FXZQ20/25/32/40/50MVE(9)
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F) H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE R1T R2T R3T

F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) (ON-RED)
POWER SUPPLY
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE t˚ t˚ t˚
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) (TIMER-GREEN) ~ ~ A1P
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE 220-240V 220V PNK T2
X23A INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) (FILTER SIGN-RED) 50Hz 60Hz X2M X13A X12A X11A WHT T1 NOTE)4
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE F1U NOTE)3
(DEFROST-ORANGE) L L RED YLW F2 TRANSMISSION WIRING CENTRALIZED
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) ORG F1
Q1M THERMAL PROTECTOR (M1F EMBEDDED) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH N N WHT REMOTE CONTROLLER
X1A T1R X3A BLU P2 NOTE)2
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (MAIN/SUB) GRN/YLW X31A P2 R1T
SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH t˚ BLK P1 P1
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL-LIQUID)
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL-GAS) (WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) X30A X1M SS1
A1P A3P A4P
S1L FLOAT SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS SS1 H1P C1
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) X16A CONNECTOR
KPR WIRED REMOTE
(ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) SS2 H2P BS1 CONTROLLER
V1TR TRIAC V1TR
H3P X4A
YLW
WHT
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK X18A CONNECTOR

X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (WIRING ADAPTOR FOR X23A X2A H4P RED M
NOTE)3 X25A ~
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) X1A X1A BLK Q1M
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER X23A CONNECTOR YLW M M1F
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER) RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT ~
YLW
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) M1P MSW
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER X28A
(RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT) NOTES) M
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 1. : TERMINAL X16A X18A M1S
NOTE)3 NOTE)3 HAP
A4P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD Y1E X7A X8A
, : CONNECTOR
S1L
: FIELD WIRING
C1
2. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
T1R 3. X16A, X18A AND X23A ARE CONNECTED WHEN THE OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ARE BEING USED.
X1M 4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER.
A1P X2M
IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
5. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION
CONTROL BOX SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
6. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED: RED BLK: BLACK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW PNK: PINK ORG: ORANGE GRN: GREEN BLU: BLUE
3D064843
275
Wiring Diagrams
FXUQ71/100AVEB
3D079580
276 Appendix
Appendix
SiAU301015EC
FXCQ20/25/32/63MVE(9)
INDOOR UNIT Q1M THERMO SWITCH WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (M1F EMBEDDED) R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (FILTER SIGN-RED)
C1R CAPACITOR (M1F) R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) R2T·R3T THERMISTOR (COIL) (MAIN/SUB) (DEFROST-ORANGE) POWER SUPPLY
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE S1L FLOAT SWITCH 220-240V 220V
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT (ATTACHED SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH
~ ~
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) S1Q LIMIT SWITCH TO WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER) (MAIN/SUB) 50HZ 60HZ NOTE-4 RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
K1R-K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) (SWING FLAP) A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH
(WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
KAR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S) T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (WIRELESS ADDRESS SET)
S1Q A2P A3P
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF) CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS A1P
X2A SS1 H1P
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR R1T R2T R3T S1L H2P BS1
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) Y1E ELECTRONIC (ON-RED) FOR ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) X1M L N SS2 H3P
X23A X1A H4P
t˚ t˚ t˚ X1A
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) EXPANSION VALVE H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE X23A CONNECTOR
RED WHT WHT
(TIMER-GREEN) (WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
A1P L N
F1U X13A X12A X11A X9A X8A
X18A
HAP
X3A
NOTES) 1. : TERMINAL BLOCK, , : CONNECTOR, : TERMINAL X30A
T1R PNK NOTE-5
T2 T2
2. : FIELD WIRING WHT INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
T1 T1
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE YLW NOTE-3
t° F2 F2
X1A F1 ORG TRANSMISSION WIRING
UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTRUCTION MANUAL. F1
P2 BLU CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER
4. X23A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED. P2
P1 BLK
P1
5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF K1R K2R K3R KAR KPR
X23A X2M
CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER.
FC FH FL FLL X6A Y2 Y1 X7A NOTE-4 ELECTRIC PARTS BOX
X4A X18A
6. SYMBOLS SHOWS AS FOLLOWS. R1T P1P2 A1P
RED BLK ORG BRN
PNK: PINK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW ORG: ORANGE
SS1 C1R X23A
BLU: BLUE BLK: BLACK RED: RED BRN: BROWN
( ) WHT WHT WHT WHT
7. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY. M T1R
C1R ~ Q1M WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
MSW M M
~ ~ (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY) X1M X2M
YLW M1F
M1S M1P Y1E
3D039558A
277
Wiring Diagrams
278
Wiring Diagrams
FXCQ40/50/80/125MVE(9)
INDOOR UNIT S1L FLOAT SWITCH H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE

A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (ON-RED)
C1R CAPACITOR (M1F) (SWING FLAP) H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) (TIMER-GREEN) POWER SUPPLY
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE 220-240V 220V
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) (FILTER SIGN-RED) ~ ~
Y1E ELECTRONIC NOTE-4 RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
K1R-K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE 50Hz 60Hz
(WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
KAR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S) EXPANSION VALVE (DEFROST-ORANGE)
S1Q A2P A3P
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH A1P
X2A SS1 H1P
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (MAIN/SUB) R1T R2T R3T S1L H2P BS1
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH SS2 H3P
X1M L N X23A X1A X1A
(MAIN/SUB) H4P
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) (WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) t˚ t˚ t˚
Q1M THERMO SWITCH RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT RED WHT WHT
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
(ATTACHED TO WIRELESS A1P L N
(M1F EMBEDDED) REMOTE CONTROLLER) X18A CONNECTOR
(WIRING ADAPTOR FOR X13A X12A X11A X9A X8A
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) F1U X18A
HAP
R2T·R3T THERMISTOR (COIL) A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD X23A CONNECTOR X3A
(WIRELESS REMOTE X30A
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF) CONTROLLER) NOTE-5
T1R T2 PNK T2
WHT INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
T1 T1 NOTE-3
YLW
NOTES) 1. : TERMINAL BLOCK, , : CONNECTOR, : TERMINAL t° F2 F2 TRANSMISSION WIRING
ORG
X1A F1 F1 CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER
2. : FIELD WIRING BLU
P2 P2
BLK
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN P1 P1
K1R K2R K3R KAR KPR X2M
ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTRUCTION MANUAL. X23A
ELECTRIC PARTS BOX
4. X23A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT IS FC FH FL FLL X6A Y2 Y1 X7A NOTE-4
BEING USED. X4A X18A
R1T P1P2 A1P
5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR RED BLK BLU ORG BRN
ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER. C1R X23A
SS1
WHT WHT WHT WHT
IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT. M WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER T1R
C1R ~ Q1M
6. SYMBOLS SHOWS AS FOLLOWS. MSW M M (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
~ ~ X1M X2M
PNK: PINK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW ORG: ORANGE YLW M1F
( ) M1S M1P Y1E
BLU: BLUE BLK: BLACK RED: RED BRN: BROWN
7. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
3D039559A
SiAU301015EC
Appendix
Appendix
INDOOR UNIT
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
SiAU301015EC
A2P TERMINAL BOARD

C1 CAPACITOR (M1F)
POWER SUPPLY
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) ELECTRIC PARTS BOX
220-240V 220V
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE ~ ~ X18A X16A
50Hz 60Hz
FXKQ25/32/40/63MAVE
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN)
S1Q
K1R-K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) C1
KAR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S) R1T R2T R3T S1L A2P
X1M A1P T1R X1M
L N X2M
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) GRN/ t˚ t˚
A1P RED WHT YLW t˚ BLK
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) FC FH FL FLL
X4A L N
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP)
ORG BRN X13A X12A X11A
X9A X8A X16A
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) A2P RED BLK F1U
HAP
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED) YC
X3A X2A LL X18A X30A
X3A PNK
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X1A T2 T2 NOTE-4
T1R WHT
R2T·R3T THERMISTOR (COIL) RED GRY BLK ORG BRN T1 T1 INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
YLW
S1L FLOAT SWITCH F2 F2 NOTE-3
t˚ ORG
NOTE-5 F1 F1 TRANSMISSION WIRING
S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (SWING FLAP) X1A BLU
P2 P2 CENTRAL REMOTE
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) K1R K2R K3R KAR KPR BLK
P1 P1 CONTROLLER
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) X2M
FC FH FL FLL X6A X7A
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) X4A Y2 Y1
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE RED BLK ORG BRN
A2P
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER YC R1T
WHT P1P2
R1T X3A X2A LL RED WHT
THERMISTOR (AIR) M SS1
X1A MSW M
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) ~ ~
RED GRY BLK ORG BRN Y1E WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS M1S M1P (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
X16A CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) WHT M
C1 ~ Q1M
X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR YLW M1F
FOR ELECTRICAL APPENDICES)
NOTES) 1. : TERMINAL BLOCK, , : CONNECTOR, : TERMINAL

2. : : FIELD WIRING
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER.
5. IN CASE HIGH E. S. P. OPERATION, CHANGE OVER THE WIRING CONNECTION FROM X2A TO X3A.
6. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (PNK : PINK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW ORG : ORANGE BLU : BLUE BLK : BLACK RED : RED BRN : BROWN GRY : GRAY)
7. UES COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
C: 3D039564C
279
Wiring Diagrams
FXDQ20/25/32PBVE, FXDQ40/50/63NBVE
3D060547B
280 Appendix
FXDQ20/25/32/40/50/63SPV1
3D099151
Appendix 281
282
Wiring Diagrams
POWER SUPPLY
220~240V 50Hz M
MODEL FU (3AG Type) C1R Y1E
X1M
80 5A Slow Blow 12µF R1T R2T R3T
L NE
100 & 125 6.3A Slow Blow 11µF
145 8A Slow Blow 20µF t t t
RED F1U RED
FXDYQ80/100/125/145MAV1
X2M
(see table)
RED L F2U PINK
X7A X13A X12A X11A X18A T2
4 WHITE INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
YELLOW T1
BLUE N ORANGE F2 NOTE-3
K1R X30A F1
BLUE TRANSMISSION WIRING CENTRAL
BLACK P2
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 6 P1 REMOTE CONTROLLER
4 X3A P2
C1R FAN CAPACITOR (See table) P1
R1T
F1U FUSE & HOLDER (See table) K2R
ORG
F2U FUSE 5A 250V 6 RYF3 FLL
4 Std High GRY WIRED REMOTE
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE T1R RYF2 FL CONTROLLER
HAP BRN
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) K3R (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
C1R X4A PINK 1 1 1 See Note 4
K1R ~K3R MAGNETIC RELAY 6 X3M K1R K2R K3R
RYF1 FH 0 0 0
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
FC BLK
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
WHT
YLW
GRY
BRN
BUL
ORG
ORG
4 8 X HAP
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL - LIQUID) 3 1 7 6 X8A
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL - SUCTION)
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V)
NOTES
X1M TERMINAL STRIP (POWER)
1. : TERMINAL 2. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS 3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE 4. GROUND THE SHIELD OF THE
X2M TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL)
WHT
VIOLET
GRY
BRN
BUL
: CONNECTOR BLK : BLACK BLU: BLUE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD
X3M EXT. STATIC SELECTOR : FIELD WIRING ORG: ORANGE RED: RED UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TO THE INDOOR UNIT.
X18A OPTIONAL CONNECTOR - WIRING : PLUG AND SOCKET GRN: GREEN WHT: WHITE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
ADAPTOR FOR ELECTRICAL M
1~ : JUMPER CONNECTOR GRY: GREY YLW: YELLOW
M1F
APPENDICES : WIRE CLAMP BRN: BROWN
GRN/YLW K2R
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE K3R
A1P K1R
X3M
F1U
X2M X1M
C1R
T1R
SWITCH BOX
C: 3PDA0313
SiAU301015EC
Appendix
Appendix
SiAU301015EC
POWER SUPPLY
Model Fuse 220~240V 50Hz
FDYQ180MV1 8A Slow Blow
L NE
FXDYQ180/200/250MV1

FXDYQ180MV1 8A Slow Blow RED RED
FXDYQ200MV1 10A Slow Blow
(see table)
FXDYQ250MV1 12A Slow Blow RED PINK
WHITE INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
BLUE YELLOW
ORANGE NOTE-3
BLUE TRANSMISSION WIRING CENTRAL
BLACK REMOTE CONTROLLER
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
C1R FAN CAPACITOR (20µF)
F1U FUSE & HOLDER (See table)
ORG
F2U FUSE 5A 250V
High GRY WIRED REMOTE
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE Std
CONTROLLER
HAP (SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) BRN (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
PINK See Note 4
K1R ~ K3R MAGNETIC RELAY
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) BLK
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL - LIQUID)

R3T THERMISTOR (COIL - SUCTION)
T1R TRANSFORMER (220 - 240V/22V)
WHT
VIOLET
GRY
BRN
BLU
ORG
ORG
NOTES
1. : TERMINAL 2. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS 3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE 4. GROUND THE SHIELD OF THE
X2M TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL)
: CONNECTOR BLK : BLACK BLU : BLUE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD
X3M EXT. STATIC SELECTOR TO THE INDOOR UNIT.
: FIELD WIRING ORG : ORANGE RED : RED UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
X18A OPTIONAL CONNECTOR - WIRING : PLUG AND SOCKET GRN : GREEN WHT : WHITE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
ADAPTOR FOR ELECTRICAL : JUMPER CONNECTOR GRY : GREY YLW :YELLOW
APPENDICES : WIRE CLAMP BRN : BROWN
GRN/YLW
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE
SWITCH BOX
283
Wiring Diagrams
FXSQ20/25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140PVE
C: 3D092752B
284 Appendix
Appendix
SiAU301015EC
INDOOR UNIT OPTIONAL PARTS

NOTE-6 POWER SUPPLY COMPRESSOR ADAPTOR FOR WIRING
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD E1H ELECTRIC HEATER
LOW E. S. P OPERATION NOTE-5 SEPARATE POWER SUPPLY 220-240V 220V OPERATION (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
A2P TERMINAL BOARD F1U-F3U FUSE ( B , 15A, 250V) ~ ~
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F) HU HUMIDIFIER 220-240V 220V 50Hz 60Hz
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) K1M MAGNETIC RELAY(E1H) ~ ~
50Hz 60Hz
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE S1H HUMIDISTAT
TERMINALS FOR
OPERATION
INDICATOR
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) X3M TERMINAL BLOCK (E1H)
K1R-K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER FAN
HIGH E. S. P OPERATION OPERATION
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MIAN / SUB) BLK
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) ADAPTOR FOR WIRING RED WHT GRN/YLW
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (135˚C) F1U·F2U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) WHT
OR (145˚C NOTE9) KCR MAGNETIC RELAY
(M1F EMBEDDED) KFR MAGNETIC RELAY (20 · 25 · 32 · 40 · 50 · 63 TYPE)
(20 · 25 · 32 TYPE) 40· 50 · 63 · 80 ·
FXSYQ20/25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125MVE
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) KHR MAGNETIC RELAY (E1H)

(
HIGH E. S. P OPERATION
( 100 · 125 TYPE
R2T·R3T THERMISTOR (COIL) KHUR MAGNETIC RELAY (HU)
S1L FLOAT SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS PNK NOTE-4
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240 / 22V) X16A CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) WHT INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
RED BLK ORG BRN
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR FOR YLW NOTE-3
BLU
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) ORG TRANSMISSION WIRING
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (80 · 100 · 125 TYPE) CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER
BLU
NOTES BLK ELECTRIC PARTS BOX
1. : TERMINAL BLOCK, , : CONNECTOR, : TERMINAL RED GRY BLK ORG BRN
2. : FIELD WIRING WHT
Q1M
3. WHEN USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE M1F (80 · 100 · 125 TYPE) RED BLK ORG BRN
WITH THE ENCLOSED INSTALLATION MANUAL. YLW BLU
4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON / OFF CONTROL
OPERATIONS CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER. FOR DETAILS REFER TO THE WHT WHT
ENCLOSED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
5. WHEN INSTALLING ELECTRICAL HEATER, EXECUTE THE ADDITIONAL WIRING FOR HEATER CIRCUIT (K1M, E1H).
IN THIS CASE, THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY HAS TO BE SUPPLIED INDEPENDENTLY. RED GRY BLK BLU
6. DURING HIGH OR LOW ESP OPERATION, CHANGE OVER THE WIRING CONNECTION FROM X4A (OF A2P) TO X3A OR X5A.
7. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (PNK: PINK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW GRY: GRAY ORG: ORANGE BLU: BLUE BLK:BLACK RED: RED BRN: BROWN GRN: GREEN) WHT ORG BRN
8. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY. WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
9. ONLY 80, 100, 125 TYPE (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
10. : EXAMPLE ONLY YLW (20 · 25 · 32 · 40 · 50 · 63 TYPE)
3PDA1176
285
Wiring Diagrams
FXMQ20/25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140PVE
C: 3D058783F
286 Appendix
FXMQ200/250MAVE, FXMQ200/250MVE9
C: 3D039621E
Appendix 287
288
Wiring Diagrams
FXHQ32/63/100MAVE
INDOOR UNIT H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE

A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (FILTER SIGN-RED)
C1R NOTE-4
CAPACITOR (M1F) H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
F1U FUSE( B , 5A, 250V) (DEFROST-ORANGE) POWER SUPPLY RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) 220-240V 220V (WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH ~ ~ A2P A3P
KAR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S) (WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) 50Hz 60Hz A1P X2A H1P
SS1
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS H2P BS1
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) X8A CONNECTOR (FLOAT SWITCH) SS2 H3P
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR FOR X1M X23A
R1T R2T R3T X1A X1A H4P
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED) ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) L N
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X23A CONNECTOR (WIRELESS t˚ t˚ t˚ NOTE-6
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL LIQUID) REMOTE CONTROLLER) A1P RED WHT
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL GAS)
NOTES) L N X13A X12A X11A X8A
S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (SWING FLAP)
1. : TERMINAL BLOCK , : CONNECTOR F1U X18A NOTE-5
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) HAP
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) : SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR X3A T2 PNK T2 INPUT FROM
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) T1 WHT T1 OUTSIDE
2. : FIELD WIRING
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE 3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, PC F2 YLW F2 NOTE-3
X30A ORG F1 TRANSMISSION
PC PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH t˚ X1A F1
OPTIONAL PARTS P2
BLU P2 WIRING CENTRAL
THE ATTACHED INSTRUCTION MANUAL. BLK P1 REMOTE CONTROLLER
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) 4. X23A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS REMOTE T1R P1
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER KAR KPR X2M
CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED. X27A X23A
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X9A X6A X25A X7A
5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, X4A R1T
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE P1 P2
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT (ATTACHED BLK YLW RED SS1
TO WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER) SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER. IN DETAILS, REFER WHT RED
TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT. WHT C1R MSW WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ~ M
6. IN CASE INSTALLING THE DRAIN PUMP, REMOVE THE WHT (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD S1Q M1S M
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF) SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR OF X8A AND EXECUTE THE BLK ~ Y1E
ADDITIONAL WIRING FOR FLOAT SWITCH AND DRAIN PUMP. X18A
H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (ON-RED) M M1P
7. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS.
~ Q1M X23A A1P C1R T1R
H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(TIMER-GREEN) PNK : PINK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW ORG : ORANGE M1F X2M X1M
( ) ELECTRIC PARTS BOX X8A
BLU : BLUE BLK : BLACK RED : RED
8. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
3D039801D
SiAU301015EC
Appendix
FXAQ20/25/32/40/50/63PVE
3D076498
Appendix 289
FXAQ20/25/32/40/50/63MAVE
3D060858B
290 Appendix
Appendix
SiAU301015EC
INDOOR UNIT X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL)

A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE POWER SUPPLY L N
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F) WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER ~220-240V
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) 50Hz
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) ~220V
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS 60Hz
K1R-K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR FOR
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) R1T R2T R3T
X1M
Q1M THERMO SWITCH L N
(M1F EMBEDDED) t˚ t˚ t˚
A1P RED BLU
R2T · R3T THERMISTOR (COIL) L N
X13A X12A X11A
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) F1U X18A
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) HAP
X3A
NOTES) T1R X30A
PNK NOTE-4
1. : TERMINAL BLOCK, , : CONNECTOR, : TERMINAL T2 T2
WHT INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
t˚ T1 T1
2. : FIELD WIRING X1A YLW NOTE-3
F2 F2
FXLQ20/25/32/40/50/63MAVE, FXNQ20/25/32/40/50/63MAVE
3. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO ORG TRANSMISSION WIRING

F1 F1
THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTRUCTION MANUAL. K1R K2R K3R BLU CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER
P2 P2
4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF BLK
P1 P1
CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER. IN DETAILS, FLL X7A
X4A FC FH FL X2M T1R
REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT. X18A
5. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (PNK: PINK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW
ORG: ORANGE BLU: BLUE BLK: BLACK RED: RED BRN: BROWN) C1 WHT
WHT YLW RED BLK ORG BRN
6. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY. R1T P1 P2 A1P
WHT
WHT YLW RED BLK ORG BRN M
SS1
M Y1E X1M X2M
~ WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
Q1M
M1F (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY) CONTROL BOX
3D039826G
291
Wiring Diagrams
292
INDOOR UNIT
Wiring Diagrams
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD POWER SUPPLY A1P A3P A4P

A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (TRANSFORMER 220~240V/16V) 220-240V H1P
~ SS1 H2P BS1
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F)
(NOTE 3) 50Hz SS2 H3P
FXUQ71/100/125MAV1
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) X24A X2A H4P
BEV UNIT
HBP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) (NOTE 5) X1A X1A
X1A R1T R2T
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) L RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
N t˚ t˚
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) INDOOR UNIT A1P X1M
X2M SS1
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) X19A X18A EMERG. NORM. P1 P1
X3A 1 1 RED P2 R1T
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED) P2
2
2 WHT X5A
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X10A X2A X1A X11A WIRED REMOTE
3 BLK SS1
3 X27A CONTROLLER
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL) A2P (NOTE 5)
C1
RyA MAGNETIC RELAY (M1A)
RyP X24A
RyP MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P)
YLW
WHT
V1TR X20A
GRN/YLW
S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (SWING FLAP) RC TC RED M
M X25A ~
S1L FLOAT SWITCH t˚ BLK Q1M
F1F2 BLU M
M1F
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (EMERGENCY) BLU ~ X29A
M1P RyA MSW
V1TR PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT ~ M1S
X1M TERMINAL STRIP X14A S1Q
X2M TERMINAL STRIP X30A X33A X35A HAP HBP
X15A S1L
RC SIGNAL RECEIVER
X35A A2P C1
TC SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
1.3.2 Connection Unit Series Indoor Unit
SS1
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER A1P X1
X30A X2 M
M
X24A
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) CONTROL BOX
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT (ATTACHED TO WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD NOTES)
A4P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 1. : TERMINAL
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF) : CONNECTOR
H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (ON-RED) 2. : FIELD WIRING
3. THE BEV UNIT SHOWS AN OUTLINE. PLEASE REFER TO A WIRING DIAGRAM OF BEV UNIT PASTING IN DETAIL.
H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (TIMER-GREEN)
4. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED
H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (FILTER SIGN-RED) INSTALLATION MANUAL.
H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (DEFROST-ORANGE) 5. X24A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED.
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) 6. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS
SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH (WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS 7. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR SWITCH (SS1, SS2) OF WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER AND WIRELESS
X24A CONNECTOR (WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER) REMOTE CONTROLLER BY INSTALLATION MANUAL AND ENGINEERING DATA, ETC.
8. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS:
X30A CONNECTOR (INTERFACE ADAPTOR FOR SKY AIR SERIES)
RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW GRN : GREEN BLU : BLUE
X35A CONNECTOR (GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
C: 3D044973A
SiAU301015EC
Appendix
BEV UNIT POWER SUPPLY
Appendix
220-240V 220V
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ASSY ~ ~
A1P 50Hz 60Hz
A2P POWER SUPPLY PRINTED CIRCUIT
SiAU301015EC
BOARD ASSY (220-240V/16V)

A2P X2A X1A RED
F1U FUSE ( B , 10A, 250V) L
X1A F1U
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE BLU Z4F N
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) Z2C
BEVQ71/100/125MAVE
X2A X4A NE N=2

R3T THERMISTOR (GAS)
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (M/S) 1
X3A
RED TO
X2M TERMINAL STRIP (TRANSMISSION) 2
INDOOR UNIT
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE WHT Z3C
3
Z1C • Z2C BLK
NOISE FILTER SS1 X1M
Z3C • Z4F
HAP
MS
SS1 X5A X7A F1F2
X11A
X5A
BLU BLU
A1P Z1C
t˚ M N=3
A2P X1M X2M R3T F1F2
Y1E
X2M
CONTROL BOX
TO OUTSIDE UNIT
NOTES) 1. : TERMINAL : CONNECTOR

2. : FIELD WIRING
3. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM ONLY SHOWS THE BEV UNIT.
SEE THE WIRING DIAGRAMS AND INSTALLATION MANUALS FOR THE WIRING AND SETTINGS FOR THE INDOOR, OUTSIDE, AND BS UNITS.
4. SEE THE INDOOR UNIT'S WIRING DIAGRAM WHEN INSTALLING OPTIONAL PARTS FOR THE INDOOR UNIT.
5. ONLY ONE INDOOR UNIT MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE BEV UNIT.
SEE THE INDOOR UNIT'S WIRING DIAGRAM FOR WHEN CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL.
6. ALWAYS USE THE SKY AIR CONNECTION ADAPTER FOR THE INDOOR UNIT WHEN USING A CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT.
REFER TO THE MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT WHEN CONNECTING.
7. COOL/HEAT CHANGEOVER OF INDOOR UNITS CONNECTED TO BEV UNIT CANNOT BE CARRIED OUT UNLESS THEY ARE CONNECTED TO BS UNIT.
IN CASE OF A SYSTEM WITH BEV UNIT ONLY, COOL/HEAT SELECTOR IS REQUIRED.
8. SET THE SS1 TO "M" ONLY FOR THE BEV UNIT CONNECTED TO THE INDOOR UNIT WHICH IS TO HAVE COOL/HEAT SWITCHING CAPABILITY, WHEN CONNECTING THE BS UNIT.
THE "M/S" ON THE SS1 STANDS FOR "MAIN/SUB".
THIS IS SET TO "S" WHEN SHIPPED FROM THE FACTORY.
9. CONNECT THE ATTACHED THERMISTOR TO THE R3T.
10. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS.
(BLU : BLUE RED : RED WHT : WHITE BLK : BLACK)
C: 3D044901B
293
Wiring Diagrams
1.3.3 BS Unit
BSVQ100/160/250PV1(3)
3D055928D
294 Appendix
BSQ100/160/250AV1
3D085543A
Appendix 295
1.3.4 Centralized/Multi BS Unit

BSV4Q100PV1
3D063928C
296 Appendix
BSV6Q100PV1
3D063929C
Appendix 297
BS4Q14AV1
3D086235
298 Appendix
BS6Q14AV1, BS8Q14AV1
3D086236
Appendix 299
BS10Q14AV1, BS12Q14AV1
3D086237
300 Appendix
BS16Q14AV1
3D086238
Appendix 301
302
1.4
L N
POWER SUPPLY
220-240V
Wiring Diagrams
~
50Hz
X1M
L N
VKM50/80/100GAV1(9)
ADAPTOR PCB FOR WIRING

(OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES) EXTERNAL OUTPUT
(KRP50-2) Note) 4 TERMINALS
Tes10
1 CONTACT R3T R4T R5T
R1T R2T Ry1
2
CAPACITY Note) 7 Y1E
M
Ry2 AC220-240V t˚ t˚ t˚ RED GRN
t˚ t˚ 3 A2P
RED
WHT
0.01~1.6A
RED
WHT
A1P
R S
X2M JC Note) 5 X3M
L N SS1 INPUT FROM F1U X13A X12A X11A X9A X8A X7A PNK Note) 6
X12A X13A X9A X10A X11A NOR OUTSIDE T2 T2
Note) 8 H J2 WHT INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
HAP M
RED T1 T1
F1U J1 Note) 3
RED T2R RED HAP YLW
F2 F2
F2 ORG TO CONNECTION WIRING AND
T1R RED t˚ X3A F1
F1 F1 CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER UNIT
X7A BLU
t˚ BLK P2 P2
P1
X18A BLK
K7R BLU BLU P1 P1
P2 X30A
K1R K2R K3R K4R K5R K6R BLU X1A
BLU P1 P2
X8A FC1 FH1 FM1 FL1 FC2 FH2 FM2 FL2 X3A X5A
BLU SS1
X1A X2A
Air Treatment Equipment
X18A WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER

(OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES)
WHT
WHT
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
BLU
BLU
RED
RED
ORG
ORG
C1 C2 S1Q
A2P MSW
YLW
WHT
YLW
WHT
~ Notes) 1. :TERMINAL BLOCK, :TERMINAL, , :CONNECTOR, :SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR
C1
C2
T2R M1D 2. :FIELD WIRING
SS1 X17A X19A
A1P T1R 3. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
YLW
WHT
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
YLW
WHT
1.4.1 Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VKM Series)
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
X3M
X2M M M 4. IN CASE USING WIRING ADAPTOR, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
X1M ~ ~
t˚ M1F t˚ M2F 5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FRESH UP CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE
X11A CONTROL BOX F1UT F2UT CONTROLLER, IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
6. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE
SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER, IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
7. DO NOT REMOVE THE SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTORS OF X8A AND X9A. THE UNIT WILL NOT RUN IF THEY ARE REMOVED.
8. SS1 (A1P) HAS ALREADY BEEN SET TO "NOR". AT FACTORY SET. THE UNIT WILL NOT RUN IF THE SETTING ARE CHANGED.
9. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (PNK: PINK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW ORG: ORANGE BLU: BLUE BLK: BLACK RED: RED
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD K7R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1D) (A1P) T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V / 22V) GRN: GREEN)
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD M1D MOTOR (DAMPER MOTOR) T2R TRANSFORMER (220-240V / 22V) 10. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
C1 · C2 CAPACITOR (M1F, M2F) M1F MOTOR (SUPPLY AIR FAN) X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER SUPPLY)
F1U FUSE ( B , 10A, 250V) (A1P) M2F MOTOR (EXHAUST AIR FAN) X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) (A1P)
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) (A2P) R1T THERMISTOR (INDOOR AIR) X3M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL)
F1UT · F2UT THERMO SWITCH R2T THERMISTOR (OUTDOOR AIR) X17A, X19A CONNECTOR (RELAYING WIRE)
(152˚C) (M1F, M2F BUILT-IN) R3T THERMISTOR X20A CONNECTOR (RELAYING WIRE)
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (INLET AIR INTO COIL) Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR FOR
ADAPTOR PCB FOR WIRING Tes10 TERMINAL BLOCK
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A1P) R4T, R5T THERMISTOR OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES (KRP50-2) (FOR EXTERNAL OUTPUT) ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) (A2P)
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LIQUID / GAS PIPE OF COIL) WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER MAGNETIC RELAY CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
Ry1
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A2P) S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (DAMPER MOTOR) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN / SUB) (OPERATION / STOP) X11A CONNECTOR
K1R~K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) (A1P) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH Ry2 MAGNETIC RELAY (ADAPTOR POWER SUPPLY) (A1P)
K4R~K6R MAGNETIC RELAY (M2F) (A1P) (FOR ESPECIALLY USE) (A1P) (FOR HUMIDIFIER OPERATION)
3D051311
SiAU301015EC
Appendix
Appendix
L N
POWER SUPPLY
SiAU301015EC
220-240V S1H Note) 7

A3P
~
50Hz SS1 Note) 9 %H2O,
X4 X3 X2 X1 WHT
Note) 7
OFF ON
X2M X1M 1 2 X1M
X1M KFR KCR KHuR X20A
L N Y2 BLK BLK BLK
KHR 5 1 2 X1M
S1L
K8R
VKM50/80/100GAMV1(9)
BLK Y1 3 BLU BLU

F2U WHT 7 RED RED
ADAPTOR PCB FOR WIRING WHT
(OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES) F2U YC K8R Y2S
EXTERNAL OUTPUT X1A
(KRP50-2) Note) 4 TERMINALS
X2A
8 WHT WHT
Tes10 WHT BLU
1 CONTACT R3T R4T R5T
R1T R2T Ry1 CAPACITY
2 Note) 8 Y1E M
Ry2 AC220-240V t˚ t˚ t˚ RED GRN
t˚ t˚ 3 A2P
RED
WHT
0.01~1.6A
A1P
RED
WHT
R S
X2M JC Note) 5 X3M
L N INPUT FROM F1U X16A X13A X12A X11A X9A X8A X7A PNK Note) 6
X12A X13A X9A X10A X11A SS1 T2 T2
NOR J2 OUTSIDE INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
Note) 10 H RED WHT
HAP M T1 T1
F1U J1 Note) 3
RED T2R RED HAP YLW
F2 F2
F2 ORG TO CONNECTION WIRING AND
T1R RED t˚ X3A F1 F1
F1 CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER UNIT
X7A BLU
t˚ BLK P2 P2
P1
X18A BLK
K7R BLU BLU P1 P1
P2 X30A
K1R K2R K3R K4R K5R K6R BLU X1A
BLU X8A P1 P2
FC1 FH1 FM1 FL1 FC2 FH2 FM2 FL2 X3A X5A
BLU SS1
X1A X2A
X18A WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
BLK
(OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES)
BLU
BLK
WHT
WHT
RED
RED
BLU
RED
RED
ORG
ORG
SS1 C1 C2
MSW S1Q
A3P A2P
YLW
WHT
YLW
WHT
Notes) 1. :TERMINAL BLOCK, ~
:TERMINAL, , :CONNECTOR, :SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR
M1D
C1
T2R
C2
2. :FIELD WIRING
SS1 X17A X19A
T1R 3. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED
A1P
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
YLW
WHT
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
YLW
WHT
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
X3M
K8R
4. IN CASE USING WIRING ADAPTOR, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
X2M M M
X1M ~ M1F ~ M2F 5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FRESH UP CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY
t˚ t˚
X11A CONTROL BOX F1UT F2UT REMOTE CONTROLLER, IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
6. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD K7R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1D) (A1P) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER, IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD K8R MAGNETIC RELAY (S1L) (HUMIDISTAT INPUT) (A3P) 7. IN CASE INSTALLING A HUMIDISTAT S1H (LOCALLY PROCURED), REMOVE THE SHORT CIRCUIT WIRING BETWEEN (1) AND
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD KCR, KFR MAGNETIC RELAY (A3P) T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V / 22V) (2) AS SHOWN IN THE FIGURE RIGHT.
8. DO NOT REMOVE THE SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTORS OF X8A AND X9A. THE UNIT WILL NOT RUN IF THEY ARE REMOVED.
(ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) KHR, KHuR MAGNETIC RELAY (A3P) T2R TRANSFORMER (220-240V / 22V)
9. SS1 (A3P) HAS ALREADY BEEN SET TO OFF AT FACTORY SET. HUMIDIFYING BECOMES IMPOSSIBLE , IF THE SETTING ARE
C1 · C2 CAPACITOR (M1F, M2F) M1D MOTOR (DAMPER MOTOR) X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER SUPPLY) CHANGED.
F1U FUSE ( B , 10A, 250V) (A1P) M1F MOTOR (SUPPLY AIR FAN) X1M, X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) (A3P) 10. SS1 (A1P) HAS ALREADY BEEN SET TO "NOR". AT FACTORY SET. THE UNIT WILL NOT RUN IF THE SETTING ARE CHANGED.
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) (A2P) M2F MOTOR (EXHAUST AIR FAN) X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) (A1P) 11. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (PNK: PINK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW ORG: ORANGE BLU: BLUE BLK: BLACK RED: RED
F1U, F2U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) (A3P) R1T THERMISTOR (INDOOR AIR) X3M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) GRN: GREEN)
F1UT · F2UT THERMO SWITCH R2T THERMISTOR (OUTDOOR AIR) X17A, X19A CONNECTOR (RELAYING WIRE) 12. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
(152˚C) (M1F, M2F BUILT-IN) R3T THERMISTOR X20A CONNECTOR (RELAYING WIRE)
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (INLET AIR INTO COIL) Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A1P) R4T, R5T THERMISTOR Y2S FEED WATER SOLENOID VALVE ADAPTOR PCB FOR WIRING Tes10 TERMINAL BLOCK X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR FOR
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LIQUID / GAS PIPE OF COIL) OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES (KRP50-2) (FOR EXTERNAL OUTPUT) ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) (A2P)
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A2P) S1L FLOAT SWITCH (HUMIDIFIER) WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER Ry1 MAGNETIC RELAY CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS LOCAL SUPPLIED PARTS
K1R~K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) (A1P) S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (DAMPER MOTOR) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN / SUB) (OPERATION / STOP) X11A CONNECTOR S1H HUMIDISTAT
K4R~K6R MAGNETIC RELAY (M2F) (A1P) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH Ry2 MAGNETIC RELAY (ADAPTOR POWER SUPPLY) (A1P)
(FOR ESPECIALLY USE) (A1P) (FOR HUMIDIFIER OPERATION)
3D051310
303
Wiring Diagrams
1.4.2 Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VAM Series)

VAM150/250/350/500/650/800/1000GJVE
3D041839B
304 Appendix
VAM1500/2000GJVE
3D051412A
Appendix 305
Revision History
Month / Year Version Revised contents
11 / 2010 SiAU301015 –
M-11007 Heater control in VRV III service manual

02 / 2011 SiAU301015_A M-11009 Correction of thermistor resistance/temperature characteristic in service
manual
08 / 2011 SiAU301015_B Modification of PCB (Earth leakage detection PCB)
Model addition: RWEYQ8-30PY19, RWEYQ8-30PY13

FXFQ25-125SVM, FXFQ25-125PVE9, FXFQ25-125PVE8,
03 / 2016 SiAU301015EC FXZQ20-50MVE9, FXUQ71/100AVEB, FXCQ20-125MVE9,
FXDQ20-63SPV1, FXSQ20-140PVE, FXMQ200/250MVE9,
FXAQ20-63PVE,
BSVQ100-250PV13, BSQ100-250AV1, BS4-16Q14AV1
Warning z Daikin products are manufactured for export to numerous countries throughout the world. Prior to
purchase, please confirm with your local authorised importer, distributor and/or retailer whether this
product conforms to the applicable standards, and is suitable for use, in the region where the product
will be used. This statement does not purport to exclude, restrict or modify the application of any local
legislation.
z Ask a qualified installer or contractor to install this product. Do not try to install the product yourself.
Improper installation can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical shock, fire or explosion.
z Use only those parts and accessories supplied or specified by Daikin. Ask a qualified installer or
contractor to install those parts and accessories. Use of unauthorised parts and accessories or
improper installation of parts and accessories can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical
shock, fire or explosion.
z Read the user's manual carefully before using this product. The user's manual provides important
safety instructions and warnings. Be sure to follow these instructions and warnings.
If you have any enquiries, please contact your local importer, distributor and/or retailer.
Cautions on product corrosion

1. Air conditioners should not be installed in areas where corrosive gases, such as acid gas or alkaline gas, are produced.
2. If the outdoor unit is to be installed close to the sea shore, direct exposure to the sea breeze should be avoided. If you need to install
the outdoor unit close to the sea shore, contact your local distributor.
Dealer
Head Office:
Umeda Center Bldg., 2-4-12, Nakazaki-Nishi,
Kita-ku, Osaka, 530-8323 Japan
Tokyo Office:
JR Shinagawa East Bldg., 2-18-1, Konan,
Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan
http://www.daikin.com/products/ac/
c All rights reserved
zSpecifications, designs and other content appearing in this brochure are current as of March 2016 but subject to change without notice.
SiAU301015EC
03/2016 AK·K

Daikin VRV RWEYQ Water Cooled - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Daikin VRV RWEYQ Water Cooled - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Daikin VRV RWEYQ Water Cooled - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SiAU301015EC

Part 1 General Information ........................................................... 1

Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit ........................................................... 10

3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................23

Part 3 Remote Controller ............................................................ 36

Part 4 Functions and Control...................................................... 59

4.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................................................85

Part 5 Field Settings ................................................................... 98

Part 6 Service Diagnosis........................................................... 149

iii Table of Contents

2.11 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality/Dust Clogging ...............176

Part 7 Procedure for Mounting/Dismounting Switch Box ........ 265

Part 8 Appendix......................................................................... 268

1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers

Be sure to disconnect the power cable from the socket before

When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the compressor at

If refrigerant gas leaks during repair work, ventilate the area.

Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting repair

In case of R-32 / R-410A refrigerant models, be sure to use pipes, flare

Do not clean the air conditioner with water.

Be sure to provide an earth / grounding when repairing the equipment in

Be sure to conduct repair work with appropriate tools.

1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users

Do not damage or modify the power cable.

When replacing the coin battery in the remote controller, be sure to

Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of

If the installation platform or frame has corroded, replace it.

Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

Icon Type of Description

Note A Note provides information that is not indispensable, but may

Reference A Reference guides the reader to other places in this binder or

1. Model Names of Indoor/Outside Units

4-way flow ceiling

Power supply symbols

Connection Unit Series Indoor Units

BSVQ 100P 160P 250P V1

Power supply symbols

1.2 Outside Units

Heat Pump 8P 10P 16P 18P 20P Y1

Combination of Outside Units

Class 20 class 24 class 26 class 28 class 30 class

Power supply symbols

1.3 Air Treatment Equipment

Note: For details, refer to Engineering Data ED71-440A.

Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VAM Series)

Power supply symbols

4-way flow ceiling suspended type Ceiling mounted duct type

Ceiling mounted cassette (Double flow) type Ceiling suspended type

Ceiling mounted cassette corner type Wall mounted type

Slim ceiling mounted duct type Wall mounted type

Connection Unit Series Indoor Units

Centralized BS units Multi BS unit

Multi BS unit Multi BS unit

Multi BS unit Multi BS unit

2.2 Outside Units

16, 18, 20 class

24, 26, 28, 30 class

2.3 Air Treatment Equipment

With DX coil (GA)